人教版八年级英语课件

人教版八年级英语课件。

在校园里，我们阅读过许多范文，一篇好的范文会让我们学到东西，阅读范文可以让我们更容易渡过独处的时间。阅读范文还能够让自己加深对写作的了解，那么，您看过哪些值得借鉴的教师相关优秀范文吗？以下是小编为大家收集的“人教版八年级英语课件”仅供参考，希望能为您提供参考！

人教版八年级英语课件 篇1

1.学生能够通过复习频率词汇，来运用how often询问活动的频率。

2.通过谈论课余时间的各项活动，学生能够培养自己的逻辑表达能力。

3.学生能通过完成各项任务，养成合理安排时间的好习惯。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言，表达自己做某事的频率。

【学习难点】

能够流利谈论课余时间的各项活动

Learning action tips: Revise the sentences learned “How often…?”last lesson.

Task 1

Learning action tips：

1.Preview the words on Page11 in the word list. Students read the wordsby phonetic symbols, then underline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning.

2.Students read and translate the sentences in Grammar Focus on Page11.

【Method coach】

sometimes有时;不时，多用于一般现在时。

口诀记忆辨析：sometimes 的“四胞胎”分开是“一段”，sometime

相连为“某时”，sometime

分开加“s”是倍次，some times

相连加“s”是有时，sometimes

▲短语

at least至少，不少于

at most至多，不超过

Task 2

Learning action tips：

采访时，要求一个学生当主持人，做开场介绍。

We are reporters from English Learning.We want to know how you learnEnglish，so we have an interview.

其余同学根据讨论总结的句型提问，没有回答问题的同学做好相应记录。采访完后，点将请同学完成教材P11：3c的表格。情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you usually do on weekends?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Howoften do you exercise?

S：________________________________________________________________________

3.T：Howoften does she/he exercise?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

least，at least

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语和句子。

(1)熬夜stay__up__late

(2)吃健康的早饭eat__a__healthy__breakfast

(3)早点睡觉go__to__bed__early

(4)—他多久踢一次足球?—他最少一周两次。—How__often__does__he__play__soccer?—He__plays__it__at__least__twice__a__week.

(5)—你多久去看一次电影?—我大概一个月看一次电影。—How__often__do__you__go__to__the__movies?—I__go__to__the__movies__maybe__once__a__month.

3.I can use.(我会用)

辨析maybe与may be

maybe意为“大概;或许;可能”，是副词，常位于句首或句中。may be是情态动词may与动词原形be一起构成句子的谓语动词，意为“可能是”。

(D)—Whereis Mike?

—________he is in the classroom.

A.may beB.maybeC.MayD.Maybe

Task2Makeconversations and interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

完成3a后，朗读下列对话并背诵。

A：What does your__sisterdo on Saturday，Jane?

B：She often helps__with__housework.

A：How often does she go__to__the__movies?

B：Maybe once__a__month.

A：Do you take__a__walkevery day?

B：No，we__never__take__a__walk.

2.I can make conversations.(我会编对话)

你能结合所学句型及3b的内容编写对话吗?

A：What do you usually do on weekends?

B：I usually help with housework.

A：How often do you help with house work?

B：Twice a week. Do you help with housework?

A：No, I never help with housework.Ialways exercise.

B：Do you exercise every day?

A：Yes, I do every day.

【备注】

3.I can interview.(我会采访)

组内议论提高英语学习成绩的方法，完成3c。并结合课文内容总结采访中能用到的句型，然后以小记者的身份进行采访，向同学了解他或她是如何提高英语成绩的，看看谁的方法最好。

A：What__can__you__do__to__improve__your__English?

B：I__read__some__English__books.

A：How__often__do__you__read__English__books?

B：I__read__English__books__every__day.

…

交流展示　生成新知

Preshow：Show in groups. (Time：six minutes)

Task1：First read the words andphrases in groups，then read together andsum up the usage of the words in groups，markthe difficult words in pronunciation and understanding(students can ask teacherfor help).At last，write them on the blackboard.

Task2：First discuss and checkthe answers of Task 2 in groups, then discuss and set scenes to perform the dialogues，use the phrases we learnt to talkabout the frequency of part­time activities and makea survey about the frequency of all kinds of activities.At last，write them on the blackboard.

Promotionshow：Class show. (Time：sixteen minutes)

Task1：Ican read.(1)Readtogether, pay attention to the pronunciation of “least”;(2)Consolidate the words by word games.

2.I can write.(1)Translate the phrasesinto English or Chinese by answering quickly;(2)Readtogether;(3)Spot test：consolidate the usage of the phrasesby making sentences.

3.I can use.(1) Sum up the usage ofkey words according to the phrases in“I can write”;(2)Spot test: consolidate the usageof “maybe ”and “may be” with exercises，checkthe answers by answering quickly and explain .

Task2: 1.I can practice.(1)Choosestudents to act out the dialogues in role ;(2)Readtogether.

2.I can makeconversations.(1)Makedialogues according to the sentences in Grammar Focus and 3a;(2)Students make dialogues according to their own actual situation，discuss their dialogue in groups,then show them in class.

3.I can interview.(1)Interview among studentsaccording to 3b and show them on the blackboard in diagrams;(2)Show them in dialogues.

当堂演练　达成目标

用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。

1.Mary knows little Chinese so she hardly(hard)speaks Chinese.

2.I go to the movies maybe twice(two)a month.

3.How often does (do)Lily watchTV?

4.You must eat more vegetables and keephealthy(health).

5.Some boys play football two or threetimes(time)a week.

课后反思　

查漏补缺收获：________________________________________________________________________

存在困惑：________________________________________________________________________

人教版八年级英语课件 篇2

师： 春节俗称过大年。同学们为什么喜欢春节呢？

师： 刚才同学们有的谈到过年的风俗；有的讲述的是过年时开心快乐的事情，一年之计在于春，新年是及喜庆的字眼。每到这一天，人们都会准备些来年幸福美满的东西，如春糕、春馍、春酒等。这节课我们就共同去感受琦君儿时过年的自由和快乐，可以说甜甜的一杯春酒，是节日的珍品，是母亲的骄傲，更是作者最美好的回忆。让我们与作者一起，品味那尘封多年的春酒，在这被甘甜的“春酒”中尽情的陶醉吧！

1、学习文章富有情趣的细节描写，体会其作用。

2、理解文章表现的思乡的这一主旨。

二、在端饮这杯春酒前，请同学们带着大屏幕上的问题，用你最喜欢的读书方式整体感知课文，初识春酒：。

师：你在读课文时，有读不准的字音吗？检测一下同学们的预习情况（陈晓丽板书后齐读

家醅--家醅，挑剔--挑剔，如法炮制--如法炮制。

师：形容领先带头，你们知道意思，大家理解了，怎么不愿意表现一下呢？

生：文章写了过新年、喝春酒和喝会酒三件事，主要写的是过新年、喝春酒（2-4）和喝会酒（5-7）这两件事。

师：作者怀念的仅仅是家乡的春酒吗？下面请同学四人小组讨论交流一下。

（生讨论交流）并以“从-------------看出“我”还在怀念的句式说一句话”

生：我从作者写了自己家乡过新年的习俗，新年迎神拜佛，有许多规矩,元宵节后，换下的供品堆得满满的一大缸，孩子们的兴奋、快乐，家乡的紧张和繁忙。我怀念故乡的风俗美

生：还写了家家户户轮流邀喝春酒，我一马当先地作为母亲的代表前往家家户户喝春酒，乡亲们之间互相“起会”置办“会酒”的融洽。我怀念故乡的风俗美人情之美自己对故乡亲友的怀念

生：作者还写母亲做的八宝酒的做法，母亲的善良和大方，例如“到了喝春酒时，就开出来请大家尝尝，……母亲总是乐意把花厅供客人请客” 我对母亲的怀念

师：作者通过春酒写故乡的风俗之美、人情之美，写自己对故乡亲友的怀念，对母亲的追思，其间流淌着的是浓浓的思乡之情。

师：甜甜的一杯春酒，是节日的珍品，是母亲的骄傲，更是作者最美好的回忆。让我们与作者一起，尽情地陶醉在这杯甘醇的“春酒”之中！（点击大屏幕）请同学们看大屏幕，用圈点批注法找出你最喜欢的语句或词语，看谁找的语句最吸引人！（20分钟）

（文中的人物是通过许多很有情趣的描写来体现的，那同学们想想看，在吃春酒和喝会酒的时候小小的我获得了哪些快乐呢？我的哪个小小的举动、小小的情状、小小心思惹得你莞尔一笑？找出你最喜欢的语句或词语，找出来读一读，并说明原因。）

生7：我是母亲的代表，总是一马当先，不请自到，肚子吃得鼓鼓的跟蜜蜂似的，手里还捧一大包回家。

师：不是程度不一样，是鼓鼓的写出了吃的那种形态。为了写出这种形态，作者用了“像小蜜蜂似的”。鼓鼓的就非的像小蜜蜂似的吗，鼓鼓的不应该像小皮球似的吗？小企鹅似的，不也很可爱吗？为什么要像小蜜蜂似的？

师：因为蜜蜂很小，所以很可爱。很好，形体把握。还有呢？

师：太有想象力了，蜜蜂采完花蜜也是鼓鼓的。蜜蜂采完蜜除了鼓鼓的，还有什么？

师：喜悦，那种甜甜的喜悦和我喝完春酒之后甜甜的喜悦是一样的。非常好，还有吗?

师：她总是这样，一马当先，对不对啊?她就像只小蜜蜂一样频繁地穿梭在人群之中，还有吗？

生12：生：我最喜欢的是“其实我没等她说完，早已偷偷的把手指头在杯子里好几回，已经不知舔了多少个指甲缝的八宝酒了”，

师：哦，看出很淘气，还有呢?她偷偷地是在干嘛？

师：一个舔字把哪个馋猫的形象勾画出来了。作者在品尝八宝酒的时候那迫不及待的模样，小孩的活泼天真和顽皮，写的栩栩如生从母亲那浓郁可口的八宝酒中，我们也似乎嗅到亲情的芬芳与乡情的馥郁。还有吗？

生13：我呢，就在每个人怀里靠一下，用筷子点一下酒，舔一舔，才过瘾这些都是小孩子特有的动作与神态，在作者笔下，只有这么寥寥几笔，一个活泼可爱的小女孩立刻在纸上活动起来，还微微歪着脑袋冲着我们笑呢真是惟妙惟肖，语言虽然质朴简练，但字里行间充满了浓郁的人情味，读来也像是尝到了春酒一般怀了妙不可言的温暖。

师：是的，过春节的时候我们喜欢在这个伯伯面前蹭蹭，在那个叔叔面前靠靠。那他们就会拿筷子让我们添一添，这样我就会张开我们的小嘴叭咋叭咋。是吧，很可爱，

生14：抱着小花猫时，它直舔，舔完了就呼呼地睡觉。原来我的小花猫也是个酒仙呢

师：这是一个多么灵动的想象，小花猫都变成小酒仙了，连它也喜欢妈妈酿制的八宝酒。只有是个孩子才有这么灵气的想象。那我很舍得让我的小花猫吃吗？

师：其实我是蛮羡慕那只小花猫的，那是因为什么？那是因为我在喝八宝酒的时候，大家一齐读

生齐读：母亲给我在小酒杯底里只倒一点点，我端着、闻着，走来走去，有一次一不小心，跨门槛时跌了一跤，杯子捏在手里，酒却全洒在衣襟上了。抱着小花猫时，它直舔，舔完了就呼呼地睡觉。原来我的小花猫也是个酒仙呢！

师：当时是怎么样的啊？摔倒了杯子还捏在手里，很珍惜的。端着闻着。

从我们刚才回忆的这些童年往事中，我们看到了作者的快乐，看到了一个多么孩子气的绮君啊，那是谁制造了我这样的童年呢，是谁包容了我这样的孩子气呢？

师：是母亲，给我制造了这样一个梦幻般的童年。那文中母亲的哪个动作，哪些话语，哪些情态触动了你的内心，让你砰然心动，会发出这样的感慨：这个人就是娘啊。

生：我喜欢写母亲的细节，如“到了喝春酒时，就开出来请大家尝尝……”“母亲得意的说了一遍又一遍，高兴得两颊红红的，跟喝过酒似，其实母亲是滴酒不沾唇的”母亲因别人的赞美高兴得两颊红红，一位宽容，善良大度、充满美德的慈爱温柔的母亲真是历历在目。

生：她又转向我说：“但是你呀，就只能舔一指甲缝，小孩子喝多了会流鼻血，太补了。”

师：你只能添一指甲缝，对于我偷偷的行为，母亲没有大声地呵斥，而是温柔地提醒。还有吗

生：大家喝了甜美的八宝酒，都问母亲里面泡的是什么宝贝。母亲得意地说了一遍又一遍

过渡：春酒的确美不胜收，琦君笔下一切所有美好已成了琦君的心灵寄托，在现实中难以企及。如此至纯至美的心灵家园在琦君的绝大多数作品曾出现，这与她的经历有关（出示：19生于浙江永嘉，1949年赴台湾，26年后定居美国。）那么，如今客居美国，人近老年的琦君还能品尝到这美得醉人的春酒吗？还能喝到那种家醅吗？还能品出童年的快乐吗，童年早已逝去，历尽沧桑的绮君，如果还有幸回到故乡，那也已经是物是人非了。家醅已然不在，故乡却依然是水天一角，海阔山遥。家醅只存在于琦君的记忆里了，家乡味只能回味在心里了。

一位青年诗人这样说到：他对故乡的思念就是东方飘逸的童年，总爱把故乡思念成母亲的模样。一杯荡漾着孩子气的春酒，一杯浸渗着母爱的春酒，实质上是一杯浓浓的家乡酒，这是绮君对故乡的最深沉的、最刻骨铭心的眷念。路从今夜白，月是故乡明，对家乡的思念总是人们难以挥去的情愫。常年漂泊的琦君曾这样深情地说过：“像树木花草一样，谁能没有一个根呢？我若能忘掉故乡，忘掉亲人师友，忘掉童年，我宁愿搁下笔，此生永不再写。”（出示）可以看出，这个超凡脱俗的心灵永远走不出对家乡人、事诸物的怀念。教师范读同学们可能未曾远离过自己的故乡，很难体会到对故乡刻骨铭心的怀念，我们利用文字再来体会一下那种感伤。将课文最后一句话带着感伤的情怀再读一下。生齐读

师：叫我到哪儿去找真正的家醅呢？这句话于我们可能是悠悠的感伤，对于海外游子们却足以让他们潸然泪下。海外游子离开家乡的这种情怀，在历来的文章中常有渗透，可以说历经坎坷的诗人，忧国忧民的诗人、多愁善感的诗人，见他们漂泊一地的惆怅和思念家乡亲人的愁苦寄予与明月，于是他们的诗篇和月光一样光耀千古拨动着后人的心弦，我们再来结合他们的诗句来品位这杯春酒和这份家乡的情怀。能不能找出在其它诗句中诗人所传递出的那种思乡情怀。

师：非常好，正如我们同学们所说的其实对故乡的思念正如李白的“举头望明月，低头思故乡”的沉静；是崔颢的“日暮乡关何处是，烟波江上使人愁”的忧郁；是贺知章的“少小离家老大回,乡音无改鬓毛衰”的沧桑；其实它还是现代诗人余光中隔着海峡传来的“大陆在那头，我在这头”；它也是席慕容心中那颗“永不老去的，惟有绵绵的爱意”。孩子们，借着文人们这些笔墨，我们再来看看绮君在《春酒》中渗透的浓浓的故乡情怀，对于这一杯春酒我们再到余光中的乡愁中，去深深体会。（教师范读）38

六、教师小结结束语：一路走来，风景无限；一路品来，春酒醇香无比。其实，春酒的美还有很多很多，我们课堂40分钟无法穷尽，有待于我们同学课后再去领略。最后，送上我的一段话，这是我在读完《春酒》后，在一个寂静的深夜写下的文字：“在行色匆匆、只争朝夕的日子里，我们几多疲累，几多迷茫。或许真的该为流浪的心灵和漂泊的灵魂安个家了，她或许是琦君魂牵梦绕的春酒，她或许是鲁迅没看真切的社戏，亦或是令佩弦潸然泪下的背影……年年岁岁，花开花落，任世间万象纷繁变迁，唯一不变的是我们这方脚下

[《春酒》教学设计(人教版八年级下册)]

人教版八年级英语课件 篇3

【学习目标】

1.学生学会形容词或副词比较级形式的构成及两者进行比较的一些常用词汇与句型。

2.通过听对人物的外表进行描绘、个性进行比较的对话，学生学会怎样就两者进行比较。

3.学生学会用比较级进行信息交流，增强自信心，多交益友，快乐生活，快乐学习。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言交流如何运用比较级描绘人物的外貌与个性。

【学习难点】

学习形容词和副词比较级的用法

Learning action tips：Accordingto the actual situation of the students in class, create scene to lead in the new course by the way of teacher and student\'squestion and answer：

—Which one is more hard­working at their lessons? —Lisa is.

And revise the adjectives about describing the appearance and personalityof a person.

Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page17-18 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.

【知识链接】

clearly adv.清楚地;清晰地;明白地

【拓展】

形容词后加上­ly常构成副词。eg：loud→loudly;quiet→quietly;serious→seriously;usual→usually;different→differently;real→really

friendly adj.友好的

(1)friendly的比较级是more friendly。

(2)be friendly to sb.对某人友好的。

【拓展】

某些名词后加上­ly可构成形容词。eg：month→monthly;mother→motherly;week→weekly;day→daily情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you think of your best friend?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Isshe taller than you?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1　Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

outgoing，better，loudly，quietly，hard­working，competition，fantastic，which，clearly，win，though

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语：

(1)敲鼓play__the__drums　(2)长(短)头发long(short)__hair

(3)更外向more__outgoing　(4)和……一样努力work__as__hard__as

(5)起得早get__up__early　(6)跑得快run__fast

(7)歌咏比赛the__singing__competition

(8)最主要的事情the__most__important__thing

(9)学到新东西learn__something__new　(10)玩得高兴have__fun

3.I can summarize.(我会总结)

形容词和副词比较级的变化规则：

(1)一般的在词尾加er

(2)以不发音的字母e结尾的词尾加r

(3)以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节，先双写这个辅音字母再加er

(4)以辅音字母加y结尾先改y为i再加er

(5)多音节和部分双音节词在该词前面加more

(6)不规则的变化需要我们用心记忆

写出下列形容词或副词的比较级。

(1)long longer (2)short shorter 　(3)nice nicer (4)early earlier

(5)big bigger (6)hot hotter (7)thin thinner (8)easy easier

(9)quietly more__quietly(10)beautiful more__beautiful(11)good better

Task2　Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.

Task3　Makeconversations an interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

A：Peter，(1)is__that__Paul?

B：No, that\'s Tom. Paul is thinner thanTom.

And he also (2)has__longer__hair(更长的头发)than Tom.

A：Oh，(3)can__they__sing?

B：Yes, they can sing well.

A：(4)Who__can__sing__better，Paul or Tom?

B：Tom sings better than Paul…

win

v.获胜;赢;赢得

n.winner 获胜者

【辨析】

win与beat

两者均可作动词，意为“赢”，但用法不同：

(1)win(won，won)后接比赛、竞赛、战斗、奖品、钱等名词。

(2)beat(beat，beaten)后接竞争对手。

【导练】

(1)我们的队赢得了篮球比赛。Our team won the basketball match.

(2)昨天乒乓球比赛我打败了内莉。I beat Nelly at ping­pong yesterday.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇4

课前准备：

教师：录音机，所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练及相关的学习用具

Teaching procedures(教学步骤):

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1.Greetings and free-talk .

2.Check the Homework(家庭作业) .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)SB Page 24 , Groupwork .

1.Arrange the Ss in small groups .Ask them to look at the pictures and talk

about the events .Encourage students to say how historical events affected their

lives .

2.Tell the Ss to help each other with vocabulary they might need and don’t

know .

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)

1.Reading strategy :The title can be helpful for you to understand a text

.It is also a good idea to read the first sentence of each paragraph before

reading .

2.Read the title ,which gives an indication of the content of the reading

.Think of one question they think might be answered in the reading .

3.Play the recording , Ss listen . 4.Ask Ss to read the story out to the

class .

5.Ask Ss to comment on whether their questions in the previewing stage were

answered .

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 25 , 3a .

Read the four events and match them to the correct dates .When finished

,ask Ss to swap their book with a partner for correction .

Homework(家庭作业) :

Write about an event that you remember well .Give dates and say why you

remember it ,and what you were doing at the time when you heard the news .

教学后记:

第六课时：测试课

一、单项选择。

( )1. What ____ you ____ when she came in?

A. did, do B. are, doing C. do, do D. were, doing

( )2. The girl is ill. She’s ______.

A. in hosp

人教版八年级英语课件 篇5

课前准备：

教师：录音机，所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练及相关的学习用具

Teaching procedures(教学步骤) :

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1. Greeting and free talk .

2. Check the Homework(家庭作业) .Collect the students’ advice .Write it down on the Bb .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)

1.Review the differences between “could /should” .

2. Learn the new words in Page 12 .

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 12 , 3a .

1. Read the instructions .

2. Read the conversations by Ss or listen to the tape .Then write “good idea” “okay idea” or “bad idea” .

3. Talk about the students’ answers .

4. Make sure the students understand the dialogue.Practice reading

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 12 , 3b .

1. Read the instructions .Point out the example conversation and ask two students to read it to the class .

2. Use your head .Find some other ways to get money that aren’t in the book .

3. Ask Ss to work with partner as they ask for and give advice .

4.Pairwork .

5. Act out the conversations to the class .

Step 5 While-task(任务中活动)SB Page 12 , Part 4 .

1. Read the instructions .Make sure the Ss understand what they should do .

2. To students read the dialogue .

3. Practice reading .

4. Ask another pair to give their advice on another topic .

5. Pairwork .(互助活动)

Homework(家庭作业) :

将下列短语或句型译为汉语

1. keep out 2. out of style 3. What’s wrong ?

4. call sb up 5. pay for 6. ask for something

7. summer camp 8. stay at home

教学后记:

人教版八年级英语课件 篇6

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案6篇

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇1

在这一学期中，我们九年级英语备课组教师在学校行政的领导下，教导处的指导下，按照英语教研组的计划扎扎实实地进行工作，尽力做到既教书又育人，各项工作齐头并进，圆满完成本学期的各项工作，下面从几个方面总结一下：

一、树立竟争意识，关爱每一位学生

面向全体学生，提高学生的道德素养，我们英语组每位老师敬业奉献，树立竞争意识，提高自身素质。在以人为本，以爱育人的教育理念指导下，把育人放在第一位，关爱后进生。树立新的教育理念，确实抓好教学。在教学中，我们把落实新课改，推进课程改革放在首位，因为新的课程标准颁布是基础教育的重大改革，对此，我组全体老师积极响应付诸实施。我们认真思考，积极讨论，制定出课改具体计划。我们通过相互观摩课、看录像等形式加强“课改”理论学习，提高自身的素质。

二、规范教学管理，进一步提高教学质量

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。教学难度比较大的课，如果照本宣科地讲授，学生会感到困难和沉闷。为了上好每堂课，我们每位老师认真研究探讨，找出了重点，难点。

三、关爱每个学生，缩小两极分化

因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我们制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

四、按照教学常规五个环节开展教学工作

备课：课前认真地备好每一节课，写好教案。既备教材，又备学生，针对学生分析、概括、表达能力差的特点，设计好教学方法。上课：每天都保持饱满的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛，认真做好组织教学，尽可能保证上课内容丰富，现实，教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，并且充分调动学生的学习积极性，设法令学生投入，不让其分心，让学生多动手，多动口、，多动脑，让课堂气氛活跃起来，充分调动学生的主观

能动性，力图让学生学有所得，学有所乐。作业和辅导：作业的布置适量，有针对性，重点放在遣词造句、阅读理解等;批改作业时多用赞美式、鼓励性的语言予以评价。对学生的辅导方面，做到有耐心，有方法，因材施教，个别无心思学的学生，经过一个学期的耐心教育，学习兴趣明显提高，成绩也有较大的进步。考试：本学期进行了多次阶段性的考试。每次的考试，都能做到考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结，及时查漏补缺，从中改正教学方法，也让学生调整学习方法，争取更大的进步。

五、其他方面

1、把握教学进度，合理安排时间，统一教学进度，顺利完成了本学期的教学任务。

2、认真辅导、组织学生参加了本学期举行的英语竞赛活动，并且取得了优异成绩。王梦涵同学和张宇熠同学在区英语口语比赛中获得一等奖。

3、为了加强自身的业务水平，积极对各种教育理论进行学习，给自己充电，以便在工作中以坚实的理论作为指导，更好地进行教育教学;努力提高英语专业水平，以适应当前教育的形式，为更好地进行素质教育夯实基础，撰写出较有质量的教育教学论文并进行各种课题的研究。

六、今后采取的措施

从今年网上阅卷的情况来看，可以检测老师的水平，也能了解学生在各方面的不足之处。在以后的教学中，加强学生们的书写，审题把握中心，并且在写作运用上加大力度。

#380450

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇2

本学期我担任初三级(1)班、(2)班的英语教学。由于教学经验颇浅，我对教学工作不敢怠慢，认真学习，深入研究教法，虚心学习。经过一个学期的努力，获取了很多宝贵的教学经验。以下是我在本学期的教学情况。

一、备好课，备好学生，上好课

教学就是教与学，两者是相互联系，不可分割的，有教者就必然有学者。学生是被教的主体。因此，了解和分析学生情况，有针对地教对教学成功与否至关重要。不懂得了解学生对教学的重要性，只是专心研究书本，教材，想方设法令课堂生动，学生易接受，这是很容易碰钉子的。在上课前要了解清楚学生的实际情况：

一方面，农村的学生英语听，说的能力相对较弱，授课采用较深的全英教学，同学们较难适应。另一方面，(1)班的同学比较沉静，中等生占较大多数，尖子生相对较少。因此，讲得太深，就照顾不到整体，而(2)班的同学比较活跃，上课气氛积极，虽然优生比例大，但中等生也有一小部分，我备课时也注意到这点，因此教学效果比较理想。从此可以看出，了解及分析学生实际情况，实事求是，具体问题具体分析，做到因材施教，对授课效果有直接影响。这就是教育学中提到的“备教法的同时要备学生”。这一理论在我的教学实践中得到了验证。

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，备学生，又要备教法。备课不充分或者备得不好，会严重影响课堂气氛和积极性，因此，每天我都花费大量的时间在备课之上，认认真真钻研教材和教法，不满意就不收工。虽然辛苦，但事实证明是值得的。

一堂准备充分的课，会令学生和老师都获益不浅。我认真研究了课文，找出了重点，难点，准备有针对性地讲。为使教学生动，不沉闷，我还为此准备了大量的教具，授课时就胸有成竹了。相反，我没有认真备课的时候，课堂气氛沉闷，教学效果不好，与此相比可见，认真备课对教学十分重要。特别是对英语这门学生不甚熟悉并感到困难的外语来说至关重要。

备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。但同时又要有驾驭课堂的能力，因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学。因此上课一定要设法令学生投入，不让其分心，这就很讲究方法了。上课内容丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。所以，老师每天都要有充足的精神，让学生感受到一种自然气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。

二、激发学生学习兴趣

英语是一门外语，对学生而言，既生疏又困难，在这样一种大环境之下，要教好英语，就要让学生喜爱英语，让他们对英语产生兴趣。否则学生对这门学科产生畏难情绪，不愿学，也无法学下去。为此，我采取了一些方法，就是尽量多讲一些关于英美国家的文化，生活故事，让他们更了解英语，更喜欢学习英语。因为只有英语水平提高，他们才能达到交异国笔友的目的，同时也可以提高同学们的英语写作能力，对成绩优秀的同学很有好处。因为英语的特殊情况，学生在不断学习中，会出现好差分化现象，差生面扩大，会严重影响班内的学习风气。因此，绝对不能忽视。为此，我制定了具体的计划和目标。对这部分同学进行有计划的辅导。

三、注重听、说、读、写全面发展

英语是语言。因此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持下班了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强硬背诵等方式，提高他们的能力。期中考和期末考是考察每位同学在本学期的学习成果，因此应该予以重视。考试前进行有系统的复习，考试后进行学科总结。在中段考后的时间里，我把力量主要集中在两班的差生辅导上，特别是(4)班，以缩短差距。另外，还发现学生的综合能力不够强，所以以后的教学中要加强这方面的训练。让学生轻松学，容易掌握。而期考结果证明，适当辅导后进生对班的整体发展有很大帮助。

经过一个学期的努力，期末考就是一种考验。无论成绩高低，都体现了我在这学期的教学成果。我明白到这并不是最重要的，重要的是在本学期后如何自我提高，如何共同提高两班的英语水平。因此，无论怎样辛苦，我都会继续努力，多问，多想，多向别人学习，争取进步。

#380976

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇3

今年我担任毕业班两个班的英语，感到压力沉重。因为这两个班的学生素质相对较低，而且英语底子参差不齐，而九年级是整个初中阶段最重要一年，为使学生在英语这门学科上取得更大的进步，取得优异的成绩，我在教学中尝试了一些教学方法，现总结如下：

一、备课

教学中，备课是一个必不可少，十分重要的环节，既要备教材、备学生，又要备教法。备课充分，能调动学生的积极性，上课效果就好。

二、培养学生良好的英语学习习惯

我校的学生来源全是农村的，学生家长以及周围的环境对学习英语都不是很关注，而且大多是留守学生，学生的学习自觉性也较差，主要表现在以下几个方面：

1、不把背的作业当回事。学过的单词，句型，短文，老师要求背出，学生总是借口其他作业太多，没时间背等，往后一拖再拖，即便能背出来，也是临时死记强记出来的。等过不了多久又忘了。

2、针对性习题跟不上上过的新课，相应的配套练习，不能自觉去独立完成，总需要老师再三强调，但仍有部分学生拖拖拉拉不做。死记硬背的东西多，联系的东西少，因此表面上看感觉还可以，但真正一考起来，问题出来很多，而且差距很大。经过几次考试下来，问题也出来了，我任教的两个班：尖子生只有几个，中等生断层，差生面特大。

针对以上情况，改变这种局面，我从下面几个方面着手：

首先，培养学生良好的学习习惯，课前多预习，课堂45分钟让学生集中注意力听讲，把老师讲的内容真正听懂。不能似懂非懂。课后认真完成配套的巩固练习，不懂的地方，多向老师或成绩稍好的学生请教。

其次，学生学习要主次分明，主要学科课后时间分配相应的因当多一些，特别是对英语学科，因为他毕竟不是母语。基础不打好，以后想提高也难。

第三，灵活掌握学过的知识点，学习要讲究方法，举一反三，融会贯通，只有这样，学生才能把所学的知识串联起来，不容易忘记。要让学生明白，学习英语不是一天两天的事，是要靠平时慢慢积累起来的。

三、建设高效的课堂，努力提高驾驭课堂的能力

因为学生在课堂上的一举一动都会直接影响课堂教学，所以上课一定要设法吸引学生，不让其分心，上课内容力求丰富，现实。教态自然，讲课生动，难易适中照顾全部，就自然能够吸引住学生。另外，我每天都坚持保持充足的精神，让学生感受到一种积极上进的气氛。这样，授课就事半功倍。为了让学生真正参入到课堂中来，凡是学生自己能讲清楚的问题，都让学生自己解决，老师决不越俎代庖，课堂上尽量精讲、少讲把时间都留给学生。

四、加强课外辅导

英语学习是语言的学习。困此，除了课堂效果之外，还需要让学生多读，多讲，多练。为此，在早读时，我坚持认真了解早读情况，发现问题及时纠正。课后发现学生作业问题也及时解决，及时讲清楚，让学生即时消化。另外，对部分不自觉的同学还采取强制背诵等方式，帮助他们养成良好习惯，提高他们的英语学习能力。

以上就是我在本学期的教学工作总结，有成绩也有不足。今后我将继续努力，取得更好成绩.

#380975

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇4

时光飞逝，短暂而又愉快的假期生活已经结束了。接下来我所面临的是紧张而又愉快的新学期的教育教学生活。为把新学期的教育教学工作做好，特此作如下教学计划：

一.指导思想。

“减负”的内在，并以此指导自己的教育教学工作，遵循教育教学规律，紧扣大纲，把我教学层次，不断提高自己的业务水平。

二.基本情况。

这一学期，我继续担任初一(1，2)班的英语教学工作。这两个班级，每班各有学生三十五人左右，但是，基础却不尽人意。初一.1班的学生基础还可以，但是2班的基础却相差很远，学生基础参差不齐，两极分化严重，没有学习的兴趣。因此，教学工作开展的相当困难。

三.教材特点。

初中英语第一册(下)主要介绍了日常生活的交际用语以及一些西方国家的文化背景和风俗习惯，教材通俗易懂，旨在使初一级学生基本能用英语进行简单的交流。

四.教学目标。

力争在期末考试中优秀率打到30%左右，及格率达到60%左右。缩小学生间的差距。为下一学期的英语教育教学工作打下以良好的基础。

五.具体措施。

1.每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2.每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3.认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5.对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自信，尽快成长起来。

6.关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7.实施任务型的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力。

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

9.加强对学生学习策略的指导，为他们终身学习奠定基础。

10.认真钻研教材，备好，上好每一节课，向45分钟要质量。

总之，新的学期已经开始了，我要以上一学期的基础为起点，树立信心，全身心的投入到新学期的教育教学工作中去。争取在新的一年里，把教育教学工作推向一新的层次。

#277306

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇5

本学期我担任初三级(10)班、(13)班的英语教学。本学期以来,本人遵守学校各项制度，按时上课、组织学生早读，积极参加学校组织的各种教学活动，从各方面更加严格要求自己，结合本校的实际条件和学生的实际情况，认真备课、听课，深入研究教法，虚心向老教师请教，及时反思教学，使教学有计划、有组织、有步骤地开展虚心学习。现对本学期以来的教学教育工作做以下总结，希望不断发扬优点，克服缺点，总结经验，吸取教训，使自己的教学工作更上一层楼。

一、认真制定教学计划，使教学有序地进行。在新课程改革精神和新的教学理念的灌溉下，我依照教学大纲、教材、学生实际和教育教学规律，制定了学期教学计划，规划好阶段计划，课时计划。在此基础上，设计好每一堂课。

二、认真备课。作为一名年轻教师，我的体会是，上好一堂课难，但备好一堂课更难。在备课之前，必须对所有内容进行熟悉，参考多方面的资料，认真深入钻研教材，确定重点难点，同时，备课不仅要备教材，而且要备教法，备教学手段，因此，本人在自身努力钻研教材和教法的基础上，积极配合搞好同年级老师的小组集体备课。

三、认真组织课堂教学。一堂课的四十五分钟，就是一个教师表演技能的阶段。上课时，本着“传道、授业、解惑”的原则，努力提高教学质量，使讲解有条理、清晰、准确、生动。使每堂课学生有所获，努力使学生打好基础，培养能力，发展智慧，培养学生的正确思维方式，养成良好的学习习惯。坚持做到以学生为主体，教师为主导，训练为主线。在课堂上，特别注意调动学生的积极性，加强师生交流，充分体现学生的主体作用，让学生学得容易，学得轻松，学得愉快。在课堂上，根据不同学生设计不同层次的问题，树立学生的自信心，让各层次的学生都得到提高。

四、虚心请教其他教师。教师的教学过程即是一个学习的过程。因此，在此过程中，一旦心中有疑，必会请教于同行。由于自己是一个教坛新手，缺乏经验，所以有许许多多的东西都须向其他教师学习。认真做到每月听课两节，做好听课记录，取之所长，克服所短。并常常与其他教师交流，改进教学方法。

五、认真批改作业。坚持布置适量的作业，使学生所学知识得到巩固和提高。布置作业时，坚持做到有针对性，有层次性，形式多样化。以此同时，提倡学生写英语周记，坚持每两周检查一次。每周布置听写任务，对所学新单词、新短语、好句子进行听写。认真及时地批改作业、作文、周记及听写。并针对学生的作业作文情况，认真透彻地进行讲评，根据其情况不断改进教法。

六、认真反思教学。教学这一活动，没有反思的伴随就不会有进步。坚持每次授课后，认真回想，进行反思。记录其教法、做法及操作不大理想的地方，虚心请教前来听课的领导及教师，及时做改进。并根据班级情况，分组教学，使组与组之间进行竞争学习。正所谓“有竞争才有动力”，坚持长期性评价原则，使学生在组中相互帮助，相互学习，培养团结互助的学习精神。

七、做好课后辅导工作。在课后，对不同的学生进行相应的辅导。从平时的课堂反应，课后交流，周记记录中掌握各个学生的心理状况，抓住他们的特点和个性，有的放矢地与其进行交流，做到按层次、按情况进行辅导。及时给予关怀和关爱。善于发现学生的优点，并给予表扬;积极发现后进生的闪光点，及时给予鼓励，树立他们的自信心。充分结合课本知识，给学生讲相关的英语故事，了解外国文化，扩大知识面。引导他们对学习萌发兴趣，从而自觉地把身心投入到学习中去。

总之，在这一学期的教学过程中，我尽力地做好每项工作。其中学到的东西固然不少，但不足之处也很多。在以后的教学工作中，我将不断总结经验，发扬优点，改进缺点，不断探索新的教学方法和教学手段，激发学生的学习兴趣和积极性，提高自己的教学质量，做一位合格的人民教师，让我这颗教坛上的新星更加耀眼!

#380977

人教版新目标英语八年级上册教案篇6

以“英语课程标准”为宗旨，适应新课程改革的需要，面向全体学生，提高学生的人文素养，增强实践能力和创新精神。正确把握英语学科特点，积极倡导合作探究的学习方式。培养学生积极地情感态度和正确的人生价值观，提高学生综合素质为学生全面发展和终身发展奠定基础。具体如下：

1、要面向全体学生，关注每个学生的情感，激发他们学习英语的兴趣，帮助他们建立学习的成就感和自信心,培养创新精神;

2、整体设计目标，体现灵活开放，目标设计以学生技能，语言知识，情感态度，学习策略和文化意识的发展为基础;

3、突出学生主体，尊重个体差异;

4、采用活动途径，倡导体验参与，即采用任务型的教学模式，让学生在老师的指导下通过感知、体验、实践、参与和合作等方式，实现任务的目标，感受成功;

5、注重过程评价，促进学生发展，建立能激励学生学习兴趣和自主学习能力发展的评价体系。

总之，让学生在使用英语中学习英语，让学生成为GoodUser而不仅仅是Learner。让英语成为学生学习生活中最实用的工具而非累赘，让他们在使用和学习英语的过程中，体味到轻松和成功的快乐，而不是无尽的担忧和恐惧。

二、全期教学总目标

学生应有较明确的英语学习动机和积极主动的学习态度。能听懂教师对有关熟悉话题的陈述并能参与讨论。能读供七至八年级学生阅读的简单读物和报纸杂志，克服生词障碍，理解大意。能根据阅读目的运用适当的阅读策略。能与他人合作，解决问题并报告结果，共同完成学习任务。能在学习中互相帮助，克服困难。能合理计划和安排学习任务，积极探索适合自己的学习方法。在学习和日常交际中能注意到中外文化的差异。

三.教材简要分析

《新课标英语》(冀教版)八年级(下册)，全书共有八个单元。本教材各单元话题灵活，贴近生活实际。本册书将学习的一些语法知识点有：一般将来时、过去进行时、现在完成时、间接引语、时间状语从句、条件状语从句、反意疑问句等。同时每个单元后都提供了一篇阅读文章，用以训练学生的阅读能力，扩大学生的阅读量。

四、学情简要分析

初二年级

5、6班，共有学生人数 人，其中男生人，女生人。通过初一年半的英语学习，大多数学生已能听懂有关熟悉话题的语段和简短的故事。能与教师或同学就熟悉的话题交换信息。能读懂短篇故事，能写便条和简单的书信。但由于各种因素的影响，学生发展参差不齐。有少数学生因为基础不够好，学习很吃力而自暴自弃，有的因此扰乱课堂次序，这给教学带来不少困难。

五、提高教学质量可行措施及教改措施：

(一)、面向全体学生，注重素质教育。

(二)、以学生为主体，尊重学生个体差异。

(三)、采用活动途径，倡导体验与参与。

(四)、开发课程资源，拓展学用渠道。

具体来说：

1.认真专研教材和课标，精心备课，认真上好每一堂课。确定每堂课的基础内容，预备内容和拓展内容，满足不同层次学生的不同需求。

2.充分利用现有的现代化教学设备，加强直观教学，提高课堂效率。

3.多与学生沟通，了解学生学习状况和需求，及时改进教学中存在的问题和不足。

4.积极开展丰富多彩的英语活动，提高学生兴趣。如英语演讲比赛、单词听写比赛、朗读 比赛、英语手抄报比赛、学唱英文歌曲，课前五分钟活动等。

5.注重个别辅导，在面向全体学生的基础上，培优补差。

6.不断学习，加强自身素质和业务能力的提高。

对于学生具体要求：

1. 每天背诵课文中的对话。目的：要求学生背诵并默写，培养语感。

2. 每天记5个生词，2个常用句子或习语。实施：利用“互测及教师抽查”及时检查，保证效果并坚持下去。

3. 认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

4.坚持日测、周测、月测的形成性评价制度：对英语学习实行量化制度，每日、每周、每月都要给学生检验自己努力成果的机会，让进步的同学体会到成就感，让落后的同学找出差距，感受压力。由此在班里形成浓厚的学习氛围，培养学生健康向上的人格和竞争意识。

5. 对后进生进行专门辅导，布置单独的作业，让他们在小进步、小转变中体味学习的快乐，树立学习的自 信，尽快成长起来。

6. 关注学生的情感，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。

7. 实施"任务型"的教学途径，培养学生综合语言运用能力

8.在教学中根据目标并结合教学内容，创造性地设计贴近学生实际的教学活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与。学生通过思考、调查、讨论、交流和合作等方式，学习和使用英语，完成学习任务。

#277307

人教版八年级英语课件 篇7

U1.fix one’s attention/ eyes on集中注意力于

3.at first sight; lose one’s sight; at the sight of ;catch sight of;

out of one’s sight/beyond one’s sight/ in one’s sight

景色，景象（可数，常用复数）The sunrise is a beautiful sight.

4. have an appetite for (knowledge) 求知欲

7.on purpose故意地; for the purpose of 为了…的目的

9. supply sth to/for sb; supply sb with sth

provide sth for sb; provide sb with sth

10.look out! = watch out!

11.be involved in (trouble) 卷入,忙于

12. the private/ state enterprise (私营/国营)企业

a spirit of enterprise 进取精神, 事业心

13. abandoned practice抛弃了的，废弃了的做法

14.a large amount of/ amounts of +u.n

15.experiment with/ on (animals)用…做实验

16.You deserve punishment/ punishing/ to be punished.

18.be designed to do / for sth/sb专为…设计的，打算

19.在脑海中出现某种想法A good idea occurred to me.

It occurred to me that…

22.lead a cosy life; a cosy little house

人教版八年级英语课件 篇8

《三峡》是人教版语文教材八年级（上）第六单元的第一篇文章。八年级上册一共安排了两个文言单元。基本上是篇幅短小，内容浅显的古代散文和诗歌。旨在通过对它们的学习，让学生逐步接触、了解我国古代的优秀文化，引起学生学习古代散文和诗歌的兴趣；让学生感受到古代文学作品的美。本文在第二个文言单元，是北魏郦道元《水经注》中关于三峡的一段注释，同时也是一篇很好的写景散文。课文通过对三峡的山水和一年四季三峡景色的描写，向我们展现了三峡的美丽风光。文章写景生动，用词精准，有着一种特殊的艺术魅力，尤其是作者的正面侧面、动静相结合的描写手法，更是令人赞叹。

学生通过七年级和八年级上一个单元的学习，已经有了一定的文言词汇的积累，掌握了简单的学习文言文的方法。在利用工具书和课下注释来疏通文意已能很好完成，但八年级学生的特点和知识结构，要赏析文章，尤其是写景散文，还是有一定难度的。对于本节课的学习学生可能遇到的障碍是：在欣赏“语言之美”环节。为了较好的达到教学目的，我通过从赏析内容到写法再到意境，逐步深入，并在“语言之美”环节时举例，学生能够做到举一反三。

1、领会课文内容，体会三峡风光自然美。

2、学习本文抓住特点描写三峡自然景物的方法，学习正面、侧面相结合和动静相结合等描写方法。

3、通过抓住关键词语，体会文章语言的精妙。

1、能在深入学习文本后，概括出各段的景物特点，提高概括能力。

2、通过示例，能举一反三，培养学生分析、欣赏美文的能力；

3、使学生进一步了解讨论、合作活动过程，培养学生共同协作能力；

1、有与他人交流和合作的精神、敢于提出自己不同的见解；

2、逐步领略文本的美妙，激发学生热爱祖国大好河山的感情。

3、多媒体课件和丰富的网上资料，培养学生热爱语文、热爱阅读古代优秀散文的情感。

四、教学重点和难点：

1、教学重点：体会三峡风光自然美。掌握作品景物描写的方法。

多媒体展示三峡的风光图片。

导入：上节课我们走进了《三峡》，疏通了文意，了解了课文内容。现在请大家一起来背诵课文。

一、在大家的背诵中，再一次把我们带入了三峡美景，回顾上节课我们概括的四幅图景，说说作者写出了三峡景物的什么特征，共同来体会文章的内容之美。

学生分组讨论交流，每组负责一个语段，然后选四位同学全班交流。

1、学生明确：第1段重点写山，“两岸连山，略无阙处”，两岸都是连绵的高山，几乎没有中断的地方，突出群山连绵的特点。“重岩叠嶂，隐天蔽日，自非亭午夜分，不见曦月”是说一层层的悬崖，一排排的峭壁，把天空和太阳都遮蔽了，如果不是在正午、半夜的时候，连太阳和月亮都看不见。说明江面狭窄，两岸雄峰相连，峭壁对峙，只看见一线天。突出峰峦重迭，雄峻险拔的山势。突出三峡群山连绵，高耸入云的雄壮美。

教师根据学生讲述板书：

2、学生明确：第2、3、4段写水，描绘不同季节的不同景象。

第2段写夏季三峡情景。“夏水襄陵，沿溯阻绝”是说夏天水涨，江水淹了山陵，上行和下航的船只都被阻绝，不能通航，突出大水猛涨。“或王命急宣，有时朝发白帝，暮到江陵，其间千二百里，虽乘奔御风，不以疾也。”是说有时皇帝的命令要急速传达，才会有航船，只要清早坐船从白帝城出发，傍晚便可到江陵。中间相距一千二百里，即使骑着骏马，驾着疾风，也不如它快。以船行之快突出江流湍急的特点。突出江水浩荡、日行千里的奔放美

教师根据学生讲述板书：

3、学生明确：第3段写三峡春冬之景。“素湍绿潭，回清倒影”是说在春冬两个季节，雪白的急流，回旋着清波；碧绿的深潭，倒映着各种景物的影子。波光粼粼，景物重重，一派秀丽风光。“绝 多生怪柏，悬泉瀑布，飞漱其间”是说在极高的山峰上，生长着许多奇形怪状的柏树，在山峰之间，常有悬泉瀑布飞流冲荡，山静、泉飞、柏怪、水奇，构成一幅挺拔超脱的画面。“清荣峻茂，良多趣味”，水清，树荣，山高，草盛，趣味无穷。用极为精练的四个字状写四种景物，总结全段，突出春冬之时三峡秀美、挺拔的清幽美。

教师根据学生讲述，板书：

4．学生明确：第4段写三峡秋景。“每至清初霜旦，林寒涧肃”是说每到初晴的时候或下霜的早晨，树林和山涧显出一片清凉和寂静，充满凄清肃杀的气氛。“常有高猿长啸，属引凄异，空谷传响，哀转久绝”是说高处的猿猴拉长声音鸣叫，声音连续不断，非常凄凉怪异。空旷的山谷传来猿啼的回声，悲哀婉转，很久很久才消失。写秋峡以代表性事物猿来表现，山猿哀鸣，渲染了秋天的萧瑟气氛。感受秋峡萧瑟冷清的凄婉美。

教师根据学生讲述板书：

二、三峡如此的险峻峭拔，全文仅150多字，可谓精致短小，然而作者竟在这极短的篇幅之内，浓缩了万千气象，展现了无限风光，可谓内容丰富，笔力雄健。下面我们就来欣赏作者的笔法之美吧。

描绘景物的方法很多，可从正面描写、侧面烘托；可从动、静方面写；可从声、色、形、味方面写；可从视、听、嗅、味、触方面写；还可从高、低、远、近方面写。请以第一、三段为例，分析作者是从哪些方面来写三峡的？

学生思考后，请同学说说：

1、正面写山“连”的特点，粗笔勾勒，轮廓分明。“隐天蔽日”，山隐于天空，遮住太阳，侧面烘托山“高”。正面描写和侧面烘托相结合，写出了山高岭连的特点。

2、既有俯察近物，又有仰观远景。“素湍绿潭，回清倒影”属俯视江中所见，动静相杂，色彩各异，相映成趣。“绝 多生怪柏，悬泉瀑布，飞漱其间”属仰观远景，以“绝”状山，以“怪”写柏，绘形写貌，形神兼备。“怪柏”显示着旺盛的生命力和坚强的意志，给山水之间注入一股生命的活力，使人顿觉生意盎然。

三、本文的作者郦道元是地理学家。一位地理学家却用文学的语言，独特的视角，把三峡描绘的如此出神入化，其用词的精妙，实在不能不令人惊叹。那么我们以第三、四段为例，来体会本文语言的精妙吧。

学生讨论后回答：第三段中“素湍绿潭”，一“素”一“绿”，两种色彩、两种情态，动静交织，对比鲜明；“怪柏、悬泉、瀑”，也是有静有动、有声有色，山水树木交汇其中，蔚为奇观。“清荣峻茂”一句话四字写四物，一字一景，字字珠玑，惊人赞叹。“良多趣味”中一“趣”字又掺入了作者的审美意趣，使得诗情画意融为一体。

第四段中“林寒涧肃”，一“寒”一“肃”已经是够凄清的了，“空谷传响”的“高猿长啸”已经够凄异了，然而啼声的“哀转久绝”更让闻者倍感寒意了。而且最后的“巴东三峡巫峡长，猿鸣三声泪沾裳”顿然将这凄寒之境进行升华，它唱出了哀婉的猿声中旅人的悲凉心境，更加烘托出秋景的凄凉。在尽写了山光水色之后将笔触转向“猿”与“人”，从而深化文章意境，这就是作者的妙笔所在。

教师小结并板书：作者在炼字选词、情景韵味方面，实在精妙。所以余秋雨曾在自己的《三峡》中有这样的评价：他还用最省俭的字句刻画过三峡春冬之时的“清荣峻茂”，晴初霜旦的“林寒涧肃”，使后人再难调动描述的词章。

学完本文，你觉得作者的哪些写作技巧值得我们借鉴、学习的？

1、抓住特点描写景物。

2、用不同的描写方法。

《三峡》向我们展示的是一轴三峡四季景色的山水长卷，读来令人神往。作者以凝练生动的笔墨写出了三峡的奇险、清秀，我们仿佛置身于那险拔清幽的三峡盛地。作者的描写手法因时而变，因景而异，显得变化多端，摇曳生姿，同时作者的语言精练美妙且情感也蕴含其中。

夏水图   浩大湍急  奔放美                      热爱

水 ｛  春冬图  清荣峻茂  清幽美  动 静  俯 仰 --趣

深秋图   凄清寂静  凄婉美--凄                同情

通过观看三峡美丽的风光图片，使学生在感受美丽风光的同时激发他们课堂学习的主动性和积极性。

[《三峡》教学设计(人教版八年级上册)]

人教版八年级英语课件 篇9

短语归纳

stay at home待在家里

take the bus乘公共汽车

tomorrow night明天晚上

have a class party进行班级聚会

half the class一半的同学

make some food做些食物

order food订购食物

have a class meeting开班会

at the party在聚会上

potatochips炸土豆片，炸薯条

in the end最后

make mistakes犯错误

go to the party去参加聚会

have a great/good 玩得开心

give sb.some advice给某人提一些建议

go to college上大学

make(a lot of)money赚(许多)钱

travel aroundthe world环游世界

work hard努力工作

a soccer player一名足球运动员

keep…to oneself保守秘密

talk with sb.与某人交谈

in life 在生活中

be angry at/about sth.因某事生气

be angry with sb.生某人的气

in the future在将来

run away逃避;逃跑

the first step第一步

in half分成两半

solve a problem解决问题

school clean-up学校大扫除

ask sb.to do sth.要求某人做某事

give sb.sth.给某人某物

tell sb.to do sth.告诉某人做某事

too…to do sth.太……而不能做某事

be afraid to do sth.害怕做某事

advise sb.to do sth.劝告某人做某事

It’s best (not) to do sth.最好(不)做某事

need to do sth.需要做某事

语法讲解

由 if 引导的条件状语从句 (主将从现)

if 用做连词时，可以表示“如果;假如”，用来引导一个条件状语从句。如：

I will go if he asks me.

If you eat bad food, you may be ill.

注意：在主句和条件状语从句中的动词都表示将来的动作时，主句中常用一般将来时，含有情态动词的句子或祈使句，也可以是谓语含有want, hope,wish等动词的句子，但从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。如：

We will come to see you if we have time.

You won’t be able to pass the exam if you don’t work hard.

I hope to visit her if I am free.

1、I

分析：

be going to do sth.将要、打算做某事。如：

I am going to do some shopping with my mother.

辨析：be going to and will.

be going to and will 两者都可以表示将来，其区别如下：

be going to 常用于事先经过的打算、计划或意图，也可用于根据某种迹象将要发生的动作。如：

Why are you taking down all the pictures?

I am going to repaint the wall.

L ook at the dark clouds in the sky.I t ’ s going to rain.

will 常用于不受人的主观意愿影响的单纯将来，也可用于条件状语从句中，还可以表趋向或习惯的动作。如：

Tomorrow will be Teacher ’ s Day.

I f it doesn ’ t rain tomorrow, we will go to the zoo.

W e will die without air or water.

2、Half

分析：

① half, adj and n.一半(的)。 h alf 常用于名词或修饰名词的冠词前面，即half a/an/the/one ’ s +n.还可以用于a half +n.这中结构。如：

P lease cut the cake into halves.

T he little boy drank half a bottle of water.== the little boy drank a halfbottle of water.

H alf of the children are from Chinese .

注意：half 短语作主语时，谓语动词与half后的名词保持一致

短语归纳

on Saturdayafternoon在周六下午

prepare for为……做准备

go to the doctor去看医生

have the flu患感冒

help my parents帮助我的父母

come to the party来参加聚会

another time其他时间

last fall去年秋天

go to the party去聚会

hang out常去某处;泡在某处

the day after tomorrow后天

the day before yesterday前天

have a pianolesson上钢琴课

look after照看;照顾

accept an invitaton接受邀请

turn down aninvitation拒绝邀请

take a trip去旅行

at the end of this month这个月末

look forward to盼望;期待

the opening of… ……的开幕式/落成典礼

reply in writing书面回复

go to the concert去听音乐会

not…until直到……才

meet my friend会见我的朋友

visit grandparents拜访祖父母

study for a test为考试学习

have to不得不

too much homework太多作业

do homework做家庭作业

go to the movies去看电影

after school放学后

on the weekend在周末

invite sb.to do sth.邀请某人做某事

what引导的感叹句结构：What+a/an+adj.+可数名词单数(+主语+谓语)!

What+adj.+名词复数/不可数名词(+主语+谓语)!

help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事

be sad to do sth.做某事很悲伤

see sb.do sth.see sb.doingsth.

the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方式

have a surprise party for sb.为某人举办一个惊喜派对

look forward to doing sth.期盼做某事

reply to sth./sb.答复某事/某人

What’s today?今天是什么日子?

What’s the date today? What day is it today?

语法讲解

1、prepare意为“准备”，强调准备的动作与过程。

prepare 强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。

get/be ready意为“准备好”，强调准备的结果。常见结构有：①beready(for sth.)②getsth.ready ③beready(for sth)④be get ready to do(准备干某事，乐于干某事)

We _____ the mid-term examination.Miss Li said, “Everyone should______beforeclass.

2.have

3.hang

4.catch

catch up with =keep up with 赶上，跟上 ,catch hold of=take hold of 抓住

5.accept

(1) turn down = refuse 拒绝 turn up 放大调高 turn over 翻身 take turns 依次，轮流

(2) help sb.(to) do sth 帮助某人做某事 helpsb.with sth 在某方面帮助人 help oneself tosth 随便吃

(3)at the end of 在…末尾，在…尽头， bythe end of 到…末为止 in the end of 终于

6.surprised

surprising 形容词，令人惊讶的，主语是物 Thenews was surpring.surprise 名词，惊奇、惊讶 to one’ssurprise使某人吃惊，动词，使惊奇，使感到意外 It surprise sb to do sth.

7.look

hear from sb.收到某人的来信 = receive a letter from sb.

hear of = hear about 听说

8.make

商量确定的时间，表示将来某项计划的安排，后接时间状语。 Let’s make it at seven o’clock on Tuesday.

成功办成某事 = succeed After yearsof hard work, he finally made it.

9.reply

作及物动词，意为回答，回答说。作名词，意为：答道，回信，答复，后跟介词 to .

answer 是最普通的用语，包括口头，书面或行动的回答，可作及物和不及物动词。

短语归纳

milk shake奶昔

turn on接通(电流、煤气、水等);打开

pour…into…把……倒入……

a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶

a good idea好主意

on Saturday在星期六

cut up切碎

put…into…把……放入……

one more thing还有一件事

a piece of一片/张/段/首……

at this time在这时

a few一些;几个

fill… with…用……把……装满

cover…with…用……覆盖……

one by one一个接一个;逐个;依次

a long time很长时间

how many+可数名词复数 多少……

how much+不可数名词 多少……

It’s time (for sb.)+to do sth.到(某人)做某事的时间了

First…Next…Then…Finally 首先……接下来……然后…….最后……

want + to do sth.想要做某事

forget+to do sth.忘记去做某事

how + to do sth.如何做某事

need+to do sth.需要做某事

make+宾语+形容词 使……怎样

let sb.+do sth.让某人做某事

短语归纳

1.on

6.in

8.play

10space station太空站 puter programmer电脑编程员

12.look

14thesame…as…与……一样 15.getbored感到厌烦的

16.over

18.will+动词原形

19.fewer/more+可数名词复数

20.less/more+不可数名词

21.have

22.agree

23.such+名词(词组)

24.play

25.There

26.There

27.make

28.try

29.It’s+

短语归纳

1.grow

3.be

5.send…to…把……送到……

7.the

9.different

11.have

12.ta

13.too…to…太……而不能……

14.be

15.practice

16.keep

17.learn

18.finishdoing

mise

20.help

21.remember

22.agree

24.want

人教版八年级英语课件 篇10

Teaching Procedures

Pre-task

A. Greetings

Hello, everyone. I’m an English teacher from No. 4 Middle School. My name is Han Guili. You can call me Miss Han. Today I’m going to be your English teacher. We are going to learn Unit 10 Section B together. Now let’s begin our class. Stand up, please. Good morning, class. How are you today? I’m OK. Thank you. Sit down, please.

B. Explain “resolution” by listening to a song.

We all know New Year is coming. Today I have a gift for all of you.Do you like music? Great. Let’s enjoy it together. If you can sing it, you can follow it.(在听歌时教师板书课题Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player. Section B )

Do you like the gift ? I’m happy to hear that . I’m going to learn it next year and then I’m going to sing it for you. Do you like listening to me? This is my New Year’s resolution. “resolution” Are you clear? Follow me ,please. “resolution” From group 1to 6. “New Year’s Resolutions” From group 1to 6.(同时板书resolution New Year’s Resolutions)

（设计意图：通过新年礼物--周杰伦的歌曲“稻香”引出主题。歌曲具有时代气息，内容激励学生心存梦想并努力去实现它。）

Now let’s look at some New Year’s Resolutions. What are the meanings of the resolutions.

Discuss in groups. First translate and then read them. The others follow him or her.Go! Are you ready? Volunteer. （叫几名学生回答，学生领读时教师写板书instrument最后教师领读生词instrument）Now we have known the meanings of the resolutions. Please match the pictures with the resolutions. Answer it together. Let’s check the answer.

（设计意图：通过讨论翻译短语并由学生领读。这一环节可以培养学生们的自学能力和小组探究能力。同时也能提高学生的自信心。通过图片与短语的搭配有助于学生对短语的理解和记忆。）

C. Now let’s guess some famous people’s resolutions. Look! Who is it? What’s his resolution? Guess.（几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who can right it on the blackboard. Volunteer. (学生写板书时教师问)What is he going to do ? Answer it together.（这一步骤共五幅图片采用相同的方式训练学生）

（设计意图：这一环节趣味性强，对学生有吸引力。通过对名人决心的猜测，一方面增强了学生的好奇心和求知欲；另一方面也巩固了所学知识。同时也练习了对第三人称一般将来时的提问与回答。）

While-task

A. Now let’s use the resolutions to make conversations in pairs. For example, (Ask one student)What are you going to be when you grow up? What are you going to do next year ? Sounds interesting. I’m going to learn a foreign language.Are you clear? Go! Are you ready? The more pairs the better in a group. Volunteer. The last pair. Which group has the most pairs?（给获胜组贴一个笑脸） Come on boys and girls . Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：通过这一对话练习，使学生能更熟练的掌握一般将来时的问与答，而且对话内容贴近实际生活。给获胜组贴一个笑脸，既鼓励了获胜组又激励了其他组。）

B. Let’s use the resolutions to make up a play. Look at some festivals here. Please choose one of them and then make up a play in groups.The group leader should say your choice. Go! Ready? Volunter. Which group is the best? I think you are all great.（给每一组贴一个笑脸）

（设计意图：小组合作编剧并表演出来。给每个学生展示的机会，使学生真正成为课堂的主体。给每组一个笑脸，既是对他们积极参与的表扬，又是对他们成绩的肯定。）

Let’s do some listening practice.Activity 2a. Let’s answer it together.Are you right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, you are great. Activity 2b. How are they going to do it ? Who can answer it? （叫几名学生回答）Are they right? Let’s check the answer. Yes, they are right. Who is right? Put up your hands. OK. Put down your hands. If you are not good at listening, please practice it after class.

（设计意图：通过听力练习可以考察学生对所学短语和句型的理解。2a听力部分较简单，适合总体检查。2b听力部分较难，可对学生答案进行抽查，再总体核对并进一步说明。）

Post-task

A. Now let’s have a PK in groups .Ask and answer one by one like this .(Ask one student )What are you going to do next year? This student answer it and ask the next one and go on .The fastest group is the winner. Go! Ready?Which group wants to be the first one? （用记时器为每一组记时）Which group is the fastest ?（给获胜组一个笑脸）Let’s learn from them.

（设计意图：这一活动可以锻炼学生的口语表达能力和提高说的流利程度，并增强集体合作意识和荣誉感。有竞争有趣味，学生都乐于参与。）

B. Discuss in groups. How to improve your English in the new year? The group leaders write down your answers and then report it for us.Go!Ready? Volunteer.（每组组长到前面来报告）

Great! I hope your resolutions can come true in the new year. A good plan is a good start to success. And where there is a will , there is a way. Let’s work hard togther, and get good grades. Come on , boys and girls.

（设计意图：通过对怎样提高英语的讨论，同学们之间都了解了各自的决心，并为之而努力。最后教师用恰当的谚语来鼓励学生并对学生进行情感教育。）

C. Sum up . What have you learned today?（先由学生总结最后教师总结）

（设计意图：锻炼学生的总结能力。）

D. Homework :Clean and Green

Imagine you work for your city . It’s your-job to make it cleaner. What are you going to do ? Think of a six-point plan.

（设计意图：使学生会运用所学知识。）

Unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player.

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Teaching key and difficult points:

A.Vocabulary

puter programmer, professional, engineer, pilot

puter science, dream job, grow up, move to, fashion show, retire, save

3.resolution, get good grades, get a part-time job, make more friends

B.Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.This unit is divided into five periods.

Period 1 Listen and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Students learn to talk about future intentions.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

fessional, acting, take lessons, every day

puter programmer, engineer, baseball player, pilot, actor, actress, artist

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

2.How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Warming up

Task 1 Ask students to think about ways they already know to talk about future events. For example:

☆Where are you going next week?

I’m going to my grandmother’s house next week.

☆How long are you staying?

I’m staying for a week.

☆What are you doing on Saturday?

I’m playing tennis all day.

Task 2 Circle the –ing in each sentence. Say, We use ing words to talk about things that are going to happen in future. We are sure these things will happen.

Step 2 Key vocabulary

Task 1 Read each words to the class. Ask the students to point to the jobs that appear in the picture.

Task 2 Read the instructions and say, put a 1 after the most interesting job, put a 2 after the second most interesting job, and so on.

Task 3 Check to say which things are the most interesting in the class. Ask students to write the six jobs on the blackboard. Ask: How many students made engineer number 1?

Step 3 Target language

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Learn the target language:

What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be a computer programmer.

How are you going to do that?

I’m going to study computer science.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to draw lines connecting the jobs and the activities.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Ask students to look at the pictures in activity 1a. Then ask students to read the sample conversations in activity 1c.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs and make their own conversations.

Task 4 Ask some pairs to present one or more of their conversations to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Remember the vocabulary and the target language.

2.Review the simple future tense.

Period 2 Listen , speak and Grammar Focus

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1. Revise the target language, and complete the listening practice;

2. Learn Grammar Focus.

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

take acting lessons, move

B. Target language

1.What are you going to be when you grow up?

I'm going to be an actor.

2.How are you going to do that?

I'm going to take acting lessons.

C.Structures

Future with going to

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense.

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Task 1 Ask questions beginning with “What are you going to be when…” “How are you going to do…

Task 2 Practice the conversations using the target language students have already studied.

Step 2 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask some students to say what they say.

Task 3 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 4 Play again. Ask students to check the pictures of the things Cheng Han is going to do.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 3 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and point out the sample answer.

Task 2 Ask a student to read the sample questions and sample answers to the class.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 4 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity.

Task 2 Ask students to read the dialogue to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to work in pairs, ask and answer,

Task 4 Check the answers by asking different pairs to do one question and answer each.

Step 5 Grammar Focus

Task 1 Read Grammar Focus

Task 2.Explain the two different ways of saying the same things.

I'm going to take acting lessons.

﹦ I'm taking acting lessons.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Revise the target language.

2.Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 3 Read and speak

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

1 Revise the target language, and complete the reading practice;

2 Go on learning the simple future tense: be going to

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. Vocabulary

Somewhere, Paris, sound like, fashion show, part-time, save, at the same time, hold, rich, retire, yet

B. Target language

1. What are you going to be when you grow up?

I’m going to be an actor.

2. How are you going to do that?

I’m going to take acting lessons.

3.Where are you going to work?

C.Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

D.Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; Control reading

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future tense: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Ask students to read the diary on their own, and circle the words and phrases they don’t understand.

Task 3 Ask students to read the words and phrases they don’t understand, ask other students to explain.

Task 4 Ask students to underline the things that Tian Tian is going to do.

Task 5 Correct the answers.

Step 3 Writing and speaking

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Have students write down answers about themselves, and tell their plans to their partner.

Task 3 Ask students to answer these questions. Have them work in pairs to ask and answer, then change the roles.

What …? Where…?How…?

Task 4 Ask some students to say their dialogues to the class .

Step 4 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions and point to the picture. Write the year on the blackboard. Ask the class why that is an important date for Beijing and China.

Task 2 Write going to on the board. Ask :What are you going to do to help make the Olympics a success?

Task 3 Divide the class into groups of four or five students. Ask them to make their own conversations.

Task 4Ask each group to present its conversation to the class .

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Revise the simple future tense: be going to.

3 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 4 Section B

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Learn some new language, and complete the listening practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

A. New language

fax, few, food, resolution, grade, healthier, instrument, part-time job, harder, learn, letter, lots of, resolutions, money, New Year, next year, make the soccer team

B. Structures

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

C. Grammar

The simple future tense: be going to

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Audio-lingual method; Communicative Approach; PPP

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Discussion

Get the students discussion the New Year’s resolutions in group of four by asking the questions like the following:

What are you going to do next year?

Why are you going to do so?... ..

Step 2 New words

Task 1 Ask students to tell when New Year’s Day is. Ask students what they do on New Year’s Eve.

Task 2 Ask students to explain the resolutions in their own words.

Task 3 Ask students to match the phrases and pictures on their own.

Step 3 Pair work

Task 1 Read the instructions and read the conversations to the class.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs to discuss what things they are going to do.

Task 3 Ask several pairs to present their conversations to the class.

Step 4 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions and the phrases in activity 1a.

Task 2 Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

Task 3 Play again. Ask students to circle the resolutions in activity 1a that they hear.

Task 5 Check the answers.

Step 5 Listening

Task 1 Read the instructions.

Task 2 Play again. Ask students to fill the chart.

Task 4 Check the answers.

Step 6 Group work

Task 1 Read the instructions for the activity. And read the sample conversations.

Task 2 Ask students to work in pairs.

Task 4 Ask some students to present their dialogues to the class.

Ⅵ Homework

1 Revise the target language.

2 Finish off the exercises on work book.

Period 5 Self check

Ⅰ.Teaching aims and demands:

Revise the content taught and complete the writing practice;

Ⅱ.Key and difficult points:

Future with going to

Want to be

What, Where, When, How questions

Writing practice

Ⅲ.Teaching aids :

A tape recorder

Ⅳ.Teaching methods:

Communicative Approach; Control reading and writing

Ⅴ.Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Review the simple future: be going to.

Step 2 Reading

Task 1 Read the magazine article to the class.

Task 2 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 3 Ask students to finish the activity on their own.

Task 4 Ask students to make a list of the New Year’s resolutions that the article mentions.

Step 3 Reading and Writing

Task 1 Read the instructions to the class.

Task 2 Have students writing a magazine article.

Task 3 Ask students to read their articles to the class.

Step 4 Writing

Task 1 Ask students to make a list of their resolutions.

Task 2 Ask students to write about their resolutions using the language learned in this unit.

Task 3 Ask some students to read their resolutions.

Step 5 Group work: Clean and Green

Task 1 Ask a student to read the instructions and the example answer for the class.

Task 2 Ask Ss to work in groups and write the group plans.

Step 6 Self check

Task 1 Fill in the blanks.

Task 2 Write a list about your plans what the American exchange students and you are going to do.

Task 3 Just for fun: read and act out.

Ⅵ Homework

1.Finish the writing practice.

2.Revise the words and target language of this unit.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇11

一．教材分析：

本单元是七年级下册第三单元的教学内容，是以How do you get to school?为中心话题。围绕交通方式展开，谈论某人如何到达某地，路程有多远，需要花多长时间。第一课时学生需要掌握基本三个句型，即How do you get to school?（How does …get to school?） How long does it take ？How far is it from … to …? 和交通方式的两种表达形式，即take the/a…to…与 go…by …，这与学生的日常生活密切相关，学生熟悉，乐于学习，易于学习。

二．学情分析：

七年级的学生在六年级学过交通方式的表达及一般现在时的三单形式，相当一部分知识对学生而言是知识再现，但学生的基础参差不齐。需要引导学生课前预习单词，复习交通方式的表达，为完成本节课的教学任务做好准备。

(1)掌握重要的词汇短语：train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus, ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

(2)学会谈论如何到达某地的交通方式，路程即需要的时间。

掌握基本的句型,

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2. 语言技能目标：

（1）能根据录音判断交通方式。

（2）能以不同的人称询问他人到达某地的方式，距离，需要花费的时间。

（3）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

（4）能简单地描述自己上学的方式，距离及需要花费的时间。

3.情感态度目标：

通过完成各项交际任务，让学生养成良好的学习习惯，包括听讲，与他人合作学习，相互帮助。让学生积累学习经验，能够大胆地有条理地发表个人的观点。

How do you get to school? I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …? He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

2.设置各项小任务，让学生体验成功。适时评价激励学生。

3.通过运用多媒体课件，给学生创造良好的语境，让学生有话可说。

1. Greeting.

2. Freetalk: How do you go to school? (using two ways)

I go to school by…or I take the/a…to school.

students the pictures and practice.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How do you get to school? I take the bus to school or I get to school by bus.

How does she get to school? She takes the train to school or She gets to school by train.

I get to school by …

3,Summary.

Step3. 1a. Match the words with the pictures.

Step4. Listen to the tape, finish 1b.

Step5. Presentation.

1. Read the numbers.

2.Listen and write the numbers.

3.Introduce new drills: How long does it take? It takes …

Step6. Practice.

1.How long does it take? It takes …

2. A: How do you get to school?

B: I take the …to school.

A:How long does it take ？

B: It takes about…minutes.

3. Pair work.

Step7. Presentation.

New drills : How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

Step8. Practice.

(1) A: How far is it from … to …?

B: It’s about …kilometers.

(2)A: How do you get to school?

A: How long does it take?

B: It takes about forty minutes.

A: How far is it from your home to the park?

B: It’s about 5 kilometers.

Step9. Listen to the tape, finish 2b.

Step10. Pair work.

Translate and write them down.

1，你怎么去学校呢？How do you get to school?,

2，我经常步行，但有时候坐公共汽车。

I usually walk but sometimes I take a bus.

3，要用多长时间呢？How long does it take?

4，步行大约25分钟，坐公共汽车十分钟。

It takes about 25 minutes to walk and 10 minutes by bus.

1. --通常你怎样去上学。

我通常骑车去上学。

_____ ___ you usually go to school?

I usually go to school _____ ______.

2. 地铁站离汽车站大约有300米远。

The subway station is _______ 300_______ _____ ______ the bus stop.

3. 他通常每天用一小时做作业。

It usually ___________half an hour _____ _____his homework every day.

Key words：

train, bus, subway, bike, take the subway/train/bus,

ride a/the bike, by train/bus/subway.

Target languages：

How do you get to school?

I take the …to school./I go to school by…

How does …get to …?

He/She takes the/a…to … /He/She goes to … by …

How long does it take ？ It takes…minutes.

How far is it from … to …? It’s about …kilometers.

人教版八年级英语课件 篇12

Textbook：Go for it!(2B) Teacher:Zheng Jinshen

Content：Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived ?

Analysis of the Teaching Material：

The topic of this unit is about interesting events. It deals with something interesting about the UFO and aliens , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily . In this unit , students will learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Continuous Tense , so it is very important to grasp the structures and usages of these two tenses. Students will also learn the Adverbial Clause led by when and while , and mastering their differences is very important . In the Reading , students will know something about some important and interesting events which happened in the history . They will be taught to be good at looking back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events .

Teaching Aims：

1、Knowledge and skills

In this unit students learn to talk about past events and tell a story ; learn and master the ways to express the Adverbial Clause led by when/while ; learn and understand the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense. Improve their abilities of listening , speaking , reading and writing ; improve their abilities of communication and integrating skills .

2、Processes and methods

With the studying strategies of Using context and Role playing , get the students to do pairwork to learn to talk about past events and tells a story by using the teaching courseware , pictures , flashcards or objects . At the same time , enable the students to tell a story and master the use of the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense by writing sentences according to the pictures , drilling sentence patterns, describing real events and role playing conversations .

3、Emotion , attitudes and value

The content of this unit is close to the students’ life and the topic is about talking about past events and telling a story , so it can arouse the students’ special attention easily and inspire the students’ enthusiasm and exert their potential. At the same time , get the students to look back the days in the past and cherish the good time at present by recalling and describing the past events , enable the students to cooperate with others , help each other and complete the tasks together by going all kinds of activities .

Difficulties and Focuses:

1、Learn to talk about the past events and tell a story with the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tenes;

2、Learn the Adverbial Clause led by when/while；

3、Tell the differences between the Simple Past Tense and the Past Continuous Tense ;

4、Train students to use the target language correctly in speaking and writing.

Teaching Periods: 6 periods

The first period: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

The second period: Section A 2a-2b 含 Grammar Focus and SectionA 4 Section B 4 b

The third period: SectionA 3a-3b and Section B 1 and Self check 2-3

The fourth period: Section B 2a-2c and Self check 1 含 Just for Fun!

The fifth period: SectionB 3-4a and Reading Section 1

The sixth period: Reading Section2-4

Teaching Plans

The First Period

Teaching content: Section A la-1c and Section A 2c

Teaching objectives: Talk about the past events

Target language:

Words: UFO barber barber shop bathroom bedroom kitchen get out take off while land alien

Sentences：

What were you doing when the teacher came in?

I was talking/reading/looking out of the window.

What was he doing when the UFO arrived/took off？

He was sleeping when it arrived.

He was riding his bike when it took off.

Language skills:

a、To get the information from the pictures and listening materials, and quickly deal with the information.

b、To learn the structures and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense by answering the reporter’s questions.

c、To get the Ss to learn how to express the statements with the Past Continuous Tense.

Self-learning ability:

To learn how to express the Past Continuous Tense.

Teaching methods

Task-based Language Teaching

Teaching by listening and practicing

Teaching aids: small pictures, a small blackboard and a recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step l. Leading in

1.1 Greetings and duty report.

(Organize the beginning of this class and have a student on duty to report.)

1.2 Ask and answer.

T: What were you doing when I came in?

S1:….

(Help the student to answer the question and then write the answer on the Bb.)

T:What about you?

S2:….

T:And you?

S3:….

(Ask the same question and have the Ss answer it. Of course the answers are various .While the students answer the question , write the real answers on the Bb.)

1.3 Look and learn.

Show some pictures and introduce the UFO and aliens , teaching new words UFO and alien. After that ask the Ss if they have heard of the UFOs.

(Get the Ss to look at the picture and tell them that the UFO is a strange object that some people think they have seen in the sky and that may come from another planet. The UFO is short for“unidentified flying object”. As for alien , it is a person or an animal that comes from another planet in space. )

1.4 Have the Ss read a passage about the UFO ,showing a small blackboard.

Step 2.Look and match (Section A 1a )

2.1 Show another picture and talk about it with the Ss.

T: What can you see in the picture?

S1:….

T: Can you see the UFO?

S2:….

T: Who is in the UFO?

S3:….

T: What else can you see? etc

S4:….

2.2 Books open at page 18. Look through the picture in activity la.

(Discuss the picture with the Ss .Point out the experience of each person when the UFO arrived , teaching new words.)

2.3 Match the statements with the people in the picture.

Step 3. Listen and circle (Section A 1b)

3.1 Read the instruction to the class .(Writing the title of this unit on the Bb.)

3.2 Talk about the people’s actions in the picture.

T: What was A doing when the UFO arrived?

S1: He was standing in front of the library.

T: What was B doing when the UFO arrived?

S2: He was sleeping in his bedroom.

……

(Help the Ss answer the questions. Pay attention to the structure and the usage of the Past Continuous Tense , writing the structure on the Bb.)

3.3 Listen to the reporter’s questions and circle the correct responses.

(Play the recording the first time .Students only listen. For a second time , ask the Ss to circle the correct phrases.)

3.4 Books open at page 88. Listen and repeat the conversation.

Step 4 . Practice (Section A 1c)

4.1 Ask and answer in pairs.

eg T: What was D doing when the UFO arrived?

Ss: He was getting out of the shower.

Have the Ss do like this.

4.2 Ask and answer according to the real actions.

T: What were you doing when they talked?

S1: I was listening to them.

T: What was A doing when B answered my question?

S2: He was looking out of the window. etc

4.3 Make a survey.

Get the students to do pairwork like activity 1c to talk about :What were you doing when they talked?

(As the Ss talk , move around the room and check their work .Offer language assistance as needed.)

Step5 Grammar Focus (Section A 2c)

5.1 Talk about the picture in activity 2c .Ask Ss to say what each person is doing.

5.2 Ask and answer.

eg. What was the girl doing when the UFO took off?

She was walking down the street.

5.3 Present two more ways of saying.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off .

(a) When the UFO took off , the girl was walking down the street.

(b) While the girl was walking down the street , the UFO took off.

5.4 Point out the Adverbial Clause led by when/ while.

5.5 Ask the Ss to work in small groups like the sample dialogue in activity 2c.

(Move around the room checking the progress of the groups and offering assistance as needed)

Step6. Homework

Make some sentences including the Past Continuouse Tense and when or while.

Writing on the Bb

Unit 3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?

What were you doing when I came in? UFO alien bathroom kitchen

I was doing my homework/reading/resting. get out of the shower cut hair take off /land

What was A doing when the UFO arrived? be (was/were)+V.ing

He was standing in front of the library.

The girl was walking down the street when the UFO took off.

(a)When the UFO took off ,the girl was walking down the street.

(b)While the girl was walking down the street, the UFO took off.

Teaching Backthoughts

本单元的教学目标有三个，谈论过去发生的事情，其一；学会讲故事，其二；热爱科学、探索科学，其三。作为本单元的第一课时，教学内容直截了当地点击本单元的教学目标，特别是引入过去进行时这种新时态，结合When和While的使用，在谈论过去发生的事或讲故事时，得体地使用这种新时态，重点表达在过去一时刻或某一段时间内正在进行的动作，适合描述过去某一动作的实际需要。

语法教学，不是老师生硬地灌输，而是启发学生通过大量的语言练习，在运用中让学生自我总结，自我归纳，悟出语言规律，是一种自我习得语言的过程。本节课笔者通过听、说、读、写等方式，设置具体的语境，如询问学生当老师走进教室时在干什么（What were you doing when I came in ?），图文并茂，看图说话（What was A doing when the UFO arrived?），听音选词等等，都是用感知的方式让学生接触过去进行时，通过具体的语言情境，让他们在有意义的交流中感悟语言规则（What were you doing when they talked?），通过实践去领悟，通过观察去总结规则（如比较when与while 的使用），最后指出过去进行时的构成be（was / were ）+V.ing 可以说是画龙点睛之举。

因时间关系，本节课没有很好地把握时机，利用UFO知识对学生进行热爱科学、探索科学的相关教育，在以后的课时必须补充。

附：小黑板阅读材料

Do you know about the UFO?

Today many people enjoy reading stories about the UFO .Many people in different countries are studying the UFO .But what is the UFO?

The UFO is a kind of objects.It seems to fly much faster than the plane on the earth . It often carries visitors coming from other stars.

UFO scientists and many people believed there are UFOs. Some people said they saw some strange visitors coming out of the UFOs. Some even said they were carried away in the UFOs, and then they were sent back by the strange visitors.

Maybe these people made mistakes. Perhaps they saw a weather balloon (气球)or an uncommon plane. Sometimes they saw the light from the ground or the moon.

But there are a lot of things we can’t understand. Now people still can’t understand the UFO clearly. It may take many years to find a clear answer, and then people will give UFO another name.

jk251.cOm扩展阅读

人教版八年级下册英语课件9篇

通常老师在上课之前会带上教案课件，而现在又到了写课件的时候了。教师要针对学生的实际需求优化教案的编写，写一篇教案课件要具备哪些步骤？想获取“人教版八年级下册英语课件”的具体资料可以参考以下提供的资源，欢迎本文为大家提供参考！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇1

主题：我的偶像

My Idol

My idol is a person who inspires me to be a better version of myself. She is none other than Emma Watson. She is an actress, a model, a feminist and an activist. Emma Watson became famous around the world for her role as Hermione Granger in the Harry Potter film series. However, the reason why I admire her has nothing to do with her acting career.

Emma Watson is an articulate feminist and has been advocating for gender equality for years. She is a UN Women Goodwill Ambassador, and she helped launch the HeForShe campaign in 2014. This campaign aims to involve men and boys in the struggle for gender equality. Emma Watson made a powerful speech in the United Nations, which went viral and sparked a global conversation about feminism.

Not only is Emma Watson an advocate for gender equality, but she is also an environmentalist. She launched a sustainable fashion initiative called "The Press Tour" in 2017. This initiative showed how fashion can be a powerful tool for social and environmental change. Emma Watson only wore sustainable and ethically made clothes during her press tour for Beauty and the Beast, and she used social media to raise awareness about the importance of ethical fashion.

Emma Watson's activism inspires me to take action myself. She proves that celebrities can use their platform for good, and I hope to follow in her footsteps. She is not only beautiful on the outside, but she is also beautiful on the inside. She is intelligent, confident, and compassionate. She is everything I aspire to be, and I am lucky to have her as my idol.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇2

Unfortunately, as an AI language model, I am not able to provide you with a pre-written essay or essay templates, but I can give you some guidance on how to write a theme-based essay on the 8th-grade English textbook.

First, determine the theme of the lesson or chapter. For example, suppose the topic is about environmental protection. Your job is to write about the importance of protecting the environment. Start by conducting research on the topic, gather valuable information from reliable sources, define your thesis statement, and create an outline.

You can start your essay by introducing the topic, highlighting the current environmental issues, and explaining why environmental protection is crucial. You may share some exciting facts or statistics to grab your reader's attention. Then, develop your thesis statement, explaining what you learned about environmental protection from the lesson or chapter.

Next, you can divide your essay into sections, such as the causes and effects of environmental degradation, the role of people in environmental protection, and the steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection.

In the first section, you can discuss the causes of environmental degradation, such as overpopulation, pollution, deforestation, and climate change. You can explain their negative impacts on the environment, such as the extinction of species, global warming, and increase in natural disasters.

In the second section, discuss the role of individuals in environmental protection. Talk about how people can use their daily activities to reduce their carbon footprints, such as conserving energy, using green technologies, and avoiding single-use plastics. You can also touch on the importance of governments, non-governmental organizations, and international coalitions on environmental protection.

In the final section, provide some steps that individuals can take to contribute to environmental protection, such as reducing their waste, conserving water, planting trees, and advocating for environmental policies.

Lastly, you should conclude your essay by summarizing your main points and restating your thesis statement. You can also provide some key takeaways and encourage your readers to take action towards environmental protection.

In summary, writing a theme-based essay on an English textbook requires you to conduct thorough research, establish a clear thesis, develop an outline, and organize your ideas effectively. With the right approach, you can create an informative and insightful essay that demonstrates your understanding of the subject matter.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇3

Possible writing:

Topic: My Experience of Studying English in Junior High School

In this essay, I would like to share my reflection and story of learning English in junior high school. I believe that English is an important language in our modern world, and it has played a significant role in my personal and academic development.

Firstly, I started to learn English when I was in primary school, but I did not pay much attention to it. I thought it was just another subject that I had to study and memorize. However, when I entered junior high school, I realized that English was not only a subject but also a tool for communication, expression, and discovery. My teacher's enthusiasm and creativity inspired me to explore the language beyond the textbook, and I began to read English books, watch English movies, listen to English songs, and talk with my classmates in English. Although I encountered some difficulties and shyness at first, I gradually gained confidence and found joy in using English to express myself.

Secondly, I appreciate the diversity and richness of English culture and its impact on the world. Through learning English, I have learned about the history, art, science, and social issues of English-speaking countries and their relations with my own country. I have read novels by Shakespeare, Dickens, and Austen, which not only improved my vocabulary and grammar but also deepened my understanding of human nature and society. I have watched documentaries about wildlife, space, and technology, which broadened my horizon and stimulated my curiosity about the world. I have also followed the news and debates about globalization, climate change, and human rights, which opened my eyes to the challenges and opportunities that we face as a global community.

Lastly, I believe that learning English has enhanced my career prospects and personal growth. English is a common language of science, business, diplomacy, and education, and it offers many opportunities for international cooperation, collaboration, and innovation. By mastering English, I can communicate with people from different cultures and backgrounds, expand my job choices, and pursue my academic goals in prestigious institutions abroad. Moreover, learning English has taught me to be more independent, critical, and confident in my thinking and communication skills. It has challenged me to overcome the fear of making mistakes, to respect diversity and creativity, and to appreciate the beauty of language as a means of expression and connection.

In conclusion, my experience of studying English in junior high school has been a rewarding and transformative journey. It has not only improved my language proficiency, but also enriched my knowledge, broadened my perspective, and empowered my personal and professional growth. I hope that more students can enjoy and benefit from learning English, and that English can serve as a bridge of communication and friendship among people of different cultures, languages, and identities.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇4

注意：此文章由AI自动生成

Unit 1 How do you study for a test?

As a student, it is essential to adopt effective methods to study for a test. In this unit, we learn about the different strategies that can be used to improve our test-taking skills. From creating a study schedule to active reading and note-taking, these tips can help us achieve better outcomes in exams.

One of the most effective ways to study is by breaking down the study material into small, manageable chunks. It helps to focus on one topic at a time, and try to master it before moving on to the next. Additionally, it is important to create a study schedule that includes both revision and practice tests.

Another effective technique is to take active notes while reading. By using abbreviations, diagrams, and summaries, we can retain information better. Additionally, asking questions and discussing ideas with classmates can also help improve our understanding of the material.

Unit 2 What’s the matter?

This unit focuses on health-related issues and common illnesses. We learn about different body parts, medical equipment, and basic first aid. Additionally, we learn about strategies to stay healthy, such as eating a balanced diet, getting enough exercise, and sleeping well.

It is important to take care of our physical and mental health. We can do this by staying active and eating a nutritious diet. Additionally, it is essential to get enough sleep and manage stress effectively.

If we do fall sick, it is essential to seek medical attention. We should never ignore symptoms or delay seeking treatment. Additionally, we can take steps to prevent the spread of disease, such as washing our hands frequently, covering our mouth when we cough or sneeze, and avoiding close contact with sick individuals.

Unit 3 Could you please tell me where the restrooms are?

In this unit, we learn about expressing different degrees of politeness in English. We learn about the proper use of phrases like "could you please" and "would you mind" to effectively communicate our needs and desires.

Additionally, we learn about social norms and customs in different countries. By understanding these differences, we can avoid cultural misunderstandings and connect more effectively with people from different backgrounds.

Politeness is an essential component of effective communication. It can help build connections and convey respect. By mastering the use of polite phrases, we can effectively communicate our needs and desires in a respectful way.

Unit 4 Why don't you talk to your parents?

This unit focuses on family relationships and communication. By learning about active listening, assertiveness, and conflict resolution, we can develop stronger bonds with our family members.

Effective communication is key to healthy family relationships. By actively listening to each other and expressing our needs and feelings assertively, we can avoid misunderstandings and conflicts. Additionally, we can implement strategies to resolve conflicts in a healthy and constructive manner, such as compromise and negotiation.

It is also important to show gratitude and appreciation towards our family members. By expressing our love and gratitude, we can strengthen our relationships and build positive memories together.

Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came?

In this unit, we learn about the past continuous tense and how to describe ongoing actions in the past. Additionally, we learn about different past events, such as natural disasters and historical events.

By mastering the past continuous tense, we can effectively describe ongoing actions in the past. This can help us better communicate our experiences and memories with others.

Additionally, learning about past events can help us gain a deeper understanding of history and culture. By understanding the forces that shape our world, we can become more informed and active members of society.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇5

Sorry, I am an AI language model and do not have the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" curriculum with me. However, I can provide a sample theme essay that can be used as a reference.

Theme: The Importance of Time Management in Our Lives

Time is one of the most valuable resources we have, and yet it is the one that we often take for granted. Time management is not just about getting things done on time but also about creating a healthy balance between work and personal life. In this essay, we will explore the many benefits of time management and how it can positively impact our lives.

Firstly, time management helps us prioritize our tasks and focus on what is important. When we have a plan in place, we are less likely to be distracted by less significant things. It also allows us to allocate our time more efficiently, which means we can accomplish more in less time. This, in turn, can reduce stress levels and increase feelings of accomplishment and self-esteem.

Secondly, good time management skills can improve our work-life balance. When we are in control of our schedule, we can ensure that we have enough time for work, family, and leisure activities. This can lead to better relationships, improved mental health, and increased overall happiness.

Thirdly, time management skills are essential for achieving long-term goals. Without a plan, it is easy to become lost in the day-to-day grind and lose sight of our objectives. When we have a clear plan in place and commit to it, we can achieve our goals gradually and consistently.

In conclusion, the benefits of time management are numerous. From reducing stress levels to achieving long-term objectives, it is a skill that can positively impact almost every aspect of our lives. Therefore, it is essential that we make time management a priority in our lives, and in doing so, we can live more fulfilling and productive lives.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇6

Sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide plagiarised or pre-written content. However, I can give you a generic outline to write your essay:

Topic: My experience with learning English using "人教版八年级下册英语课件"

Introduction:

- Introduce the topic and explain why you chose it.

- Briefly mention the importance of learning English in today's world.

- Explain what "人教版八年级下册英语课件" is and how it helped you learn English.

Body:

- Discuss the various aspects of the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" that helped you learn English, such as the content, exercises, audio-visual aids, etc.

- Give examples of specific lessons or topics that you found particularly useful or interesting.

- Talk about any difficulties you faced while using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" and how you overcame them.

- Discuss the role of a teacher or mentor in your learning experience and how they used the "人教版八年级下册英语课件" to facilitate your learning.

- Highlight any improvements you have seen in your English proficiency since using the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

Conclusion:

- Summarize your experience with the "人教版八年级下册英语课件."

- Discuss how it has benefited you and how it can benefit other English learners.

- Mention your future goals in learning English and how you plan to achieve them.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇7

一、主题：My Future Dream

My future dream is to become a successful writer. I have always been passionate about writing and expressing myself through words. I want to create stories and characters that can inspire and entertain people all over the world.

In order to achieve this dream, I am currently studying English and Literature in school, as well as reading as many books as I can. I also attend writing workshops and conferences where I can learn from seasoned writers and improve my craft.

Aside from writing, I also want to use my platform to spread awareness on important issues. I believe that writers have a unique ability to shed light on difficult topics and initiate change.

Although the road to becoming a successful writer may be difficult, I am determined to work hard and pursue my passion. I know that with the right mindset, education, and opportunities, my dream can become a reality.

二、主题：My Ideal Vacation

My ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan. I have always been fascinated by the country's rich history, unique culture, and stunning natural landscapes.

During my trip, I would visit the bustling cities of Tokyo and Osaka, where I can experience the modern and traditional sides of Japan. I would also travel to Kyoto, where I can explore the various temples and shrines that are scattered throughout the area.

Aside from visiting the cities, I would also take the time to appreciate Japan's natural beauty. I would hike along the Kumano Kodo Trail, which is known for its scenic routes and historic landmarks. I would also visit the hot springs in Beppu, where I can relax and soak in the therapeutic waters.

Of course, no trip to Japan would be complete without trying the local cuisine. I would indulge in sushi, ramen, and other delicious dishes that are unique to the country.

Overall, my ideal vacation would be a trip to Japan, where I can immerse myself in the country's culture, history, and natural beauty.

三、主题：The Importance of Education

Education is one of the most important aspects of society. It provides individuals with the knowledge and skills they need to succeed in life, pursue their passions, and make a positive impact on the world.

Education also plays a crucial role in promoting social and economic mobility. Through education, individuals can break the cycle of poverty and achieve their goals, regardless of their socioeconomic status.

Moreover, education is essential for building a strong and stable society. It promotes critical thinking, creativity, and problem-solving skills, which are necessary for addressing the complex challenges that we face today.

However, it is important to recognize that not everyone has equal access to education. There are many individuals and communities around the world who lack the resources and opportunities needed to pursue their educational goals.

As such, it is our responsibility as a society to ensure that education is accessible to all. This includes providing adequate funding for schools, investing in teacher training and support, and implementing policies and programs that promote equal opportunity and diversity.

In summary, education is a vital component of society that has a profound impact on individuals, communities, and the world at large. It is up to us to recognize its importance and work towards ensuring that everyone has equal access to quality education.

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇8

作为人教版八年级下册的英语教材，这份课件涉及到了许多有趣且具有教育意义的主题。以下将分别就其中的几个主题进行阐述。

一、健康主题

健康主题是人教版八年级下册英语中一个非常重要的主题，主要是帮助学生了解身体健康与保健知识，在学习英语的同时也关注健康。在这个主题下，有一些让人印象深刻的话题，例如：

1. 我们应该如何保持身体健康

2. 运动可以帮我们保持身体健康，你喜欢哪一种运动？

3. 我们每天该喝多少水

这些话题旨在提醒学生们人们生活中经常关注的健康方面，并且在英语学习中也与之相应地涉及了词汇和语法知识。通过这些课堂教学的内容，学生们将更好地认识到自己的健康与保健方面的需求，而且更好地利用英语语言来表达这些方面的内容。

二、旅游主题

旅游主题是人教版八年级下册英语中的另一个主题，它的出现是出于培养学生们出国旅游的兴趣，同时也通过旅游的主题，练习学生们的口语和写作方面的能力。以下是旅游主题中的一些话题范例：

1. 介绍你所在的城市，它有哪些美丽的景点

2. 你梦想去哪里旅游？为什么？

3. 是参加旅游团还是自由行更好？

通过这些话题的学习，学生们可以更好地认识世界各地的不同文化，了解其他国家的风俗与习惯，还能通过这些话题锻炼英语口语与写作方面的能力。此外，这些话题还可以作为促进学生们对本身国度与文化的认识的途径。

三、音乐主题

音乐主题是人教版八年级下册英语教材的另一个有趣的主题。在音乐主题中，学生将学习到与音乐有关的词汇、表达方法、歌曲和流行文化等方面的内容。以下是音乐主题中的一些范例话题，

1. 你喜欢听哪些类型的音乐？

2. 你认为什么样的歌曲会流行？

3. 你认为音乐中的歌词是更重要还是旋律更重要？

通过学习音乐主题，学生们将更好地了解音乐流派、文化和流行趋势等方面的内容，对时间和社会文化的变迁也会有一个更好的了解。同时，学生们还可以学习到如何运用英语语言来表达音乐方面的内容。

四、故事主题

人教版八年级下册英语教材的最后一个主题是故事主题。在这个主题下，学生将接触到不同的故事和文学作品，帮助学生更好的学习语言和文学。以下是这个主题中的范例话题：

1. 谈谈你最喜欢的儿童故事

2. 你最喜欢的图书是哪一本？为什么？

3. 你最喜欢哪一位作家？他们的书对你有哪些影响？

通过学习故事主题，学生们可以了解各种不同类型的故事和文学作品，并通过它们来提高听说读写方面的能力。您也可以结合播放相应的音乐、幻灯片和视频，通过多元化的方式来呈现故事主题培养学生的文学、语言和审美能力。

以上是人教版八年级下册英语教材的几个主题，每个主题具有他们自己的特点和教育意义。在日后的英语学习中，学生们可以根据这些主题所包含的方面来提升自己的学习水平与能力！

人教版八年级下册英语课件 篇9

主题：My Favorite Sport

As a sports enthusiast, I have a favorite sport that I enjoy playing and watching. That sport is basketball, a game that combines athleticism, strategy, and teamwork.

I first started playing basketball when I was in primary school. At first, I wasn't very good, but I quickly fell in love with the game. I enjoyed the feeling of running up and down the court, the challenge of trying to make a basket, and the excitement of playing with others. Over the years, I continued to play basketball and improve my skills.

In addition to playing basketball, I also enjoy watching professional basketball games. I am a fan of the NBA and often watch games on TV or online. My favorite team is the Golden State Warriors, and I admire players like Stephen Curry and Kevin Durant for their skill and dedication.

Basketball is not just a fun sport for me, it has also taught me many important lessons. One of the most important lessons I have learned is the importance of teamwork. In basketball, you have to work with your teammates to pass the ball, set screens, and make plays. This requires communication, trust, and a willingness to put the team's needs above your own. These skills carry over into other areas of life, such as school, work, and relationships.

Overall, basketball is my favorite sport because it is exciting, challenging, and teaches important lessons. I hope to continue playing and watching basketball for many years to come.

八年级上册英语课件

我们在闲暇时也会去看一些范文的，闲暇时看一些范文是对自己有好处的，通过阅读范文可以提高我们的表达能力。好的优秀范文更具有参考意义，你会借鉴优秀的优秀范文模板吗？下面的内容是小编为大家整理的八年级上册英语课件，相信您能找到对自己有用的内容。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

东莞中学英语组

英语科： 谢永青

11月1日（汇总）

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit1 Great Scientist (Reading)

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to familiar with some famous scientists and their contributions.

2. Enable the Ss to learn how to organize a scientific research.

3. Let the Ss learn the reading skill of getting the main idea of each para./ part & each passage .

Difficult points

1. How to grasp the main idea of each paragraph / part & each passage.

2. How to help the Ss use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

1. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

2. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

3. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

4.

Teaching aids

The multi-media (see a short movie about how to treat burn from ppt.)

Teaching procedures

I. Warming up

1. Lead-in 1) Show a picture of AIDS logo to lead in the subject-AIDS ?

Are you familiar with this red ribbon?

What’s it related to? ? What doesn’t it mean? Do you know?

(Possible answer: Red ribbon is related to AIDS. It means that we should give AIDS patients love and care, understand and support.)

2) Show a picture of Pu Cunxin and other stars to show that AIDS is a worldwide problem. ? Do you know them?

What is their job besides acting?

Is it just the problem in China?

(Possible answer: It’s not just the problem in China. It’s a worldwide problem. And besides some famous stars, some ordinary people also work very hard to tell others the harm of this disease.)

2. Brain storming

Q1: While talking about AIDS, what other diseases can you think of? Individual work: Let students brainstorm the names of diseases, such as cold, headache, toothache, diarrhea, cut, coughing, scald, insomnia, heart attack, cancer, AIDS, etc.

(With the development of science and hi-tech, many diseases can be cured. But for now, AIDS is still incurable, so it’s a deadly disease.)

3. How much do you know about AIDS?

1) Pair work-questions for discussion ? What’s the full name of AIDS?

Can AIDS be transmitted? ? In what ways can it be transmitted?

What kinds of people are likely to get AIDS?

Do people with AIDS look healthy at first?

Is it safe or dangerous to stay or to be friends with them? Why? Students don't have to give the exact answers. These questions will help them think about this disease? AIDS.)

2) AIDS QUIZ (individual work)

1) AIDS quiz (p.49)?check students? knowledge about AIDS.

2) Picture quiz ?

Can the AIDS virus transmitted via the following routes?

Summary: Medical studies show that the AIDS virus cannot be transmitted via the following routes: cups, glasses, toilet seats, swimming pools, mosquitoes, other insects or giving blood. So it? safe to be friends with AIDS patients. II. Listening (WB)

1. Pre-listening: Go through EX1&2 in Part1 and guess ?What do the letters HIV and AIDS stand for?

2. While-listening: Listen to the tape and finish exercises in Part1&2. (Make good use of some pictures and a flash ?HIV-cycle? in the PowerPoint)

3. Post-listening: Suppose you are a publicist of AIDS, please give an oral report about it to the whole class.

III. Talking (Optional) Role play:

Work in groups. Imagine that the headmaster of a school has found out that one of the students has H

IV. The student’s family has kept it a secret until now and the headmaster only learnt the truth last week. He had called a meeting to decide what to do. (Opinions can be based on their knowledge of AIDS and also the characteristics of the roles.)

IV. Homework

1. Preview Speaking (p. 50) and find some information about AIDS, drugs, smoking or drinking to support your idea.

2. Learn the new words of this unit by heart.

The Second Period GOALS:

To practice supporting and challenging an opinion.

To practice listening comprehension.

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Revision

Do you still remember this logo? What can you learn from it?

Q1: Do you remember what it means?

Q2: In what ways is AIDS transmitted?

II. Speaking

1. Pre-speaking

1) Do you agree that getting AIDS is a personal problem? Why or why not? (Through these questions- ? Raise the idea of social problem and come to Speaking part. ? Introduce the useful expressions of supporting and challenging an opinion on p.50. And throughout the whole class, teachers should try to use these expressions as many as possible to raise students’ awareness.

2) As has just been talked about, AIDS is not only a personal problem, but also a social one. Because when we talk about social problems, we mean crimes such as drug use, murder, theft or robbery and broken families. These social problems cause sadness, unhappiness, harm, fear and even wars in the world or in society. Besides, there are quite a few other social problems. Can you tell some? Can you use your own sentence to describe one of these social problems? (Possible answer: crime, health, homelessness, poverty, gambling, family violence, divorce, unemployment)

3) Information input Give students some information about how serious these problems are and ask them to take notes. Then they can decide what is the most serious. (Refer to the PowerPoint Proper explanation is needed). ? About AIDS

1. How many AIDS patients all over the world? Where are they? And are they young or old?

2. What kinds of social problems can AIDS cause?

3. How about the situation in China? ? About drugs

1. Is the use of drugs such as heroin, serious? Why do you think so? 2. What should we do with it? ? About Smoking 1. Nearly everyone knows that smoking is harmful to our health. But why do people smoke?

2. What kinds of danger can it cause to our body?

3. Can you think of the other dangers of smoking? ? About drinking

1. Do your parents drink? Do you think drinking is good or not, or it depends? Give your reasons.

2. Can drinking cause some problem to our body? What are they?

3. Will drinking cause some social problems? Give some example.

T: These four are all social problems, as they all will cause sadness, unhappiness, harm, fear and even wars in the world or in society.

2. While-speaking If you were an expert on social problems, what is the most serious problem today, AIDS, drugs, smoking or drinking? Role play ? Group of four ? Each acts as the expert on AIDS, drug, smoking and drinking. ? Use the expressions to support your opinion or challenging other’s opinions. (p.50) Language input (Useful expressions) --Repeat it to strengthen students’ ability of use it. Supporting an opinion Challenging an opinion I think that ?, because ? Perhaps, but what if / about ?? First, ? Have you thought about ?? One reason is that ? What makes you think that ?? For example, ? Could you please explain ?? If we / they were to ?, we / they could ? If I were you, I would ? 3. Post-speaking Conclusion? Class discussion Q: Could these social problems be avoided? Or could we get rid of social problems in modern times? What can we do to deal with them? (Social problems are around us. They can’t disappear in modern society. But we can do something optimistic or positive to reduce the harm they cause. That’s why we youth are asked to get away from AIDS, drugs, etc. That’s why we youth should develop good habits. That’s why many people including famous stars are busy with telling others the harm. In this way, we can stay healthy both physically and mentally.) IV. Homework 1. Finish Listening (P.50) exercises 2. Read the passage ?FIGHTING THE VIRUS: HIV/AIDS IN AFRICA? (P127) and finish the Pre-reading exercises (p. 51).

The Third Period

GOALS:

? To learn more knowledge about AIDS.

? To help students understand the attitudes and spirits of living with disease ? To learn some useful language point

I. Pre-reading

Life is not always smooth, but with submerged rocks here and there, now and then. When faced with unexpected diseases or disasters or even death, what attitude to choose is a question. Q: For example, if you found out that you had an incurable disease, how do you think your life would change? And how would you act towards the change? -- Born dying with AIDS, Xiaohua says, ?My life may have to be short, but there’s no reason why it can’t be beautiful.? -- Diagnosed with cancer, ?I? also have something to say to you. Now let’s see what ?I? will say to you.

II. While-reading

Questions:

Q1: How did cancer change the writer’s life?

Q2: Compare the writer’s situation with that of Xiaohua. In what way are their experiences similar or different?

Q3: Do their experiences strike you?

Q4: What have you learnt from them? (Get the students to put emphasis on some language points, especially how the writer expresses what he thinks. e.g. ? I remember having an empty feeling in my stomach and thinking that my life was going to end. ? There were days when I wished that I were dead so that I would not have to feel so sick.)

III. Writing

Life is like a moon, sometimes round, sometimes not. We have happy times and also sad moments. If we draw a timeline, we will find it is not always straight. Take myself for instance… Steps to follow

Step one: think about your past days: what were some events that made you very happy? What made you very sad?

Step two: draw a timeline of your life and mark the best times (the highs) and the worst times (the lows).

Step three: talk about the happy and sad things to your partner, with reference to the timeline.

Step four: choose one event, either happy or sad, which impresses you most. Try to remember all the details of it, especially how it made you feel, what it made you think and why it is important in your life. Prepare for writing it down.

Step five: work out an outline of what you are going to write.

Step six: read an example

Step seven: begin to write.

IV. Homework

1. Write an essay about an important event in your life.

The Fifth Period

GOALS: ?

To learn about some antonyms ?

To practice using some useful words and phrases in the text

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Lead-in

Ask students some questions about Xiaohua. On one hand, they can review what they have learned. On the other hand, teacher can lead them to the learning of the useful words and phrases in this way

Q1. Do you still remember Xiaohua?

Q2. What has happened to her?

Q3. What is her attitude towards the disease? (She is a brave girl. She is not discouraged by AIDS, instead, she tries her best to encourage and help other AIDS patients.)

II. Learn and practice using some antonyms

1) Ask students to pay attention to the two words in bold and explain to them their meanings, pointing out that they have opposite meanings and this kind of words are called antonyms.

2) Let students have a competition. Try to find the antonyms of the following words. Let's see who can do it correctly and quickly. defenseless -- defensive infect with -- immune to protected -- unprotected incurable -- curable discourage -- encourage visible -- invisible

3) Practice using these antonyms through exercises. (Complete the sentences using the antonyms)

1. In February some people got ____ a strange disease and died within a month.

2. Although she met many difficulties, Helen was not _____. She continued struggling with the disease.

3. People think it a serious crime to attack _______ children.

4. AIDS can be transmitted by having ______ sex.

5. Having found out that the girl has got a disease which is ______ and will die soon, the boy decide to help her to make the last days of her life beautiful and meaningful.

III. Practice using some useful words and phrases in the text.

(Translate the following sentences with the help of Chinese or italic words.)

1. The doctor ______ (诊断)my illness as a rare skin disease.

2. He has _______ （恢复）from his bad cold and can go out tomorrow.

3. The disease makes her realize how _______ （宝贵）life is.

4. The doctor told him that the wound had been infected, and that the ___________ （受感染的伤口）become deadly if it is not properly treated.

5. They are certain that this virus has been transmitted through the air, yet they have not been able to identify the ___________（传播的病毒）

6. Bad news may discourage a patient, so it is very important that doctors try to cheer up the _______________（灰心丧气的病人）

7. First the doctor takes a blood sample and has it tested. Then he will use the ________ （经过测试的血样）to find out if it is a serious disease.

8. You cannot delay the treatment any longer. You must stop working unless you want to deal with the risks of ______________.（延误的治疗）

The Sixth Period

GOALS: ?

To learn the Subjunctive Mood?

To make students get familiar with the Subjunctive Mood and master it by using it in different situations

TEACHING PROCEDURES

I. Lead-in

1) Show students the picture of Xiaohua and ask them two questions:

Q1. You must be quite familiar with this girl now, right? (Right. She is a Xiaohua, a girl who has been infected with AIDS.)

Q2. How was she infected with AIDS? (She was infected by birth.)

2) Xiaohua was born dying and she has no choices. But many people who really have many choices don’t realize how precious life is and do a lot of harms to themselves.

1. Show students some pictures of people who smoke a lot, drink a lot or even have drugs, pointing out all these can lead to deadly disease.

2. Based on the above talking, teacher raise the following questions: If they go on doing this, what would happen? If you were Xiaohua, what would you like to tell them? If you were a doctor, what would you do? If you were one of them, what would you do?

3. Some people do not take Xiaohua or doctor's advices. Finally, they die. If they had not drunk so much wine, he would not have died at such an early age. If he had (not)..., he would (not) have... Ask students to make more similar sentences, using the Subjunctive Mood.

II. More Situations

1. The woman in the picture is Helen, who has been living with AIDS for many years. Now she is celebrating her birthday with her dog. If you were Helen, what kind of wishes would you make?

2. It is said that a falling star can let your dream come true. If you saw a falling star, what kind of wishes would you make?

3. Besides a falling star, a magic lamp can also let your dream com true. If you had a magic lamp, what would you ask it to do for you ?

III. Homework

1. Finish all the grammar exercises on SB and WB

2. Review the whole unit

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit2 The United Kingdom.

Teaching Goals:

1. Get the students to know the information about the United Kingdom.

2. Encourage the students to talk out what they know about the UK and Ireland.

3. Help the students learn to get information by listening.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

5. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

6. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

7. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Warming up

1.Lead-in

(1) What do you think of Dongguan? Which place impresses you most?

(2) A. There are not many visiting places in Dongguan as it is a newly-developed city. But what about our country? Think what words youll need to describe a country and then give a brief description of China.

B. There are many famous places in China. Think out one and describe it, letting others guess which place it is.

2. Show pictures of some famous places of China. Ask: Where are they taken?

3. Show pictures of some places of the British Isles and ask the students where they are taken. Then tell the students to say something they know about these places.

4. (1) Ask the following question: Do you know how many parts the UK is made up of? (Scotland/ England/ Wales-----Britain + Northern Ireland-----the UK + the Republic of Ireland---- the British Isles)

(2) Show the map of the British Isles to help the students to get a clear idea of some important cities in the UK and the names and the locations of different parts and counties and rivers.

(3) Then ask the students to look at some cities in the UK and to name them.

5. Group work:

(1) What is the UK famous for? Think about sport, art, architecture, literature, film, food and life. (Show some famous examples.)

(2) Talk about the geography, history, languages, culture, famous people, buildings and other things in the UK and Ireland.

Step 2 Listening

1. The teacher talks more about the languages in the UK and Ireland. Then ask the students to talk more about the education in the UK.

2. Ask: How are classes arranged in schools in the UK?

3. (1) Listen to the tape and tick the sentences which are true.

(2) Listen to the tape and fill in the timetable below.

(3) Listen to the tape and answer the following questions.

Step 3 Extension

1. Talk about our own timetable.

2. Have a discussion about the similarities of the timetables in our country and the UK and also tell the differences between them.

Step 4 Homework

Find more information in relation to the UK and Ireland on the Internet.

The second period Speaking

Teaching Goals

Train the students spoken English

Improve the students ability of imagination and debate

Practice expressing agreement and disagreement

Increase participation and learn from each other.

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Talking about hot topics

1. The students are asked to listen to the 28th Olympic theme song and talk about the host city of Athens

2. Talk about the 28th Olympic Games

3. Talk about their favorite athletes

Step2 Group theme debates

Of the talks about the country and Olympics above, lots of things are talked about like the opening ceremony, island, weather, language, geographic position, medals and so on.. The following three topics will be talked about . The students are divided into three groups and each will choose one of the topic boxes

1. Box 1 Xiangsheng performance by the Chinese and the westerners. Is Chinese easy to learn for the westerners?

2. Box 2 Learning different positions of England by moving different parts. Is it easier to learn geography by going there ?

3. Box 3 Enjoying pictures of island or small countries like Iceland and Japan. Do island nations have advantages over other countries?

Step3 Tips on how to express agreement and disagreement

Step5 Homework

Preview the reading passage

The third period Reading

Teaching goals

Get the students to know more about the British Isles and learn more new words and their usages.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Presentation

Show the students four pictures and ask them to guess a country name which is related to all of them. ( The answer is the United Kingdom. )

Ask the students: How much do you know about the united kingdom? Tell the students: Today we are going to read a passage about the British Isles.

Step 2 Fast reading

Get the students to skim the passage and match the paragraphs and the topics.

Then let the students take a look at the map of the British Isles and tell me the place names of the different numbers on the map.

Step 3 Careful reading

Ask the students to read the passage carefully and decide whether the following sentences are true or false.

( ) 1. Many people around the world study English, and they know a lot about British culture.

( ) 2. Great Britain is made up of four countries.

( ) 3. The island of Britain is separated from France by the English Channel.

( ) 4. Scotland is colder throughout the year, but receives less rain.

( ) 5. People from different parts of northern Europe settled in England, so the culture of the people of the British Isles was influenced by them.

( ) 6. The southern part of Ireland is now an independent republic.

( ) 7. In modern time, people throughout the British Isles only speak English.

Step 4 Discussion

Show the students some pictures of the three countries of the British Isles and then ask: If you have got the chance to visit one of the three countries of the British Isles, which country will you choose and why?

Imagine that you are going on a four-week trip through the UK. Make a travel plan in which you describe where you go, how long you will stay and why, and what clothes and things you will take.

Step 5 Homework

Write a short passage about the Dachen Isles.

The fourth period Grammar and Language study

Teaching goals

1. Learn about the appositive clause.

2. Identify noun clauses.

3. Enable students to use new words.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Review the vocabulary and complete the sentences.

a. Students work in pairs first.

b. The teacher check the answers.

Step 2 Brainstorming

a. Review the text and present the appositive clause by asking questions:

1.What impresses you most in the passage ?

The fact that impresses me most.

2.What have you already known before reading the passage ?

I have known the fact that

3.Did you hear any news about Britain recently ?

I heard the news that

b. Collect answers as many as possible ,reminding students

of sentence structure if find errors.

Step 3 Grammar Explanation

a. Get students to identify the clauses .

c. Try to make students tell the differences between appositive clause and attributive clause by comparing the sentences.

1.The news that the plane would take off on time made everybody happy.

2.The news that is spreading around the airport is that a heavy storm is coming.

3.The suggestion that students should learn something practical is worth considering.

4.The suggestion that they are considering is that students should learn something practical.

c. The teacher offers explanation if necessary.

Step 4 Tell the function of the following sentences.

1.The idea that Great Britain is made up of three countries Corner ,Big Ben and the Tower of London is past.

2.The fact that Great Britain is made up of three countries is still unknown to many.

3.The result of so much French influence was that the English language ended up with many French words such as table, animal and age.

4.Some people feel that Wales is an ancient fairy land.

5.That most of these are now threatened and may disappear is a serious matter to the people in Britain.

6.They realize that it is of great value to record and teach them to the younger generation.

Step 5 Consolidation

Consolidate what have been learned by doing further exercises.

The Fifth Period Integrative Skills

Teaching Goals:

1. Learn to describe the countryside, the cities, the people and their life by reading the passage.

2. Learn things about the city Salisbury.

3. Know more about Britain.

4. Cultivate the students’ abilities of concluding and reasoning.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1: Lead in

Teacher plays the video clip from Robinson Crusoe and asks the students Have you ever seen this film?

Who wrote the story?

Do you know something about Daniel Defoe?

Step 3 Extension

1. More to know about life in Britain: When talking about life in England, we just can’t miss one thing---pub. Pubs play an important part in people’s lives. It is a good place to meet friends and talk and drink beers. English villages are small and cozy. Lots of pubs can be found

with names like: the Red Lion, the Black Horse, the Rose and Crown, the King and Queen, and the George and Dragon. Lots of gorgeous food like pies, steaks, chips, big sandwiches, sausages and mash (potatoes!) and lots of different types of beer: bitter, lager (a light-colored beer), ale (a type of beer made from malt), etc!!!

(A video clip is presented about a pub.)

About football: Football is Britain’s national game. It was invented in Britain as far back as the 12th century, became an organized spectator sport in 19th century, and is now played in vast stadiums watched by tens of thousands of fervent supporters. Football is one of the few things that obsessed the British. And David Beckham is one of the most famous football stars. In the video we can see many college students playing football very early in the morning.

2. Let the students say something about the British Isles as far as they know.

Step 4 Homework:

Now you know how to describe a city’s landscape, the people and their lives after reading this passage. And today’s homework:

1. Choose any place you know or you like and write a short passage about it.

2. With the help of the Internet, try to collect as much information as possible and make a PowerPoint presentation in the next period.

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit3 Life in the Future

Teaching Goals:

1. Predicting the good and bad changes in the future.

2. imagine the alien creatures.

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Revision

1 Check the homework exercises.

2 Ask the Ss a few random questions to revise future time and introduce the topic of the unit. For example: What lessons do you have this afternoon / tomorrow? Are you going to do anything special this evening? What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? What are you going to do on Saturday evening? Are you planning to do anything on Sunday?

Step 2 Presentation

S. Ask questions about the picture (in PPT.), and get Ss to tell you what they think is happening. Teach the new words majority, goods, industry. Read the introduction aloud.

Step 3 Reading

Say Now read the dialogue silently and find out this information: What is being planned at this company? Allow the Ss a few moments to carry out the task. Check the answer. (A new factory may be built.) See if the Ss can guess the meaning of out of work.

Step 4 Dialogue

Play the tape of the dialogue for the Ss to listen and follow. Go through the dialogue briefly and make sure the Ss understand it. Ask questions like these: What are people at the company talking about? Who is going to make the decision? Why does the company need to build a new factory? What is the difficulty? Why do some people want the new factory to be built? Why are some people against the new factory? Explain that may have plans expresses uncertainty about the future. Play the tape again. This time the Ss listen and repeat. Then let the Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. You may wish to ask one pair to act the scene in front of the class.

Notes:

a People have been talking of it a lot recently.:

Note the Present Perfect Continuous Tense to express an activity which started in the past and is still continuing.

b I simply don‘t know. = I honestly don’t know.

c Right now = At this moment

d The problem is … it. = Finding land for building the new factory is a problem ( i.e. difficult).

e The majority of people = Most people

f a number of people = quite a lot of people

g out of work = do not have jobs

h But some people … built on. = Some people do not want them to build a factory on good farm land. Note the structure not want something to be done.

i I can see the problem. = I understand the problem.

j is likely to happen = will probably happen

k It‘s quite likely: Quite emphasizes likely and increases the possibility.

Step 5 Practice

Demonstrate how to make sentences from the table, and then get a few Ss to make example sentences. Then let the Ss do this exercise in pairs. At the end get Ss to write down 5 sentences from this table in their exercise books.

Step 6 Workbook

After Ex. 1 is done orally, get the Ss to write the answers in their exercise books.

Both Exx. 2 and 3 should be done in pairs first. Then check the answers with the class. Get Ss to translate the sentences into Chinese and ask them to think if they will be able to put them back into English. Pay attention to the sentence structures.

When doing Ex. 4, warn the Ss not to do word for word translation. Special attention should be paid to the sentence patterns and word order.

Step 7 Consolidation

With a good class you can give the Ss the following phrases and get them to make up a dialogue. Write these phrases on the Bb.

I believe you’re right.

What are the problems then?

What do you think is likely to happen?

Write them up on the Bb and demonstrate with a good S how it is possible to make up a dialogue.

A: I think the company will buy more land.

B: I believe you‘re right.

A: But it isn’t likely that the manager will make a decision soon.

B: What are the problems then?

With an ordinary class, just practice the dialogue in Part 1 again.

Homework

Finish off the Workbook exercises.

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit 4 Making the news

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to get some knowledge about basic procedures of making the news.

2. how to make newspapers of TV programmes.

3. Talk about news and the media.

4.. Practise expressing opinions.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

1. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

2. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

Teaching procedures

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1. Learn and master the following words and phrases: media, reliable, fire, face, difficulty, elect, go up, burn down, injure.

2. Practice expressing opinion using the following:

What do you think of…?

What's your opinion?

Why do you choose…?

Perhaps…is more important.

I would rather choose.…

I don't think we should choose…

Maybe it would be better to choose…

Our readers want to know about…

3. Talk about news and the media.

4. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities.

Teaching Important Points:

1. Master the useful words and expressions appearing in this period.

2. Train the students' listening and speaking abilities by talking about news and the media.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1. How to help the students understand the listening material exactly.

2. How to help the students finish the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1. Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through the listening material.

2. Individual, pair or group work to make the students finish each task.

Step I Greetings and Lead-in

T: Good morning/afternoon, class.

Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/ Mr. X.

T: Sit down, please. Being the members of the society, we all cares for/about what happens around us or even what happens at home and abroad. How can you do so?

Ss: By reading newspapers and magazines, watching TV programmes,

listening to the radio.

T: Are there any other ways? Think it over.

Ss: By a website.

T: Yes. It’s also a way to learn about the world. What do you call these things which help us know about to the world?

Ss:新闻媒体

T: In English, we call it news media. First, let's learn the new words in this period. Look at the screen.

(Teacher first asks some students to read the words on the screen. Correct the Ss' mistakes in pronunciation. Then teacher gives brief explanations. At last, let the Ss read and remember them for a while.)

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T: Well, now please open your books at Page 9. Warming up first. Look at each of the pictures and tell me which kind of news media it shows?

Ss: The first picture shows a website; the second one shows radio; the third one shows TV programmes; the fourth one shows magazines; the fifth one shows newspapers.

T: Quite right! Now, please work in groups of four and discuss the five questions below the pictures. A few minutes later, I’ll check your answers. OK?

Ss: OK.

T: You can begin now.

(A few minutes later. )

T: Are you ready now?

Ss: Yes.

T: Which group would like to talk about the first question? Choose one member of your group to answer the question.

S1: I think TV is the most reliable among the news media. TV consists of a series of lively consecutive pictures. For the people

who want to know what is exactly happening, a picture responds better to offer the truth of a fact than the mere words upon a page. It can offer an unique function of seemingly on-the-spot feeling, which is not available to the other media.

T: The second question?

S2. I think TV programmes are easy for most people to understand. Radio, can only be heard and sometimes can’t be picked up clearly. Newspapers and magazines are only useful for people who can read. Websites have many different pages, but you should be careful

to read some of the pages. who can read. Website have many different pages, but you should be careful to read some of the pages.

T: The third question?

S3 : I will check other sources.

T: The fourth question?

S4: Every morning, the newspaper chief editor and the journalists discuss the main events of the day. Reporters are then sent to cover the events. They usually do some interviews and then check the information. They must work very fast. Later in the day, everything is put together at the news desk. Then the editors read the stories and make any necessary changes and choose a good title for eachstory. At last, they print them quickly and deliver them. Making a magazine is more or less the same as making a newspaper. But the articles in a magazine are more like stories, which are writtenby all kinds of writers. Magazines are not published as quickly as newspapers.

T: The last question?

Ss: News broadcast, newspaper, magazine, radio programme, website,

report, reporter, editor, interview, write articles…

Step Ⅲ Listening

T: Next, let's come to the Listening. We are going to listen to two parts of conversations. The first part is an interview; the second part is a dialogue. Now, look at Exercise 1:

Listen carefully towhat is said and tick the information you hear in each part. If necessary, I'll play it twice. (Teacher begins to play the tape, and checks the answers after listening. Then ask the students to finish the rest of the tasks. )

T: OK. Now, please listen to each part once again and then work inpairs to talk about the questions in Exercises 2,3,4 and 5. Are youclear?

Ss: Yes.

(Teacher allows them enough time to talk about the questions. Thenask some students to say their answers.)

Step IV Speaking

T: Well, now it's time for us to be the editors of a newspaper. Here is a list of ten things that happened today. Look at the screen. (Teacher shows the screen and read through the list to the whole class.)

200 people died in an earthquake in Turkey.

China beat Brazil 5-1 in football.

France elected a new President.

Three children from your city were killed.

Someone robbed a bank in Shanghai.

Food prices are going up.

A house in your town burned down. Nobody was injured. 2 000 people in your city were happy today and moved into new buildings. A Chinese scientist has invented a new car engine that does not pollute the air. There is a rumor that a large company wants to build a factory in your town:

(Bb :go up, burn down)

T: Now, you've known the ten things, but you only need to report

five of them. So, first decide which events you are going to put in your newspaper. Then give reasons for your choices and compare with your classmates. Work in groups of four or five. And the following expressions on the screen can help you with your dialogue. After a while, I'll ask some of you to act out your dialogue.

(Teacher shows the screen. )

What do you think of'…?

I would rather choose.…

What's your opinion?

I don't think we should choose…

Why do you choose…

Maybe it would be better to choose…

Perhaps… is more important.

Our readers want to know about….

(Teacher goes around the Ss and checks their work. If necessary, teacher may join in them. )

Teaching Plan for Book 5

Unit5 First Aid for Burns (Reading)

Teaching Goals:

1. Enable the Ss to get some first aid knowledge

2. Enable the Ss to learn how to use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

3. Let the Ss learn the reading skill of getting the main idea of each para./ part & each passage .

Key Teaching Points

How to improve the Ss’ reading ability.

Difficult points

1. How to grasp the main idea of each paragraph / part & each passage.

2. How to help the Ss use what they’ve learnt to do first aid treatment for burns correctly.

Teaching methods

1). Skimming & scanning methods to make the Ss get a good understanding of the text.

4. Discussion methods to make the Ss understand what they’ve learned in class.

5. Pair work of group to get every student to take part in the teaching-and-learning activities.

6. Competition and role-play method to arouse the Ss’ interest

Teaching aids

The multi-media (see a short movie about how to treat burn from ppt.)

Teaching procedures

Step1. Lead-in

Lead-in by telling the Ss a story, meanwhile, teach them some new words: bandage, first-aid-kit, ambulance and then ask them to think of words about accidents and first aid

Step2. Pre-reading

Show the Ss the picture of Pre-reading on P33 and ask them the following questions:

What has happened?

What sort of injuries the child will have?

What kind of first aid would you perform?

Step3. Fast reading

Let the Ss read the passage fast and then find out the answers to the questions

1. What will the passage be about?

2. What do they tell you about the passage?

3. In which order are these topics covered in the text? Number them from 1 to 5.

____ the three types of burns

____ what to do if someone gets burned

____ the purpose of skin

____ the symptoms of burns

____ how we get burns

Step4. Detailed reading

1). Tell if the following statements are true or false:

1. Our skin has three layers.

2. We will never get burned by the sun.

3. Burns are divided into three degrees according to the degree of pain.

4. Third degree burns are the most serious and painful.

5. Put cool water on any burns to cool them.

6. Don’t rub the burns

7. It’s better that you put some butter or oil on burns.

2). Answer the questions

1.Why should you put cold water on a burn?

2.Why doesn’t a third degree burn hurt?

3.Why do you think clothes and jewellery near burns should be removed?

4.If someone has a third degree burn, why might you see tissue?

3). Read the text again and then find out how many parts there are and the main idea of each part:

Part1. The purpose / function of skin

Part2. Causes of burns hot liquids, steam, fire, radiation, the sun, electricity, chemicals

Part3. Types of burns: First degree burns, Second degree burns, Third degree burns

Part4. Characteristics of burns

Part5 First aid treatment

3). Finish off Comprehending Ex2&3

Step5. Words competition

Have a competition to check the Ss’ words spelling

Step6. Making a first-aid kit

An activity to let the Ss know what are included in a first-aid-kit

A well-stocked(存备得好的) first-aid kit, kept in easy reach, is necessary in every home. It should include: bandage, alcohol, flashlight, thermometer, soap, sharp scissors, plastic gloves (at least 2 pairs), your list of emergency phone numbers etc.

Step7. Role play

Work in pairs to act out how to place an emergency call for help

Step8. Summary

This passage doesn’t contain enough information for you to do first aid for others. Please learn more after class. Do remember: Life is precious, we should care about others and help people in an emergency and try our best to give them effective first aid if they are in danger.

Step9. Homework

Search as much information as you can about first aid

www. healthy. net/clinic/first aid/

kids health. org/parent/first aid_ safe/

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

Section A

一、主要词汇：

surprise, skill, message, suppose, graduate, volunteer, experience, knowledge, border

report, pass, suppose, send, love, copy, aid, complete, gain

simple, thin, average, nervous, disappointing, true, lucky, mad, hard-working, lazy

二、语言目标：

1. He said he was mad.

2. She told me she would call me tomorrow.

3. He said he could speak three languages.

4. He said he was having a party for Lana.

三、语言结构：

1．直接引语与间接引语之间的转换；

2．掌握情态动词can 表示“能力”的用法‘

3．学会运用各种时态。

四、学法向导

1． 学会将直接引语转换为间接引语；

2． 学会用间接引语转述他人的话；

3． 各种时态要分清楚；

4． 形容词的用法。

五、教学过程

I 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

1a

（教师）1. Points to the TV screens in the picture and have students read the words in those TV screens.

（教师）2. Point to the four questions in the box and red the questions to the class again. Then help students form small groups. Say, Now answer these questions and talk about some soap operas.

（教师）3. After five minutes, talk about the questions with the whole class. Ask students from different groups to tell what they talked about in their group. Focus on the ideas the students are talking about. But sometimes when a student starts to tell what another student said, you can help that student make a sentence such as: Anna said she didn’t watch soap operas. Bill said people get mad on soap operas.

1b

（教师）1. Point to the TV screens in activity 1a one by one. Ask different students to look at each picture and tell what is happening.

（教师）2. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

（教师）3. Play the tape a second time. This time say, Now, write the numbers 1 through 4 in front of the pictures. Put a number 1 in front of the picture you hear first on the recording, and so forth.

（答案）The TV screens should be numbered in this order:

1 3 4 2

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said she was having a surprise party for Lana on Friday night.

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said Lana thought she was coming to her house to study.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she was mad at Marcia.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she wasn’t going to Marcia’s house on Friday night.

1c

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You will be talking with your partner as you do this activity.

（教师）2. Ask two students to read the example in the sample dialogue. Then say, Now work with your partner. Ask and answer questions abut each picture in activity 1a.

（教师）3. As students talk, move around the room offering help as needed.

（教师）4.Ask several pairs of students to say a question and answer to the class.

II 放完第二段视频后，

① 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

2a

（教师）1. Point to the five sentences and ask different students to read the sentences to the class.

（教师）2.Point to and read the instructions to the class. Say, You will hear a conversation between two people who are talking about a soap opera on TV. Circle true or false after each statement.

（教师）3. Point out the sample answer. Say, This is statement tells what Ben said on the soap opera. The statement is true.

（教师）4. Play the recording .

（答案）5 4 1 3 2.

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

A: Did you see “Young Lives” last night?

B: No, what happened?

A: Well, Ben told Lana that Marcia was going to have a surprise party for her.

B: Really? What did Lana say?

A: Well, Lana was very excited. Lana told Ben that she would go to Marcia’s hose on Friday night after all.

B: Oh. Then what?

A: Marcia called everyone and told them she wasn’t going to have the party.

B: Oh, no!

A: Yeah, then Lana called Marcia and told her that she could bring some drinks and snacks to her house on Friday night.

B: Oh, wow…and what did Marcia say?

A: She told Lana she would be glad…

2b

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, This time you are going to circle the actual words people in the soap opera said. Point to the sentence after number 1 and read it to the class. Then point to the speech bubble in picture 1 and say, These are the words the actor in the soap opera said. Point to the sample answer. Say, Circle the correct word here..

（教师）2. Play the recording.

（答案）1. is 2. am 3. will 4. am 5. will

2c

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2.Point out the pictures in activity 2b. Say, Use these words and pictures as you have your conversations.

（教师）3.Then have students work in pairs.

（教师）4.Check the answers by calling on different pairs to do one question and answer each..

② 全班讨论

Ask students to act out the situation shown in the pictures. Three students pretend to be Ben, Marcia, and Lana. Draw a large TV screen on the board and have these three students sit in front of it. Two other students pretend to be the two girls watching the soap opera on TV. They can sit on the floor. Ask the soap opera characters to read a line from activity 2b. Then have one of the girls report what that actor said. Repeat for all five pictures in activity 2b.

III 放完第三段视频后，

请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Read the article to the class, saying blank each time you come to a blank line.

（教师）3. Ask students to fill in the blanks on their own.

（答案）

1. was

2. thought

3. told

4. was

5. wasn’t

6. going

7. wasn’t

8. would

9. told

10. wasn’t

3b（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You can write anything you want. What do you think Ben and Lana and Marcia will do next?

（教师）2. Ask some students to read their episodes to the class..

4

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Students work in groups of four students.

（教师）2.Ask the students to complete the role pays on their own.

（教师）3. Ask a few students to show their role plays to the class.

注：黑色的斜体字是老师在课上组织教学时所用到的语言。

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

教学目标: 1.学生能够理解对话大意,能够用正确的语音语调朗读对话,能够在情景中恰当运用句型what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.能够在情景中理解新词lost,toy,notebook的意思并能正确发音。

教学重点: 1.句型:what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.词汇:lost,toy,notebook

教学难点:对here it is和here you are的理解。

教学过程:

(一)热身/复习(Warm-up/Revision)复习What’s in the schoolbag?

1.教师带领学生看图:Sarah和Amy讨论丢失的笔记本的画面。教师指着图片说Sarah lost her notebook.板书新单词lost,并带读单词。

2.教师继续提问Is Sarah happy or sad?请学生注意Sarah说的话:I like it very much。学生回答She is sad教师继续问What can she do?

3.教师指着张鹏说Zhang Peng lost something,too。 Let’s go and have a look。

4.教师出示句子:Zhang Peng lost his English book。请学生完整听一遍对话录音,判断句子正误。学生听完后进行判断,并讲English book更正为schoolbag。

5.教师提问What color is Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?板书核心句型:What color is it?学生跟读并听录找答案。听音之前教师给出答案的选项: A. It’s black and white. B. It’s blue and white.学生听完后选择正确的答案。

6.学生同桌之间互相询问对方书包的颜色,运用句型What colour is it? It’s......

7.学生做Let’s play板块的活动。

8.教师提问What’s in Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?请学生在对话中找出答案: An English book,two toys and a notebook。教师利用单词卡片和实物教学单词toy notebook。

1.教师出示对话板块的板书,播放录音,请学生看图听音后填充句子:Zhang Peng’s schoolbag isXXXXXXXandXXXXXXXX.

2.学生自由朗读对话,教师提醒学生注意按照意群朗读。

作业布置:

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

第三单元教学要点   教学要点： 一、本单元是一个说明文单元，《中国石拱桥》和《苏州园林》，《故宫博物院》是比较规范的说明文，其余则有一定的说明文性的小品。 二、本单元教学，要学生了解什么是说明文。 三、学习本单元，要理清说明文的顺序，了解常用的说明方法。 四、学习本单元后，要学生学习写作说明文。 教学时间：23课时  11 中国石拱桥  教学目的： 1．引导学生抓住中国石拱桥的特点。 2．列出文章结构，领会文章的内容。 3．激发学生热爱社会主义制度。 教学重难点： 1．重点：抓住中国石拱桥的特点，理清文章结构。 2．难点：课后思考练习题三，以形象的语言介绍一种事物。 学法指导：引导自读合作探究 教具准备： 小黑板 课时安排：3课时 教学过程： 第一 课 时 一．导入新课：  我们常常用桥梁来比喻友谊，因为是友谊就像桥一样把两个人连了起来。可见桥是在没有路的地方搭起来的路。根据史料和考察，在原始社会，我国就有了独木桥和数根圆木排拼而成的木梁桥。河北赵县的赵州桥是世界上第一座采用弓形拱的敞肩拱桥，欧洲在赵州桥建成七百年后才采用弓形拱的。我们的祖先的聪明才智值得我们每一位同学学习。 二．简介作者  茅以升是我国著名的桥梁专家、教育家、社会活动有。他主持设计的钱塘江大桥，是我国第一座由中国人自己设计的铁路公路两用桥；他还参加了新中国第一座现代化的大桥――武汉长江大桥的建造。本文最早以表于是1962年3月4 日《人民日报》，文笔通俗易懂，为读者介绍了中国石拱桥的特点，历史上的辉煌成就，及新中国成立后的发展，赞扬了我国劳动人民的聪明才智和社会主义制度的优越。 三．检查预习 1． 查字典，给加点的字注音。  弧形 拱桥 陡坡 匀称 惟妙惟肖  2． 读了本文，你了解中国石拱桥的特点以及赵州桥和卢沟桥的不同之处？ 四． 初读课文，看看作者写出了石拱桥的什么特点。  1． 提示：请同学们找出哪些段落是写赵州桥的，哪些段落是写卢光沟桥的？联系课后思考练习题一，填空。  2． 学生读，填空，教师巡视指导。  3． 总结：  名称 位置 修建年月 结构特征  赵州桥 横跨在河上 修建于公元6左右。 1全桥只有一个大拱，长达37。4米。 2大拱的两肩上，各有两面三刀个小拱。3大拱由28道拱圈拼成。4全桥结构均匀。  卢沟桥 位于永定河上 修建于公元1189到1192年间 由11个半圆形石拱组成，每个石拱长度不一，自16米到21。6米，桥宽约8米，路面平坦，几乎与河面平行。每两个石拱之间有石砌桥墩，把11个石拱联成一个整体，是一座联拱石桥。  中国石拱桥的特点是形式优美，结构坚固，历史悠久。 第 二 课 时 一． 复习上节课学过的内容 1． 听写 2． 说说中国石拱桥的特点。 二． 细读全文，理解作者是怎样说明石拱桥的特点的。  1． 为了说明中国石拱桥的特点，作者举了两个例子，一个赵州桥，一个卢沟桥，这种说明方法叫做――举例子。  2． 在写赵州桥和卢沟桥时，作者列举了许多精确的数字，这种用数字来说明事物的方法叫做――列数字。  3． 为了让人们更清楚的认识中国石拱桥的特点，作者的语言很具有逻辑性，例如课文第五自然段，在写赵州桥时，先介绍了桥的长度、宽度、设计施工的精巧。再分四点用数字分别说明。层次性很强。  4． 作者在介绍两座桥时，既抓住了它们之间的共同点，又注意到了它们之间的不同点，请同学们找出来。（共同点是都介绍了地点，修建年代，及它们的结构特点。不同点是在介绍赵州桥时顺便说明了桥的设计者，介绍卢沟桥时作马可波罗的话来赞扬其高度的技术成就和艺术价值，还介绍了卢沟桥的的特殊历史价值。这不但使行文有所变化，而且增强了文章的可读性。） 三． 引导学生学习课文的最后两段。  1． 第九段写什么，怎样写？（文章又分三点解释了到得如此辉煌的建筑成就的原因。先写……再写……最后写……）  2． 最后一段写什么，怎样写？（介绍了解放后我国石拱桥的修建情况，列举了我国修建的世界最长的独拱石桥――“长虹大桥”、我国劳动人民独创的钢筋混凝土拱桥――（双曲拱桥等，说明了我国桥梁事业取得的巨大成绩。 四． 引导学生体会说明文行文简洁、用词准确的语言特点。（联系课后思考练习题二） 五． 联系课后思考练习题三，引导学生用打比方的方法，把要说明的事理解释清楚。（我们常说用白纸写黑字，黑板其实就是一张黑色的纸，用白色的笔来写。我们把一张黑色的纸放大，再挂起来，就是一张黑板。）  第 三 课 时 一、完成课后习题。 二、拓展延伸:形象的语言介绍一种事物 板书设计： 中国石拱桥 概括说明 一般：形式优美，结构坚固 中国：历史悠久，形式多样 具体说明（举例） 赵州桥：现存最古老 独拱---37.4米（当时最长） 设计科学，施工巧妙 卢沟桥：联拱---265米 石狮千态万状，惟妙惟肖 具有纪念意义 教学后记：学生对中国石拱桥的构造等的认识把握得较好，对文中的说明方法也掌握得不错； 但对说明文的多种顺序出现在同一篇文章中的形式认识有难度。    12 桥 之 美  教学目的： 流利、有感情地朗读课文，理解作者喜爱桥的原因。 品味本文优美而又富有意蕴的语言。 学习从某一角度欣赏艺术作品的方法。 教学重点难点 品味本文优美而又富有意蕴的语言。 课时安排 3课时。 课前准备 布置学生预习课文，会写生字、准确注音，排除字词障碍。 课前学生借助网络或图书，查阅一些有关的图片资料，或依据课文内容绘制几幅 图画。(体现桥与周围环境的和谐统一)准备录音带、录音机、微机或投影仪。 教学步骤  第 一 课 时 导人新课。  马致远的“小桥流水人家”让人联想到家的温馨；徐志摩的《再别康桥》使人产生无限的惆怅……在诗人的眼中“桥”是人性化的，是情感的载体；在画家的眼中，桥则别有一番 韵味。今天就让我们跟随当代画家吴冠中去感受“桥之美”。(板书课题，“美”字写大，突出一下) 教师配乐范读课文。 (要求：注意语气、语速、语调及重音的把握) 学生自由朗读课文，思考以下问题： (多媒体或投影显示问题组) 问题．a．在作者的眼中桥美在何处?  b．为了说明桥之美作者主要举了哪些例子?  c．联系课文说说怎样欣赏一幅画? 四人小组讨论明确：  a．并不着眼于桥自身的结构美，而是缘于桥在不同环境中的多种多样的形式作用。  b．举了四个例子：乌镇苇丛上的石桥；江南乡间细柳下的石桥；水天间的长桥――颐和园的仿卢沟桥、苏州的宝带桥；形式独特的广西、云南、贵州山区的风雨桥。  c．画面的构成是否有块、线、面的搭配；画中的形象是否都能和周围的景物既形成对照又不失和谐。 ■研读与赏析  (过渡)通过阅读文章，我们不难看出作为画家，作者看桥淡化其结构、种类、功用，更重其美学价值。那么你能用优美的语言描绘文中你最欣赏的一幅画面吗7 重点研读第④小节。  (出示学生绘制的四幅图画) 四人小组讨论：  a．说说四幅图中你最喜欢哪一幅，用生动的语言描绘画面并说说为什么喜欢?  b．请有绘画天赋的同学点评。  c．我们应从哪些角度欣赏一幅艺术作品? 明确：  a．◆厚厚实实的平面铺开的苇丛使空间显得狭窄拥挤，令人产生憋闷感；间或出现的石桥轮廓简单鲜明，能使空间陡然显得疏朗开阔，令人觉得神清气爽。  ◆细弱的`柳枝拂着桥身厚重坚硬的石块，这里有形体上的强弱、轻重、动静之分，有颜色上的对比，还有变(柳枝年年发新芽)与不变(桥能历久不变)之别，种种不同，归结起来，其实是阳刚与阴柔这两种美的类型的不同，因桥的轮廓精心设计而和谐统一。  ◆长桥一般建筑在比较宽阔的水面上，打破了背景的单调感。桥是人们劳动的成果，出现在苍茫水面上的长桥，是人类创造力的体现。整个环境似乎有了灵气和生命。  ◆桥面上盖有廊和亭的桥，给人安闲、自在的感觉，这种感觉恰好与险峻的山峰、桥下的急流给人的感觉形成对照。  b．点评语言、欣赏的角度。  c．从色彩的搭配、画面构成(块、线、面)、景物的选择(强弱、明暗、动静等)是否对立统一……角度来判断。 美句赏析。  (过渡)吴冠中以他画家的真知灼见，不但告知了我们如何用“美学”的眼光来重新审视事物，而且他还用蕴涵丰富的语言引起我们强烈的感情上的共鸣。  a．找出意蕴丰富的语句，体味句子的情昧。  b．先四人小组讨论，再让小组派代表发言。 重点赏析以下语句： ◆茅盾故乡乌镇的小河两岸都是密密的芦苇，真是密不透风，每当其间显现一座石桥时，仿佛发闷的苇丛做了一次深呼吸，透了一口舒畅的气。 ◆早春天气，江南乡间石桥头细柳飘丝，那纤细的游丝拂着桥身坚硬的石块，即使碰不见晓风残月，也令画家销魂! ◆无论是木桥还是石桥，其身段的纵横与桥下的水波协同谱成形与色的乐曲。． ◆田野无声，画家们爱于无声处静听桥之歌唱，他们寻桥，仿佛孩子们寻找热闹。 (过渡)我们从《桥之美》中，体会到了桥的美感，真是赏心悦目。同是写桥的文章，《中国石拱桥》与之有什么不同之处呢? 课堂小结  同学们，今天我们在画家吴冠中的带领下，一起领略了桥的风采，生活中有多少美不胜收的景致，或纤弱或雄壮或含蓄……让我们练就一双慧眼去发现、去鉴赏这大干世界吧!  第 二 课 时 一、完成课后习题。 二、拓展延伸 比较本文与《中国石拱桥》在内容和写法上有何不同? 明确：本文是一篇带有说明性质的小品文。它的说明性体现在文中先点明在画家眼里桥美在何处，随后举了一些具体的例子。但是与《中国石拱桥》这种较为规范的说明文不同的是，在举例时，作者并不是用科学、平实的语言向读者解说，而是或描写景物，或抒发感情，文字极富表现力和感染力。 板书设

八年级上册英语课件 篇5

1.掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Canyou come to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。

1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：

教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。

2.完成任务，合作学习：

教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握所学的知识。

任务一：Planning abirthday party.

让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。

任务二：Writing aninvitation card.

学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。

学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。

完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：

We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?

When is it going tostart?

I’m sorry. I haveto....

3.拓展学习：

学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。

可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。

①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。

③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。

have a rest play there bebe busy practice be free listen to

1. Can they XXXXXXXXXXthe music in the classroom?

2. I’m sorry. TomorrowI’m XXXXXXXXXX soccer and having a math lesson.

3. He has got a badheadache. Let himXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

八年级下册英语课件

教案课件是我们老师的部分工作，因此每天老师都会按质按时去写好教案课件。做好教案对于提高教学质量有着至关重要的作用，写教案课件时需要注意哪些方面？您需要的“八年级下册英语课件”已经准备就绪了，本文值得收藏方便针对性的参考！

八年级下册英语课件 篇1

一、学习目标：1.添括号法则.

2.利用添括号法则灵活应用完全平方公式

二、重点难点

重 点： 理解添括号法则，进一步熟悉乘法公式的合理利用

难 点： 在多项式与多项式的乘法中适当添括号达到应用公式的目的.

三、合作学习

Ⅰ.提出问题，创设情境

请同学们完成下列运算并回忆去括号法则.

(1)4+(5+2) (2)4-(5+2) (3)a+(b+c) (4)a-(b-c)

去括号法则：

去括号时，如果括号前是正号，去掉括号后，括号里的每一项都不变号;

如果括号前是负号，去掉括号后，括号里的各项都要变号。

1.在等号右边的括号内填上适当的项：

(1)a+b-c=a+( ) (2)a-b+c=a-( )

(3)a-b-c=a-( ) (4)a+b+c=a-( )

2.判断下列运算是否正确.

(1)2a-b- =2a-(b- ) (2)m-3n+2a-b=m+(3n+2a-b)

(3)2x-3y+2=-(2x+3y-2) (4)a-2b-4c+5=(a-2b)-(4c+5)

添括号法则：添上一个正括号，扩到括号里的不变号，添上一个负括号，扩到括号里的要变号。

五、精讲精练

例：运用乘法公式计算

(1)(x+2y-3)(x-2y+3) (2)(a+b+c)2

(3)(x+3)2-x2 (4)(x+5)2-(x-2)(x-3)

随堂练习：教科书练习

五、小结：去括号法则

六、作业：教科书习题

第三十七学时：14.3.1用提公因式法分解因式

一、学习目标：让学生了解多项式公因式的意义，初步会用提公因式法分解因式

二、重点难点

重 点： 能观察出多项式的公因式，并根据分配律把公因式提出来

难 点： 让学生识别多项式的公因式.

三、合作学习：

公因式与提公因式法分解因式的概念.

三个矩形的长分别为a、b、c，宽都是m，则这块场地的面积为ma+mb+mc,或m(a+b+c)

既ma+mb+mc = m(a+b+c)

由上式可知，把多项式ma+mb+mc写成m与(a+b+c)的乘积的形式，相当于把公因式m从各项中提出来，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的一个因式，把m从多项式ma+mb+mc各项中提出后形成的多项式(a+b+c)，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的另一个因式，这种分解因式的方法叫做提公因式法。

四、精讲精练

例1、将下列各式分解因式：

(1)3x+6; (2)7x2-21x; (3)8a3b2-12ab3c+abc (4)-24x3-12x2+28x.

例2把下列各式分解因式:

(1)a(x-y)+b(y-x);(2)6(m-n)3-12(n-m)2.

(3) a(x-3)+2b(x-3)

通过刚才的练习，下面大家互相交流，总结出找公因式的一般步骤.

首先找各项系数的____________________，如8和12的公约数是4.

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，如(3)中相同的字母有ab,相同字母的指数取次数最___________的.

课堂练习

1.写出下列多项式各项的公因式.

(1)ma+mb 2)4kx-8ky (3)5y3+20y2 (4)a2b-2ab2+ab

2.把下列各式分解因式

(1)8x-72 (2)a2b-5ab

(3)4m3-6m2 (4)a2b-5ab+9b

(5)(p-q)2+(q-p)3 (6)3m(x-y)-2(y-x)2

五、小结：

总结出找公因式的一般步骤.：

首先找各项系数的大公约数，

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，相同字母的指数取次数最小的.

注意：(a-b)2=(b-a)2

六、作业 1、教科书习题

2、已知2x-y=1/3 ，xy=2，求2x4y3-x3y4 3、(-2)+(-2)

4、已知a-2b=2，,4-5b=6，求3a(a-2b)2-5(2b-a)3

冀教版八年级数学下册教案

八年级下册英语课件 篇2

外研版八年级下册英语Module 2 Friendship Unit1教

学设计

作者：admin 资源来源：本站原创 点击数：

一。教材分析

1.《新标准》英语采用发现式语法学习法： 呈现---提问---发现---总结，培养学生自主学习的能力。宾语从句是初中阶段较难掌握的，在JEFC教材中出现在九年级，现提早了一个学期，所以难度较大。这需要老师很好地设计课堂教学活动。

2.本模块以友谊为话题，通过听力、对话和阅读材料的学习介绍了宾语从句。友谊是同学们较为感兴趣的话题，也与他们自身经历相关。借助友谊展开话题讨论，同时培养学生关爱他人的情感。

二。学情分析

1.知识基础：部分学生缺少丰富的语言基础，对某些任务的完成有一定的难度。

2.思维能力：有较强的记忆力和模仿能力，有待培养知识的扩展运用能力。

3.认知心理：有较强的求知欲和表现欲，部分学生存在不自信，羞于表现等思想顾虑。

三。教学目标

1.语言技能目标：

听：能听懂用宾语从句表述的意义。说：能运用不同宾语从句来询问和表达友谊。

读：能读懂阅读文章，理解语篇主题和细节。写：能用宾语从句来写与友谊有关的短文。

2.语言知识目标：

1）能利用宾语从句讨论与友谊有关的话题。正确使用宾语从句的三种句式。

2）能够理解下列单词和词组：a couple of, junior high school

3）能够正确使用本模块中出现的四会词及短语。

3.情感态度目标：

1）通过对友谊的交流，掌握如何与他人交朋友，理解自己生活中情感影响的重要性。

2）引导学生与他人合作，相互帮助，共同完成学习任务，尽情享受学习的乐趣。

4.学习策略目标：

1）自主学习能够结合个人的情况预习教材和拓展。

2）合作学习能够与同学交流学习心得体会，共享学习策略。

四。教学重点与难点

教学重点： 正确运用宾语从句描述友谊。

教学难点： 宾语从句的引导词、语序及时态。

五。教学过程

Step 1 Warming up

are you from? is his name?

do you ask? do you ask?

ask where you are ask what his name is.设计意图 通过问与答的形式，呈现宾语从句，为下异步的操练做准备。

Step 2 Pair work

are you from? is your good friend from?

S1: Where are you from? S1: Where is your good friend from?

S2: I am from… S2: My good friend…is from…

S1: S2 says that he / she is from… S1: S2 says that …

设计意图 联系学生生活实际，体现用中学原则。用地图操练巩固目标句型---that引导的宾语从句。

Step 3 Group work

something about my good friend

S1 has heard that Sally…

S2 knows that Sally…

S3 says that Sally…

I think that Sally…

设计意图 通过谈论熟悉人物 Sally, 进一步加强目标语的操练。同时，相互交流和帮助又培养了合作精神。

Step 4 Presentation

talk

you ever made telephone calls?

Who do you usually call?

a telephone call with a the other students an example.（suppose tomorrow is Saturday, you want to invite someone to have a picnic with you.）

T: Hello, this is Miss Wu I speak to LiHui?

S1: Hello, Miss Wu, this is LiHui are you?

T: I'm fine , ,LiHui, we are going to have a picnic tomorrow, would you like to go with us?

S1: Great!I'd love and where shall we meet?

T: Let's meet at half pass 8, at our school : Ok, see you : See you and find out:

What do Ann's mother and Bill talk about on the phone?

（事先交代情景： Ann's classmate Bill called Ann wasn't 's mother answered the phone.）

Expressions of making telephone calls:

Hello!Could I speak to Ann, please?

I'm afraid she isn't here right I take a message for you?

This is 'll give her the message…

设计意图 新语言项目在情景中自然呈现，比较中、英文打电话的不同用语，引导学生判断、总结，从而达到理解、学习并运用语言的目的。充分体现了学习的过程。

Step 5 Practice

and find out how many people you hear.（Turn to page 10-1）

and number the order.（Turn to page 10-2）

a telephone telephoned Father wasn't answered the telephone.（用两只电话机让学生在课堂上表演）

Activity 5, 2, 3, 4

设计意图 在常规听力练习中进一步提高学生听的能力，在尽可能真实的情景中巩固打电话用语。

Step 6 Presentation Why does Sally call Chen Huan?

设计意图 激发求知欲望。顺利进入新课的学习。

Step 7 Listening and reading:（Turn to Page 10-3）

and answer the questions:

1）How many persons are there in the dialogue？

2）Where are they?

and answer（必须用宾语从句回答）

1）What does Chen Huan say? He says that…

2）What does Sally say? She says that …

and check（√）the true sentences.（Turn to Page 11-4）

设计意图 听读两方面入手，由易到难，层层推进，重视对学生学习能力和技巧的培养。

Step8 Exercise

the words with their and answer the questions about the words in the box.（Turn to p11-5）

设计意图 由单词的复习过渡到句子的复习，既培养学生在语境中理解、识记单词的能力，又为新课的学习起到较好的铺垫作用。

Homework

your teacher

假设10年后，你参加工作，当了一名记者，回来看望老师。学生自由向老师提问，老师重复学生的问题，很自然地引出新知识---疑问句的宾语从句。: Miss Ni, do you still like teaching English?

T: S1 wants to know if I still like teaching 'm glad to tell you that I like teaching English very .给好朋友打个电话，请他来参加你的生日晚会。

设计意图

1.英语是一门语言，而语言是用来交际的。只有多听、多读，才能让我们的英语说得更加流利，掌握得更加牢固。

2.让学生学会一切可利用的资源来获取更多的学习信息。学习活动由课堂向课外延伸。

3.贯彻从师生交流到生生交流的原则，在体现学生自主学习的同时，注重教师的示范作用。

八年级下册英语课件 篇3

Unit6 Enjoying Cycling

Topic 1 We’re going on a spring field trip

Section A说课稿

一、说教材

1. 教材分析

仁爱版初中英语教材共六册,每册由四个模块组成,每个模块由单元----话题----功能---任务构成,编写思路清晰,符合学生的认识发展规律.八年级英语下册第六单元Topic1 Section A讲述了让学生学习如何用英语谈论旅游，并收集旅游信息。它由3部分组成，用1课时完成。通过学习Section A,学生可以更多的了解旅游知识并提高实际能力;动词不定式是本节课的重点语法项目。

2.教学目标

(1).知识目标

要求学生牢记Section A所有新学的四会单词.短语和重点句型;掌握不定式“to do”的用法。

(2).技能目标：

能用英语与他人谈论关于旅游的话题。培养学生提高语言交际能力,能在小组中积极与他人协作,从而开阔自己的视野,扩大知识面。

(3).情感目标

培养学生爱护大自然，热爱旅游.积极参与课堂上各种英语实践活动的兴趣。培养学生分工合作和团体协作精神。

3.教学重点和难点

(1).重点:谈论关于旅游的话题。

(2).重点和难点:不定式“to do”的用法。

二.说学情

1.学生对旅游较感兴趣,但对旅游知识了解较少。

2.学生的词汇量掌握不多。

3. 学生平时较少用英语与他人交谈并表达信息.。

三.说教法学法

按照课程改革的要求,遵循“老师由主演变导演，学生由配角变主角”的角色转换,采用把课堂交给学生的教学理论,我运用自由讨论.分组工作.结对练习.问答练习等方法,借助多媒体、录音机,图片等教学手段,设置特定的语言环境,使学生在轻松愉快的气氛中理解.运用英语。

四.说教学程序

我设计了以下的步骤来训练学生的听.说.读.写的能力,尤其是他们“说”的能力。

(一)温故知新

(1).请两位学生用上节课重点句型号，分别复述Unit 5 Topic3 Section D 1a

(2).教师与学生之间进行问答对话，让学生谈论关于他们最喜爱的旅游方式。 设计意图：巩固上节课学过的知识，为学习新课铺垫。

(二)情景导入

用多媒体展示一些关于旅游和交通的图片,来引起学生的兴趣,并由此教学本节课

的新单词,如:field ,trip ,cycle ,vehicle ,airline等。

设计意图：通过用多媒体展示学生熟悉的交通工具图片，激发学生的学习兴趣，轻松掌握新单词，顺利带入新课。

(三)重点呈现

1、展示多媒体( Flash课件)1a,并回答以下问题:

(1)Where will they go?

(2)What will Kangkang and Michael do?

(3)What will Helen do?

(4)How about Jane?

设计意图：应用多媒体展示，形象直观，给学生予视、听训练，根据情景对话,通过问答活动,以达到提高学生的“听.读”能力。

2、讲解重点.难点

(1)动词不定式“to do"的用法

a)不定式作主语

b)不定式作定语

c)不定式作目的状语

d)不定式作宾语

(2)It’s too+形容词+(for sb.)+to do sth.的句型

设计意图：训练学生理解和应用语言点的能力。

(四)知识巩固

1、放录音，让学生听并跟读

2、找出重要句型

3、给学生一点时间完成1b，然后用多媒展示的画面，请两组学生用带有“to do "的句子表演对话。

设计意图：我想知道我的学生是否真正了解整个对话的内容，并掌握了这节课我所传授的知识。此外，我将把学生们找到的重点句型板书在黑板上，以便他们能够更简单地记忆。

(五)归纳总结

让学生交流本节课所学的知识，教师除了板书所呈现的重点.难点内容外，又以“堂堂清”的形式进行当堂操练，进一步巩固对本课内容的理解和运用。

展示板书(根据本课的重点难点)

Unit 6 Topic 1 Section A

1.I have some exciting news to tell you !

2.It’s too far for cycling 。

3.Do you know the best way to get there?

4.It’s hard to say。

5.We’ll decide on the best way to go on our trip。

2、家庭作业

(1)抄写新单词和本节课重点句子。

(2)给学生看四幅名胜古迹的图片，让学生回去查找信息，看看哪个地方最值得参观，并编成对话，内容包括旅游的时间.方式和票价(要求用动词不定式)。

设计意图：

五、教学评价：

本课以课改为目的，结合教材重点.难点及英语学科的特点，利用多媒体辅助教学，体现“自主，合作，探究”的学习方式，它较之传统教学更能使每位学生都能积极参与到课堂学习及课外活动中去。使学生的听.说 .读.写能力得到全面提高，在愉快轻松的氛围中掌握知识。与此同时，带来的问题是：每个学生接受知识，获取知识的方式与快慢存在着差异，这就决定了在学习成效上的差别。为此，老师要对每个学生作深入了解，并制定相应“水平线”以鼓励学生超越。

八年级下册英语课件 篇4

冀教版三年级英语下册教案

八年级下册英语课件 篇5

教案设计：

本单元的教学目标主要包括：

1. 学会本单元的生词和短语，能够进行简单的拼写和记忆。

2. 掌握本单元的语法知识，能够进行简单的句型转换。

3. 培养学生的英语听说能力，能够听懂和说出简单的英语。

教学重点和难点：

教学重点：本单元的语法知识，包括时态、语态、主谓一致等。

教学难点：培养学生的英语听说能力，包括听懂和说出简单的英语。

教学方法：

1. 听力训练：通过听录音或者播放音频，让学生掌握本单元的生词和短语，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

2. 口语训练：通过对话练习，让学生掌握本单元的语法知识，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

3. 阅读训练：通过阅读文章，让学生掌握本单元的生词和短语，并能够进行简单的句型转换。

4. 游戏教学：通过游戏的形式，让学生更好地掌握本单元的语法知识。

教学评价：

教学评价主要包括课堂表现评价、作业评价和考试成绩评价。

课堂表现评价：通过课堂上的表现，如回答问题、积极参与课堂讨论、认真听讲等，来评估学生的学习效果。

作业评价：通过作业，如填空题、选择题、对话练习等，来评估学生对本单元的掌握情况。

考试成绩评价：通过学生的考试成绩，如单元测验、期末测验等，来评估学生对本单元的掌握情况。

反思：

通过这次教学，我发现学生对于本单元的语法知识掌握情况不够好，需要加强听力和口语训练，以及提高学生的阅读水平。

八年级下册英语课件 篇6

【主题一】My Favorite Hobby

I have a lot of hobbies, such as reading, playing sports, and listening to music. But my favorite hobby is drawing. I began drawing when I was just a little kid, and I fell in love with it right away. I enjoy creating different images and bringing my imagination to life.

When I draw, I feel relaxed and happy. It's like I enter into a different world where there are no rules or boundaries, and I can let my mind go wild. I usually draw in my free time, and every time I finish a drawing, I feel a sense of accomplishment.

Drawing helps me express my feelings and emotions in a positive way. Sometimes, I feel sad or anxious, and I don't know how to deal with it. But when I draw, I can let everything out, and it makes me feel better. Drawing also helps me improve my concentration and focus, which is essential for my studies.

In the future, I want to become a professional artist. I believe that the more I draw, the better I will become, and I will be able to make a living from my art. Even if I don't become famous, I will still be happy as long as I can continue to draw and express myself.

【主题二】My Dream Job

My dream job is to become a doctor. Ever since I was a little kid, I wanted to help people and make a difference in their lives. Being a doctor would allow me to do just that. I believe that being a doctor is one of the most honorable professions in the world.

I am currently studying hard to achieve my dream. I am taking science and math courses to prepare me for medical school. I know that the road to becoming a doctor is challenging, but I am willing to put in the work and effort to achieve my goals.

Being a doctor would allow me to help people in many different ways. I could diagnose and treat illnesses, save lives in emergency situations, and even prevent diseases through public education and awareness campaigns.

I know that being a doctor requires a lot of knowledge, skill, and dedication, but I believe that I have what it takes to become a successful doctor. I am passionate about helping others, and I think that this is the most important quality for a doctor to have.

In the future, I hope to work in a hospital or clinic where I can help people who are sick or injured. I believe that being a doctor is not just a job, but a calling. I am excited about my future career and look forward to making a difference in the world.

【主题三】My Travel Experience

I have always enjoyed traveling and exploring new places. One of my most memorable travel experiences was when I went to Japan with my family.

Japan is a beautiful country with a rich history and culture. We visited many famous landmarks, such as the Tokyo Tower, Mount Fuji, and the Imperial Palace. We also tried many delicious Japanese foods, such as sushi and ramen.

One of the highlights of our trip was when we visited Kyoto. Kyoto is a city that is known for its traditional architecture and beautiful temples. We visited the Kiyomizu-dera temple, which is a UNESCO World Heritage site. The temple was built in the 17th century and is famous for its wooden stage that overlooks the city.

Another memorable experience was when we went to Hiroshima. Hiroshima is a city that is famous for being the site of the atomic bombing during World War II. We visited the Peace Memorial Park and Museum, which was both moving and educational.

Traveling to Japan was an amazing experience that allowed me to learn about a different culture and way of life. I realized that there is so much in the world to explore and discover. I hope to have many more travel experiences in the future and continue to learn and grow as a person.

八年级下册英语课件 篇7

一、教案

单元名称：Going to a Party (参加派对)

教学目标：

1. 掌握句型"What are you going to wear?" (你打算穿什么？) 和"I'm going to wear ..." (我打算穿...)

2. 通过学习并模仿对话，能够完整运用句型"What are you going to wear?"来询问他人的打算，并用"I'm going to wear..."回答。

3. 学习并理解涉及派对主题的词汇和短语，加深对该主题的理解。

重点词汇：

wear (穿着), jeans (牛仔裤), skirt (裙子), T-shirt (T恤衫), dress (连衣裙), suit (西服), jacket (夹克衫), shoes (鞋子)

教学方法：听说读写综合教学

教学步骤：

1. 导入新知识，利用图片、视频等资源向学生展示不同派对的照片，激发学生对话题的兴趣，引起学生的思考和讨论。

2. 听力训练：播放录音，让学生听取不同场景中人们要参加派对时的对话，学生通过听力练习锻炼辨音和提高听力技巧。

3. 口语练习：学生分组，以小组形式练习对话，一个学生问"What are you going to wear?"，另一个回答"I'm going to wear..."，并展示自己选好的派对服装。

4. 课文阅读：学生阅读教材中的对话，理解对话内容和所涉及的词汇和短语。

5. 课堂练习：老师出示图片，让学生描述图片中人物的服装，并进行问答。

6. 小组活动：学生分组，每个小组设计一个虚拟派对，要求小组成员互相提问并回答"What are you going to wear?"，并展示自己的派对服装。

7. 家庭作业：学生完成作业本上的练习题，巩固本单元所学内容。

二、反思

在教学过程中，我使用了多种教学方法，如听力训练、口语练习、课文阅读和小组活动等，以提高学生的听说读写能力并增加他们对该主题的兴趣。通过引入具体的图片和视频资源，我成功地激发了学生的兴趣，使他们更好地参与到课堂活动中。

在教学初期，我发现学生对新句型"What are you going to wear?"和"I'm going to wear..."的理解有些困难。为了解决这一问题，我进行了多次示范和口语练习，鼓励学生多多运用这些句型进行对话，同时我也特别关注学生的发音和语法错误，及时进行纠正。通过这样的反复练习，学生逐渐掌握了这个句型，并且积极参与到小组活动中，展示自己的派对服装。

在教学过程中，我还注意到一些学生对课文中的生词和短语掌握不牢固。为了解决这个问题，我与学生一起进行了课文阅读，以及对生词和短语的解释和示范。同时，在小组活动中，我鼓励学生使用所学的词汇和短语进行描述，以增加他们的语言输出和应用能力。

总的来说，这堂课的教学效果较好。学生在互动中积极主动地学习和参与，并取得了很好的语言表达能力和对话技巧。同时，通过反思，我也发现了自己教学上的不足之处，例如对学生困惑和错误的及时纠正不够，以及课后练习的设计不够充分等。在今后的教学中，我会更加注重这些方面，力求提高自己的教学水平，并更好地帮助学生提高英语能力。

八年级下册英语课件 篇8

Lesson 33 教学设计

Teaching content:

1. new words: living room, kitchen, bathroom

2. a dialogue about Li Ming’s arriving in Canada

3. let sb. do sth.

4. introduce sth./sb. to sb.

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some important words for transportation

3. write something about means of transportation

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points

1. the usage of let

2. introduce sth. to sb.

Difficult points: the usage of let

Teaching aids: a picture of living room/ kitchen/ bathroom, some cards, slide projector

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

Introduce the topic for Unit 5. Please read about introducing units in “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There are two reading for this lesson. Teach the first reading. The second reading is for students to use independently.

The readings present new vocabulary and review vocabulary the students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

Can, on foot, take a plane/train

Can/could I/you…?

Of course.

Oral Vocabulary

Rapid, transportation, type (n.)

Before you begin the reading, introduce unit project 1. See “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about introducing unit projects. Also see the Unit 5 introductory page in this teacher’s guide. Instructions for unit project 1 are in the student book.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here are some step-by step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson. Also see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about teaching readings.

Step l: Check to see if the students have previewed the text. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Use your discretion to decide whether you want to spend some time on the new vocabulary. You may want to ask students to explain the meaning of some sentences containing key words. What strategies did they use to puzzle out the meanings? Remember to give lots of praise for a good try, even if it's wrong. It may be helpful to write the following phrases on a large piece of paper or on the blackboard, as a review. This will be helpful for students to refer to in the next step.

(to go) on foot

take a bus/taxi/car

ride a bike/the train

(to go to someplace) in a car

If you wish, you may say something about the word type in comparison with' the word kind, which the students learned in the last unit.

Step 3: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to talk about their usual means of transportation in moving around the city and travelling around the country. Encourage students to use the phrases that you have listed as well as to borrow phrases and sentence patterns from the text.

Step 4:Ask for three volunteers to act out the text.

They can choose to read aloud their lines from the reading. They can also improvise and create lines of their own.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (15 minutes)

Begin unit project 1. This project covers three lessons. Working in groups,' students will complete a project to present to the class.

Divide the class into small groups of three or four students. Each group chooses a type of transportation for the project. Instruct students to begin collecting information about that type of transportation. They will prepare a comic strip or timeline of important dates in its development.

Teaching tip

Set up a contest for good group work.

Here's a way to encourage good group work among your students.

Tell the class that each group starts with a score of ten in each of these categories: project plan, cooperation, use of English, quietness, progress, final product. Write these across the top of the blackboard. Along the left side Of the blackboard, write a list of the groups names.

Add or subtract scores according to each group's performance. For example, if a group is trying to use a lot of English, give it two points (so now it has twelve points in that category). If a group is working with too much noise, subtract a point from that group in that category.

Keep track of the scores each day over the course of a project. What group has the highest score?

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks:

Write the words you hear.

Dinosaur Fun Park

Hi, this is Danny: I will tell you a story about my trip to Dinosaur Fun Park!

Dinosaur Fun Park is a fun place for dinosaurs. There is lots of dinosaur food there. Dinosaur food is very good for dinosaurs. It is like people food, but it is bigger. Dinosaur cookies are as big as kitchen tables. There are lots of dinosaur games, too. Many dinosaurs play dinosaur ping-pong. It is like people ping-pong, but the ball is bigger. Dinosaur ping-pong uses a basketball!

I loved Dinosaur Fun Park, but I am too small to live there. If I grow bigger, maybe I will visit again!

Class closing (5 minutes)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much. reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the first reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 34 教学设计

Teaching content

1． new words: refrigerator, inside, wash, juice, pass, knife, mine

2． a dialogue about having breakfast

3． the usage of would like

4． introduce sth.

Lesson objectives

At the end of this lesson, the students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know something about the development of the airplane

3. write something about airplanes

Key points

1． Time for sth. =It’s time for sth. =It is time to do sth.

2． What would you like? I would like…

Difficult points: would like to do sth.

Teaching aids: a picture of stove/ refrigerator, sink, some real things or some pictures of food, audiotape

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

airport, passenger, station, railway, fly

Oral Vocabulary

runway

For general suggestions about teaching immersion reading, please see “Teaching Techniques” in the back of this guide. Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. Ask if they know anything about airplanes beyond what is said in the reading.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. You can decide whether you think it is necessary to spend some time on the new vocabulary.

Step 3: Ask the students to work individually to summarize the main ideas of the reading in five or six sentences.

Stop 4: Ask for one or two volunteers to read their summaries aloud to the class. Do other students agree with what has been presented as the main ideas? Discuss as a class. Use as much English as possible.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (continued) (15 minutes)

Continue unit project 1. Students continue to work on their projects. Advise students that they should finish the projects during this lesson. They will present their projects during the next lesson.

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Follow 'the instructions.

a. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Hi. Do you remember me? My name is Chad! I invented the dog-waterer. Do you have one yet? Thanks to me, there are no more thirsty dogs!

My family went on a trip this summer. We went on a ship. Passengers on the ship could sleep or play games. There were swimming pools and movie theatres on the ship! Our rooms were very big.

My mum and dad liked the ship. They did not have to cook or clean. My dad Cried when our trip was over!

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson.

Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the second reading in the reader

the remaining activity, book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 35 教学设计

Teaching content

1． new words: mitten, usually, sometimes, ride, always

2． a dialogue about Li Ming’s going to school in Canada

3． usage of sometimes, usually

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know something about the development of the bicycle

3. write something about bicycles

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points: usage of usually and sometimes

Difficult points: usually and sometimes

Preparations: pictures, audiotape, slide projector

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

all right, get off, get on, ride, seat (n.)

Oral Vocabulary

pedal (n.). wheel

There are many ways to teach immersion reading.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text.

Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. Ask if they know anything about bicycles, beyond what is said in the reading.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. You can decide whether you want to spend some time on the vocabulary listed above.

Step 3: Ask the students to work individually to summarize the main ideas of the reading in five or six sentences.

Step 4: ASk for one or two volunteers to read their summaries aloud to the class. Do other students agree with what has been presented as the main ideas? Discuss as a class. Use as much English as possible.

Unit project 1: History of a type of transportation (Continued 15 minutes)

Conclude unit project 1. Groups present their work to the class. Depending on class size and the length of presentations, you may wish to divide up the class.

Groups would then present their projects to one portion of the class.

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks.

Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part One

Have you heard the story of Babo? No?

Then I will tell you about Babo.

Babo lived a long time ago. He did not work hard. He had a big basket. Every morning,

Babo filled the basket with apples. Then he walked along the street. People bought Babo's apples. Babo's basket was always empty when the evening came. But Babo was very poor.

One day, Babo saw a man riding a bicycle:

But it wasn't a bicycle! It had only one wheel! People were watching the man. They were singing, “Ron the Rider! Ron the Rider!” Some of them gave money to Ron.

Class closing (5 minutes)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students progress.

the third reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

LESSON 36 教学设计

Teaching content

1. new words；year, same, glad, classmate

2. a dialogue about Li Ming’s meeting Jenny’s class

3. meet and introduce each other

4. usage of speak and same

Lesson objectives

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the song and sing the ong well

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary

3. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

Key points:

1. introduce to each other

2. speak and same

Difficult points: usage of word same

Teaching aids: audiotape, recorder, pictures

Type: dialogue

Teaching procedure

Class opening (5 minutes)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide.

Student book (15 minutes)

The reading for this lesson is a song. The audiotape presents the song; the words to the song are in the student book.

The new vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

drive, get in

No Parking!

Yes/Certainly.

You'd better not.

Oral Vocabulary

highway

See “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher's guide for suggestions on teaching songs.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the song in this lesson.

Step 1 Have the class read the lyrics aloud as a poem. You may divide the class into two groups. Each group will read one line at a time. Make sure students can read rhythmically with a good sense of the rhymes!

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow in their books.

Step 3: Practice singing the song repeatedly until the students can sing it well.

Class activity How to get from here to there (15 minutes)

In this activity, students can have fun discussing transportation. Write several false statements about transportation on the blackboard. For example:

I will drive my car across the Pacific Ocean to get to Canada.

At the airport, I will take the train to Beijing.

I will fly my bicycle to school.

Ask for volunteers to correct these statements. Then ask each student to make up three false sentences about transportation. Have students choose partners. The students exchange their sentences with their partner. Each partner works to correct the other's sentences. Then students compare their corrections. Do partners agree on how to correct the sentences?

Activity book (5 minutes)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part Two

Later, Babo saw Ron the Rider walking along the sidewalk. He had his one-wheeled bicycle. “Do you like riding your one-wheeled bicycle?” Babo said to Ron.

“No. It is hard work,” said the man. “And I am poor. 1 work hard and I make little money.”

“I make little money, too,”said Babo. “But I do not work hard. I fill this basket with apples. People come and buy them from me.”

Ron the Rider laughed. “I will give you my one-wheeled bicycle if you give me your basket” he said.

Class closing (5 minutes)

There is no specific reading from the reader to assign as homework for this lesson.

This is a chance for students to catch up if they are behind.

Suggested homework for this lesson includes:

the remaining exercises in the activity book

the next lesson in the student book

diary-writing and ,group verb-tense Studies

Lesson 37 教学设计

Teaching content

1. new words: temperature, outside, cup, shape, circle, line, pizza

2. a dialogue L Ming and his friends

3. how to ask and answer about the temperature

Lesson objectives

1. After this, students should be able to understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some words that can help one imagine future transporttation

3. write something about transportation in the future

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts.

Key points: express weather

Difficult points: how to express weather

Type: dialogue

Preparations: pictures of different shapes, audiotape, recorder, slide projector

Class opening

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at back of this teacher’s guide. You may wish to have the class sing “Let’s Take a Drive.”

Student book( fifteen minutes)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading presents new vocabulary and reviews the vocabulary for this lesson includes the following words and phrases:

Mastery Vocabulary

round (adj)

Oral Vocabulary

invent, present (v. ), presentation

Before you begin the reading, introduce unit projects 2. see “ Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher’s guide for general information about introductory page in this teacher’s guide, Instructions for unit project 2 are in the student book.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here is some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the reading as required. Ask if they have any questions concerning the meaning of the text.

Encourage other students to try to answer the questions.

Step 2: Play the audiotape. Have the class follow the audiotape while looking at the text. At this point, you may wish to ask the students to explain the meaning of some sentences containing key words or phrases. What strategies did they use to puzzle out the meanings? Remember to give lots of praise for a good try, even if it's wrong.

Step3: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to use their imagination and talk about their ideas for new types of transportation. They should try to use what they have learned in this unit to talk about their inventions.

Step 4: Have some groups volunteer to tell the rest of the class about their inventions.

Step 5: If you have time, ask three volunteers to act out the reading in any way they choose.

UNIT PROJECT 2: FUTURE TYPE OFTRANSPORTATION （15 MINUTES)

Begin unit project 2. This project covers two lessons. Divide the class into small groups. Each group thinks up a new type of transportation for the future and begins to prepare a presentation about it for the class. They should include a drawing.

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Follow the instructions.

a. Listen. Fill in the blanks. Write the words you hear.

Babo's Bike, Part Three

Babo learned how to ride Ron's bicycle. It was very hard work to ride the one-wheeled bike. So Babo thought of a new way to make his money.

One day, there was a rope in the air above the street. Babo was on the rope. He was on his one-wheeled bicycle! Babo rode his bike across the rope. Many people stopped to watch. They were very interested. They gave Babo lots of money! Babo was rich!

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson.

Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the fourth reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 38 教学设计

TEACHINGCONTENT

1. new words: dry, bike, bear

2. a dialogue between Li Ming and his teacher

3. usage of some words: always, usually, sometimes, never

KEY AND DIFFICULT POINTS: usage of some adverbs: always, usually, sometimes, never

TYPE: dialogue

TEACHING AIDS: some different tapes, audiotape, recorder, slide projector

LESSON OBJECTIVES

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. remember and use the mastery vocabulary and know some words that can help one imagine new types of transportation

3. write something about future transportation

4. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

CLASS OPENING (5 MINUTES)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see “Teaching Techniques” at the back of this teacher's guide .You may wish to have the class sing “Let's Take a Drive,”

STUDENT BOOK (15 MINUTES)

There is one reading for this lesson. The reading reviews the vocabulary students have learned in previous lessons. There is no new vocabulary for this lesson.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading.

Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text as required. Ask if they have any questions. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. To check how well students understand this reading, you may find it helpful to ask questions such as:

Who is Sam? When and where did you meet him?

What new type of transportation would Sam like to invent'?

Step 2: Play the audiotape.

Step 3: Discuss the reading with students. Use as much English as possible. Ask questions to make it easier for students to participate in the discussion. Ask questions such as:

What is space?

What is a spaceship?

Do you have an idea for a future type of transportation?

Is Sam's idea for a future type of transportation the same as yours?

Step 4: Divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to continue to talk about their ideas of inventions by using words, expressions and sentence patterns they have learned in this unit. Instruct the groups to write five to six sentences describing their inventions. If there is time, have some groups share what they have written with the rest of the class.

UNIT PROJECT 2: FUTURE TYPE OF TRANSPORTATION (CONTINUED) (15 MINUTES)

Conclude unit project 2. The groups present their future type of transportation to the class. Depending on class size and the length of presentations, you may wish to divide up the class. Groups would then present their projects to one portion of the class.

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Look at these questions.

Can you choose the correct answers? Please try.

1. Tom says, “I like this TV show very much.”

2. Li Ming says, “It is October 1. It is China's National Day.”

3. Li Ming Says, “1 would like brown shoes, please?

4. Li Ming says, ”Where are you getting off?“ Wang Mei says, ”At the next stop. Where are you getting off?“

Li Ming says, ”The stop after next.“

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES)

Below is the suggested homework for this lesson. Aim to give students about thirty minutes of homework. Use your discretion in deciding how much reading or how many exercises to assign as homework. Base your decision on students' progress.

the fourth reading in the reader

the remaining activity book exercises

the next lesson in the student book

Lesson 39 教学设计

TEACHING CONTENT

1. mastery words; watch, toilet

2. a dialogue and a short text

3. the Present Continuous Tense

LESSON OBJECTIVES

After this lesson, students should be able to

1. understand the meaning of the text

2. memorize what is reviewed in this lesson and talk/write something about a fun project for inventions

3. understand and write down some missing words as heard in sentences or passages in different contexts

KEY POINTS

1. the Present Continuous Tense

2. look, watch and see

DIFFICULT POINTS: the Present Continuous Tense

TYPE: a dialogue and a short text

TEACHING AIDS: some food, some pictures of furniture, audiotape, recordeer

CLASS OPENING (5 MINUTES)

For ideas and tips on beginning a class, see ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide. You may wish to have the class sing ”Let's Take a Drive.“

STUDENT BOOK (10 MINUTES)

There is one reading for this lesson. It reviews the vocabulary for this unit. There is no new vocabulary in this lesson.

There are many ways to teach immersion reading. Here are some step-by-step instructions for one way to teach the reading in this lesson. Also see ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide for more general information about teaching readings.

Step 1: Check to see if the students have previewed the text as required. Ask if they have any questions. Encourage other students to try to answer the questions. As a quick review, ask students to name the words they know for different kinds of vehicles.

Step 2: Play the audiotape.

Step 3: Depending upon how much time you have you may divide the class into small groups. Ask each group to think about, discuss and then write an e-mail in response to Jenny's e-mail to Li Ming. if there is time, ask some groups to share their writings with the rest of the class.

VERBS (20 MINUTES)

Review the irregular verbs in this unit: drive, ride and sly. See ”Teaching Techniques“ at the back of this teacher's guide for recommended methods of teaching verbs.

Review the verb can, which is also in this unit.

This is a special verb, like might. The students learned the verb ”might' in Level 1 of junior school.

Do they remember what might means? Write this list on the blackboard:

I go. I might go.

He goes. He might go.

We go. We might go.

I run. I might run.

He runs. He might run.

We run. We might run.

Now ask for volunteers to write the same phrases with the word “can.”

I can go.

He can go.

We can go.

I can run.

He can run.

We can run.

What do the phrases mean? “I (verb)” describes what you are doing now. “I might ” expresses uncertainty. You might do something, but you might not. “1 can” expresses an ability. If you can do something, you are able to do it.

Sometimes “can” expresses permission. For example, you might ask your parents: “Can I go to the cinema?” If they permit you to go, they might say: “Yes, you can.”

ACTIVITY BOOK (5 MINUTES)

Play the audiotape. The aural exercises for this lesson are:

1. Listen to the audiotape. Look at these questions. Can you choose the correct answers? Please try.

1. Li Ming says, “It is cold, isn't it?”

Wang Mei says, “Yes it is. It might get colder. It might snow.”

2. Mrs. Brown says, “There will be a good program on TV. It is about making movies. Don't forget to watch it. ?'

3. Brian says, ”I saw Tim today. He is my good friend. I haven't seen him for many weeks. He looks great. I saw him at a restaurant.“

4. Danny says, ”I'm looking for Brian. I can't find him. Have you seen him?“

Jenny says, ”Yes. I saw him in the library.

He was looking up some words in the dictionary."

CLASS CLOSING (5 MINUTES

There is no specific reading from the reader to assign as homework for this lesson. This is a chance for students to catch up if they are behind.

Suggested homework for this lesson includes:

the remaining exercises in the activity book

八年级下册英语课件 篇9

难点讲评

1.What time do you get up?

What time +助动词do/does +主语+动词原形，询问某人做某事的具体时间。

what time do you begin class in the morning?

注：What’s the time=What time is it?也是用来询问时间，意为“几点了”。用it作答。

What’s the time? It’s 7:30.

2.I usually get up at five o’clock.

1)句中usually与often 一样都是频度副词，常用于动词be 之后，行为动词之前。always 意思是“总是”、“永远”，表示动作重复，状态继续，中间没有间断。

We always get up before six o'clock.

He is always thinking of others.

always>usually>often>sometimes>seldom>never

2)介词 at 常用于具体时刻之前，意义为 在…… ，如：at 5：00 在5：00钟。

介词at 除了指时间以外，还可指

(1)人物的所在之处，如：at my uncle’s home 在我姑姑家, at the station 在火车站.

(2)朝向，如：look at me!看我!

(3)指速度或价格.如：she buys the book at a good price 她以优惠的价格买了这本书。

on，at，in这三个常用介词都可以表示时间和地点，但具体用法不同.

①on用在日期、星期几、节日前，也表示在具体某一天及具体某一天的上午、下午和晚上。

on November 1st on Monday on Children’s Day on Tuesday evening

②in用于月份、季节、年份前，当early，late用于句首修饰介词短语时，尽管表示具体某一天的上午、下午、晚上，都要用in，泛指一般的上、下午，晚上也用in 。

Early in the morning of National Day，I got up to catch the first bus to the zoo.

③将来时态表“过一段时间后” 及“在...期间” 和“在某个季节，某年、某月” 都用in。

Xiao Ming was born in December of .

3. What a funny time to eat breakfast!

(1)What a/an +形容词+单数名词+主语+谓语!

what a good girl she is!

(2)What+形容词+可数名词复数+主语+谓语!

What good girls they are!

(3)What +形容词+不可为名词+主语+谓语!

What terrible weather it is!

4、He works at a radio station.

work:人们日常工作和生活中从事的体力和脑力劳动，各类工作。不可数名词

job:指具体的职业或工作。可数名词

5、take a walk

take a walk=have a work=go for a walk 散步

6、either...or...

“要么、、、要么、、、”，连接句子中两个并列的成分，表示两者之一。

当连接两个主语时，谓语动词应该与最近的一个主语在人称和数上保持一致，即就近原则。

7.People love to listen to him.

love to do sth.=like to do sth.very much.喜欢做某事，强调具体活动。

而love doing sth.=like doing sth. very much则强调习惯。

Do you come out to play with me?你喜欢出来和我玩吗?

I like watching TV.我喜欢看电视。

8.hear与listen to

hear 意为“听见”，表示听的结果，而listen to则表示“听”，强调的是“听”的动作。

Let’s listen to the music.

We listen but don’t hear.

9. He gets home at 7：00，and he watches morning news on TV.

1)句中get 意为 “到达 ”，后接地点名词时，要加介词to，后接副词时，不能加to.

She gets to school at six o’clock.

注： home 是一个副词，所以其前不能加介词to，但home也可作名词，这时其前有物主代词时，可以加to，

She gets to her home at eight o’clock .

a piece of news 一条新闻 ，two pieces of news 两条新闻 。

Watch……On TV 表示 通过电视看……节目

We often watch football game on TV.

10、lots of=a lot of 既可以修饰可数名词复数形式，也可以修饰不可数名词。

11.What time is it?-几点了?-It’s eight thirty. 八点三十分。

本句是就具体时刻进行提问的，what time 意为“几点”，这是特殊问句，它的同义句为：

What’s the time? /What time is it by your watch? 在回答这个句子时,要用It’s +钟点。

注：英语时刻的表达法：顺读法和逆读法。

顺读法：钟点数+分钟数。

4：25→four twenty-five，6：58→six fifty-eight，7：→seven o clock

说明：这种表达不论分钟数是多少，均可使用。

逆读法：分钟为+介词to/past+钟点数，可分两种情况：

1)分钟为不超过半小时，用分钟数+past(/pa：st/过)+钟点数。

4：23→twenty-three past four，5：19→nineteen past five.

2)分钟数超过了半小时，用(所差的)分钟的+to+(下一个)钟点为。

7：31→twenty-nine to eight，10：58→two to eleven

在逆读法中分钟数逢 “五”逢 “十”可省略minute(s)。否则应加上。当然，英语习惯上把十五分钟(fifteen)称作一刻a quarter，三十分钟(thirty)称为half/half，因此10：30，可以用两种表达方式，half past ten，ten thirty。

12.Thanks for your letter.

Thanks for your help.

Thanks for telling me the good news.

13. Do you want to know about my morning?

1)该句中 want to do…句型。表示“想要做某事”，该短语中want为及物动词，后面的to do

是不定式

I want to play the drum.

I want to see my old teacher next week.

3)know about 知道有关…，了解有关…，句中about 意为“关于，有关”的意思。

17.Please write and tell me about your morning.请写信告诉我你的早晨。

释：1)tell sb. about sth.告诉某人有关某事的情况。

My father often tells me about China.

2)write sb. a letter=write a letter to sb.给某人写信。

She often writes me a letter=She often writes a letter to me.

三.重点短语

1.what time 几点

2.go to school 去上学

3.get up 起床

4.take a shower 洗淋浴

5.brush tooth 刷牙

6.get to 到达

7.do homework 做家庭作业

8.go to work 去上班

9.go home 回家

10.eat breakfast 吃早餐

11.get dressed 穿上衣服

12.get home 到家

13.either...or... 要么、、、要么

14.go to bed 上床睡觉

15.in the morning/afternoon/evening 在上午/下午/晚上

16.take a walk 散步

17.lots of 许多

18.radio station 广播电视

19.at night 在晚上

20.be late for 迟到

四.语法知识点

1. what time与when

what time翻译为“几点”问的是具体的时间，一般回答要具体到小时。

What time do you go to school?

I go to school at half past seven o’clock.

回答具体到点钟，且注意在几点前边的介词用at。

when也是对时间的提问，但与what time的区别是：用when提问，回答既可以是具体的时间，也可以是不具体的时间，如：in the morning，last year，in 等范围大的时间。

向对方询问具体时间时，即几点几分，只能用what time，不能用when。

询问年份、月份、日期时，只能用when，不能用what time。

2. 英语时间的表达

(1)整点时间可表示为“钟点数+o’clock”或直接读钟点数，省去o’clock。如：

It’s ten o’clock a. m. 现在是上午十点整。

(2)非整点时间可直接采取读数法。如：

It’s eight-thirty. 是八点三十分。

注意时间的表达方式：用数词。点与分钟之间用连字如：

eleven-thirty 十一点三十分

nine-twenty-five 九点二十五分

6:10 →six-ten 8:50→eight-fifty

9:30→nine-thirty 10:15→ten-fifteen

7:45→seven forty-five 11:05→eleven-five

(3)非整点时间的分钟数不超过30分钟，也可用介词“past”。如：

6:10→ten past six

11:05→five past eleven

10:15→ a quarter past ten或fifteen past ten

8:15→a quarter past eight或fifteen past eight

9:30→half past nine或thirty past nine

(4)非整点时间的分钟数超过30分钟，用介词to。如：

11:50→ten to twelve

7:31→twenty-nine to eight

9:45→a quarter to ten或fifteen to ten

12:59→one to thirteen

此句话还有几种表达方式。如：

What is the time? 几点了?

What time is it by your watch? 你的手表几点了?

( )1.--What's the time? --______one-thirty.

A. Its B.It's C.This is D.They're

( )2.I usually _______ at nine-thirty at night.

A. get to school B.get up C.go to bedD.go home

( )3.He likes ______ the radio. wwW.x kB 1.c Om

A.listens B.to listen to C. listens to D.to listen

( )4.I _______ at seven.

A. go to the school B.go to a school C.go to school D.go school

( )5.We only have _______ shower.

A. some B.an C.the D.one

( )6.My sister _______ home at 5:00 every day.

A. gets B.gets toC.get D.get to

( )7.We can watch Beijing Opera _____ TV.

A. in B.at C.on D.from

( )8.Let's ________.

A. take a shower B.have a shower C.take the shower D.A and B

( )9.My brother ____ the morning TV every day.

A. watches B.watch C.watches D.see

( )10.--______ do you usually go to bed?

--At six.

A. What time B.How time C.When D.A and C

( )11. Zhang Min usually gets up _______.

A. at six thirty B.at thirty six C.on six thirty D.on thirty six

( )12.Rick often does ______ homework at 6:00.

A.her B.his C.my D.your

( )13.--______ do people have dinner?

--At home. A.What B.When C.WhereD.B and C

( )14.In our school, school _____ at 7:30.

A.is B.start C.starts D.does

One day , an old man was selling a big elephant . A young man came up to the elephant and began to look at it slowly . The old man went up to him and said in his ear . “Don’t say anything about the elephant before I sell it . Then I will give you some meat .” “All right .”said the young man . After the old man sold the elephant , he gave the young man some met and said : “Now, can you tell me how you see the bad ears of the elephant ?” “I didn’t find the bad ears .”said the young man . “Then why do you look at it slowly ?”asked the old man . The young man said : “I never see an elephant before, and I want to know what it looks like.”

( )1________ the elephant.

A. The young man bought B. The old man sold

C. The two men sold D. The young man sold

( )2. The young man looked at the elephant . He wanted to find _____.

A. its bad ears B. some meat C. a good elephant D. what it looks like

( )3. The young man ________.

A.knew the elephant wasn’t good B. found the bad ears but didn’t tell it .

C. looked after the elephant D. got some meat

( )4.We know that ________.

A. the two men were not honest B. the young man wasn't a bad man

C. the old man was a good man D. the elephant was a very good one

( )5. The young man looked at the elephant slowly because he _______.

A. liked elephant B. wanted to buy it

C. didn’t see any elephant before D. wanted to help the old man

八年级下册英语课件 篇10

《人教版八年级下册英语课件》篇章主题范文

篇章一：My Summer Vacation（我的暑假）

My summer vacation was really enjoyable. First, I visited my grandma's house in the countryside. There, I helped her plant some vegetables and played with my cousins. We rode bikes and went swimming in the nearby lake. It was a lot of fun.

After that, I went to the beach with my family. We rented a cottage and spent a week there. We swam in the ocean and built sandcastles. We also had a bonfire and made s'mores. It was a great time with my family.

Finally, I went to a summer camp with my friends. We did a lot of outdoor activities like hiking, canoeing, and zip-lining. We also had campfires and shared stories. It was a great bonding experience with my friends.

Overall, my summer vacation was a great mix of relaxation and adventure. I can't wait to do it all again next year.

篇章二：The Benefits of Exercise（运动的好处）

Exercise is important for maintaining a healthy body and mind. Firstly, it can prevent a lot of health problems such as heart disease, high blood pressure, and obesity. Regular exercise also helps improve sleep and reduces stress and anxiety. It can even help prevent depression.

Exercise also has many benefits for the brain. It can improve cognitive function, including memory and thinking skills. It increases blood flow to the brain, which is important for maintaining brain health. Exercise also helps release endorphins, which are natural mood boosters.

Finally, exercise is a great way to socialize and make new friends. Joining a sports team or fitness group is a fun way to meet people who share your interests. It's also a great way to stay motivated and accountable.

In conclusion, exercise is essential for overall health and well-being. It has many physical and mental benefits and should be included in everyone's daily routine.

八年级下册英语课件 篇11

新教材（冀教版）八年级英语（下册）

Lesson 25 Let’s Do An Experiment!

LESSON PRERATATION

Words and phrases:

science, experiment, fill, prove, theory, jar, upside, observe, right side up, upside down.

LESSON STRUCTURE

CLASS OPENING:               Greed each other.

KEY STEPS:

STEP 1: Ask the class to discuss the questions in the “Think About It”.                                  STEP 2: Let the students listen to the tape carefully with the following           question:” Why does Danny say they should do this experiment outside?” ; “ What’s Brain’s theory? ”; “ What will Brain do?”; “Does Danny have the same theory as Brain’s?”

STEP3: listen to the tape again. The student’s better read the dialogue at the same time. After reading and listening, let the students fill in the chart by themselves.

What do we need when we do the experiment?

Water,  a jar, A piece of cardboard

How do we do it?(steps)

1.   fill…in…;

2.   cover…with…;

3.   turn…upside down.

What are Brain’s and Jenny’s theories?

1.   The floor gets wet.

2.   The floor won’t get wet.

Reason

discuss

Step 4: after filling it, ask the students to describe the experiment. Then, write it in the exercise-book.

Step 5. read the dialogue and act it out by the students.

Step 6. homework. Be ready to give us a morning report of tomorrow.

Language Notes:

Explain some sentences and phrases.

1.I fill a jar with water.

fill…with…

On hearing the news. Her eyes filled with tears.

2.I turn the jar upside down.

upside down

That picture is upside down.

3.I think the floor will get wet.

The days gets longer in spring.

4.I’m sure that the floor won’t get wet.

Tom ia sure that he will win the game.

5.We can prove who’s right.

My theory will prove (to be) right some day.

6.We’ll do the experiment and observe what will happen.

I observed her dance.

CLASS CLOSING:

Say good-bye to the students.

[1]

最新八年级上册英语课件

下面是小编为您精心挑选的和“八年级上册英语课件”相关的内容。老师提前规划好每节课教学课件是少不了的，每个老师都需要将教案课件设计得更加完善。做好教案课件的前期准备工作，这样才能实现预期的教学目标设计。我们会对该领域重要事件和趋势进行前瞻性分析供您了解未来走向！

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

第1课时 Section A 1a-2c

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1、 掌握句型：—Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.

2、 熟练掌握本课短语：stay at home, went to New York City, went to summer camp, went to the mountains, went to the beach, visited museums, visited my uncle.

二、过程与方法

通过例子Who went to the movies last Saturday?引出动词go的过去式went，从而引出一般过去时态。大面积操练，采用学生提出间题，学生解决问题，借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性。

三、情感、态度与价值观

学会用一般过去时进行信息交流，培养学生的环保意识，热爱大自然。

教学重点

掌握句型：—Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains/ New York City/ beach /summer camp. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes，I did. / No, I didn’t.

教学难点

掌握用过去时谈论假期的活动。

教法导航

通过看图、看视频、听录音、问答、讨论等方法学习谈论能力和表达愿望。

学法导航

通过看、听、说等各种途径，以小组合作的形式，主动探求知识，锻炼自主学习能力。

教学准备

图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the class.

Step 2 Lead in

Ask questions about what students did last Saturday.

（1）Who went to the movies last Saturday? Point to one student who raises his or her hand. Sara went to the movies last Saturday. Repeat．Write this sentence on the board.

Underline the word went．

（2）Ask：Who visited a friend last Saturday？Point to one student who raises his or her hand．Carlos visited a friend last Write this sentence on the board. Underline the word “visited”．

Point to the words went and visited in the sentences on the board．Say：We use these words to talk about things that happened in the past. Write these pairs of words on the board：go–went, visit –visited. Ask: Can you point out the words that talk about the past?

This activity introduces the key vocabulary．

Step 3 Practice

1、 Focus attention on the picture．Ask: What can you see？Say: Each picture shows something a person did in the past．Name each activity and ask students to repeat: went to the mountains, went to New York City, went to summer camp, visited my uncle，stayed at home, went to the beach, visited museums.

2．Point to the numbered list of activities．Say each one again and ask the students to repeat．

3．Now, please match each phrase with one of the pictures．Say：Write the letter of each picture next to the name of the activity．Point to the sample answer.

4．Check the answers.

Step 4 Listening

1．Point to the picture on the screen. Say: look at Picture A，Where did Tina go on vacation? Yes，she went to the mountains．

Ask:What did the person do in each scene? Say: There are three conversations. Play the recording the first time.

2、 The people talk about what they did on vacation．Listen to the recording and write numbers of the names in the right boxes in the picture. Please write only 5 numbers. Point out the sample answer next to the picture showing went to the mountain. Play the recording a second time.

3．Correct the answers．

Step 5 Pair work

Point out the example conversation. Ask two students to read the dialogue to the class. Say the dialogue in the picture with a student，Do a second example to the class. Then say：Now work with a partner, make conversations about the people in the pictures．As they talk，move around the classroom monitoring their work. Offer language or pronunciation support as needed．

Step 6 Listening

1.2a. Ask: Where did the people go on vacation? And then ask the students to listen carefully and fill in the chart. Play the recording twice and then check the answers.

2、 Look at the form carefully, ask: Did the people do the following things? Then ask the

students to listen carefully and check the anwers. Play twice and ask the students to check the answers in pairs and then check the answers together.

Step 7 Role play

Look at the form again carefully and make role-play conversations among Grace, Kevin and Julie. Ask one or two groups to show the conversation first and then get the students to practice in groups.

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

Lesson 49

教学目标

学会口头邀请和应答的常用基本用语。

1. A: Would you like to …

B: Certainly. I’d love to.

2. A: I hope you can …

B. Thanks. I’d love to.

教学用具

录音机，投影仪

教学方法

将对话放入真实的生活情景中演练。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

复习一些相关的单词。

Step 2 Presentation

可组一组对话：

1. A: Next Sunday is my birthday. Can you come to my party?

B: Oh, thanks very much. I’d love to.

A：I hope both Jim and you will come.

B: OK.

2. A: It’s a fine day today, isn’t it?

B: Yes, Why?

A: Would you go out for a walk with me?

B: I’d love to.

A: I hope Jim will go with us, too.

老师可先自问自答，也可先和程度较好的同学先练习，然后组织全班练习。

Step 3 Drill

让学生练习以上对话。

听第一段录音2遍，请同学们复述（最好用英文）对话中的有关内容，了解这段出现了几个人物，说的是什么事情。

教：birthday: the day when you were born

Step 4 Presentation

听第二段录音2遍，请同学们复述第二段电话的发生环境和结果。并说出与第一段有什么不同的地方。（第二段Ann事先忘了告诉Bruce）。

打开书，教师解释：be going to, forget to do

be going to 将要干…

1. I’m going to have a party next Sunday.

2. We are going to Xiangshan Park.

3. Are they going to have a football match tomorrow? Yes, they are.

forget to do 忘记要做的事

1. Don’t forget to tell Jim.

2. I forgot to tell you.

3. Don’t forget to read the text tonight.

4. Don’t forget to watch football match.

5. I forgot to bring my homework.

Step 5 Practice

跟读录音一至两遍。

同学们两两做pairs work, 练习第一段和第二段，直到较熟悉为止。

根据已熟练的知识，请同学们两两设计一段真实的对话，用真实的姓名进行表演，全部或部分用上本课重点词语。（此环节可找些学习较好、接受能力强的学生先演练）

Step 6 Consolidation

做第三部分。教单词：invite: ask sb to come to home film

用习题精选中的题做反馈练习。

Step 7 Exercises in class

1.-Would you like____(go) with us?

-Yes, I____.

2. Would you like ____ sweets?

3.1 remember ____ her at the conference last year.

4. Don’t forget ____ the letters.

Keys: 1. to go, ’d love to. 2.some. 3. meeting. 4. to post.

Choose the right answers.

( )l. The party is going to start ____ half past seven.

A. at B. on C. to D. in

( )2. I hope ____ help me with my English.

A. you to B. him to C. you will D. will you

( )3. Don’t forget ____ the door when you leave. It’s snowy this evening.

A. close B. to close C. closed D. closing

( )4. Thank you for ____ me to your party.

A. invite B. invited C. inviting D. to invite

( )5. ____ great the party is ! ____ beautiful presents!

A. What, What B. How, How C. What, How D. How, What

( )6. There is going to ____ a party at Xiao Ming’s home.

A. have B. be C. has D. is

( )7.-I’m going to Hong Kong. Didn’t you know?

-____. Jim told me bout it.

A. No. I did B. No, I didn’t

C. Yes, I didn’t D. Yes, I did

Answers: 1.A 2.C 3.B 4.C 5.D 6.B 7.D

Step 8 Homework

1. Try to use your own words to make up new dialogues.

2. Make sentences with the following phrases.

Part 1

1) come to 2) would love/like to… 3)forget to do/doing 4) hope (a sentence) 5)be sure (a sentence).

Part 2

6)What a! 7)be going to do/be

Part 3

8)thank for sth / doing sth 9)be free 10) here be …for sb

Blackboard handwriting

Can you …. birthdayI’d love to… inviteI hope you… filmWould you like to …?Don’t forget to …

Lesson 50，52第一、二部分（一或两课时）

教学目标

学会打电话常用的基本用语，你要找的人在和不在两种情况的电话用语。不在的情况下，要会填写电话留言条。

别人邀请你去他家，你有事不能去，如何客气、婉转的拒绝。

会正确应用：May I speak to..., please?

Hold on, please.

…speaking.

Can I take a message?等等。

教学用具

录音机，投影仪，实物电话

教学方法

将对话放入真实的生活情景中演练

教学建议

建议Lesson 50和Lesson 52一起课讲。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

让同学们复习以前接触的电话常用语。可组一组对话，如：

A: Hello, this is Kate. Who is it?

B: This is Hanmei. Kate, would you like to come to my home and do homework with me? I want you to help me with my English.

A: Ok. I’d love to, when?

B: What about 3 o’clock?

A: All right, see you then.

B: See you.

注：类似的一组对话可以复习到：This is…, Who is it? Would you like to…等以前的知识。

复习反意问句。让学生们先观察以下句子。它们有些什么共同点。

It starts at 4:30, doesn’t it?

It rains every day here, doesn’t it?

He works very hard, doesn’t he?

She gets up early every day, doesn’t she?

练习

Ann studies very hard, ________ she?

Miss Gao loves us, ________ she?

Li Lei is a good student, __________ she?

It’s a fine day, ________ it?

They all like English very much, _______ they?

Step 2 Presentation

Teacher: Do you like giving phone calls to your classmates or friends? If yes, what would you say first?

1) Hello.

2) May I speak to××?

3) This is ××speaking!

4) Who is it? And so on.

You ask the students to understand what to say, and what the purpose of the phone call is.

听第一段录音2遍，请同学们复述（最好用英文）电话中的有关内容，了解这段话发生的环境和结果。

听第二段录音2遍，请同学们复述第二段电话的发生环境和结果。并说出与第一段有什么不同的地方。（第二段要找的人没在）。

打开书，教师解释：take a message和give the message

Step 3 Practice

跟读录音一至两遍。

同学们两两做pairs work, 练习第一段和第二段，直到较熟悉为止。

Step 4 presentation

教单词：telephone: phone double: two times

老师事先和一位同学准备好Lesson 52 对话，双方拿电话机在班上展示。让这位同学在投影片填好电话留言卡，其他同学在老师事先印好的电话留言卡上填写， 然后老师在投影仪上订正。提醒学生填写电话留言卡要简单扼要，它的读者只有一个人。如果大都知道Zhang Yujing 是谁，用一句祈使句即可。如：本课的电话卡message内容：

She called you. Please call her.

打开书，跟读录音，pair work，直到较熟悉为止。

Step 5 Practice:

1．根据已熟练的知识，请同学们两两设计一段真实的对话，用真实的姓名和实物电话进行表演，全部或部分用上本课重点词语。（此环节可找些学习较好、接受能力强的学生先演练）

2．教师随机叫同学们进行对话练习，学生可自主选择本人接听或非本人接听两种情况进行对话。

Step 6 Consolidation

Rewrite the sentences without changing their meanings.

1. I’m afraid I may be a little late.

I’m afraid ______ I ______ ______a little late.

2. She isn’t here right now.

She is ______ ______ ______ ______.

3. Can I take her a message?

Can I take a message ______ ______?

4. I’m very sorry, but I can’t come.

I’m ______ I can’t come.

5. I’ll get her the message.

I’ll ______ the message ______ ______.

Answers: 1. maybe, will be 2. away at the moment 3. for her 4. afraid 5. give, to her

Complete the dialogue

A. She is out at the moment.B. What's your phone number?C. You are welcome.D. Hold on for a moment, please.E. Yes.

A: Hello, could I speak to Mary, please?

B: 1 I'm sorry 2 .Can I take a message?

A: 3 , Please ask her to call me, please.

B: OK, 4 .

A: 62578181. Thank you.

B. 5

Keys: 1.D 2.A 3.E 4.B 5.C

Step 7 Homework

将课上两两做的pairs work整理成系统完整的邀请对话，内容不限，可以是邀请聚会，去你家做客，一起去买东西等。此作业可以让学生2人或3人一组共同做一份。

Blackboard handwriting

May I speak to …please? Hold on, please. ... speaking. I’d love to. Can I take a message? Could I speak to …please? I’m afraid he / she isn’t here. Thank you for doing… I’ll give her / him the message. I’m sorry, but I cannot…

Lesson 51，52第三部分（一或两课时）

教学目标

了解英语国家的风俗。孩子之间的一种非正式的邀请。如：邀请到家里做客或聚会等。一般采用口头或打电话的形式，以及聚会上的一些礼仪，礼貌用语等。

会正确应用这些话语：We’re ready! That’s the bell. Where is everyone? Here is your present. Oh, thank you. There is no time to think. Thank you, everyone. Here is your birthday present. I hope you like it. 等。

教学用具

录音机，投影仪

教学建议

以学生阅读、讨论和听录音为主。

教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

1．复习一些电话用语和邀请用语。

2．分小组讨论Pre-read的两个问题，以讨论第一个问题为主。然后让小组代表谈谈中国人过生日的习俗。可从两方面谈：主要活动和主要传统食品。

Step 2 Presentation

老师事先根据课文拟好一些问题，发给学生。以下问题可作参考。

1. Is there sandwiches at the party?

A. Yes. B. No.

2. Did Li Lei come to Ann’s party?

A. Yes. B. No.

3. Did Li Lie give Ann present?

A. Yes. B. No.

4. Did the twins come to the party?

A. Yes. B. No.

5. Did they give Ann any present?

A. Yes. B. No.

6. Did Jim come here?

A. Yes. B. No.

7. Did Jim give Ann present?

A. Yes. B. No.

8. Do you know how old Ann is?

A. Yes. B. No.

Step 3 Practice

1．然后放录音，放两遍，让学生做以上练习。

教单词：ready sandwich candle

让学生自己读 doorbell present smile

2．可再放一遍录音，回答以下问题。

1）What time did Ann’s party begin?

2）How many friends came to Ann’s party?

3）What present did the friends give Ann?

4）Did Ann like them?

3．让学生复述课文。可给一些提示词。

half past four sandwich be ready candles feel happy birthday present

4．最后再听一遍课文，如有可能，当堂背诵。

可简单讲解一下词语。

5．学习Lesson 52的第三部分，方法同上。

Step 4 Consolidation

Fill in the blanks with the proper from in the given words.

1. Everything ______ (be) ready for Ann’s birthday party now.

2. ______ Ann ______ (feel) happy last Sunday?

3. When I ______ (run) to the door. I ______ (find) him outside.

4. I must go now. There’s no time ______ (think).

5. Thank you for ______ (invite) me to your party.

6. Listen! The doorbell ______ (ring).

Answers: 1.is 2.Did, feel 3.ran, found 4.to think 5.inviting 6.is ringing

Choose the right answers:

( ) 1. We are going to ____ Ann’s 14th birthday next Sunday.

A. have B .celebrate C .enjoy D .give

( )2. Ann hopes ____ to her birthday party this Sunday.

A. us come B.US to come C. our coming D. we will come

( )3. ____ beautiful present! I like it very much.

A. How B. What a C. What D. How a

( )4. We gave her the presents and said ‘Happy birthday’____ her!

A. to B. with C. at D. for

( )5. I saw ____ but a pencil in the pencil - box.

A. everything B. something C. anything D. nothing

( )6. The teacher can’t find Kate. She ____ be at school.

A. mustn’t B. can’t C. may not D. needn’t

( )7. What are they doing? They are ____ their cat.

A. looking B. looking for C. finding D. finding out

Answers: 1.B 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.D 6.B 7.B

Step 5 Homework

1. Retell the text in the past tense.

2. Make up a story based on Ann’s birthday.

3. Make a birthday card.

4. Make a dialogue (On the phone)

Blackboard handwriting

be ready feel happy That’s the doorbell. Happy Birthday Here is / are your present(s). sb’s fourteenth birthday …nothing but … turn … over I don’t know what present it is.

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

一、知识与技能

1、 掌握重点句型：How was your vacation？Where did you go? Did you go out with anyone？

2、 理解并掌握几个不定代词：anyone, everyone, something, anything, everything, nothing的用法。

3、 熟练运用句型：Did you …？

二、过程与方法

学生通过上一节课的学习，对where引导的过去时态的特殊疑问句已经掌握，能自然地与本课知识相衔接。让学生回忆他们的假期情况，引出一般过去时态的句型，并且进行大量练习。采用学生提出问题，学生解决问题，借助多媒体来提高学生的主动性。

三、情感→←、态度与价值观

教育学生渗透合作精神和社会公德意识。

教学重点

掌握句型：Where did you go on vacation? Did you go out with anyone? Did you buy anything? Did you visit anyone?

教学难点

能用句型Did you …？提出尽可能多的有关过去假期的问题。

教法导航

创设情境，让学生自己总结规律，思考，讨论，最后得出结论。创设英语语言氛围，使学生能较快地融入到英语语言学习的情景中来。

学法导航

自主学习，独立思考，小组讨论，同桌合作，完成学习任务。

教学准备

视频，图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the class as usual.

Step 2 Revision

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 1 and make conversations, using the sentence pattern: —Where did you go on vacation? —I went to the mountains. —Did you go with anyone? —Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t.

Step 3 Role play

The teacher acts as Rick and ask a student to act as Helen and practice the dialogue of 2d on Page 2. Then ask the students to practice in pairs and finally ask two or three pairs to act it out.

Step 4 Grammar Focus

Review the grammar box. Ask students to say the questions and answers.

Review the difference between regular –ed past tense verbs (stay –stayed, visit-visited) and irregular past tense verbs (go –went, buy-bought)。 Then get the students to ask and answer the questions and answers in pairs.

Step 5 Game

Ask one student to act as the teacher and ask some individual students questions. Get as many students as possible to be the teacher.

Then ask the students to pay attention to the words: no one, anyone, everyone, something, nothing, anything.

Step 6 Practice

3a Fill in the blanks with the words in the box and practice the conversation.

3b Fill in the blanks in the e-mail mestudentsage with the words in the box.

After checking the answers, get the students to read them aloud.

Step 7 Group work

Make a survey. Ask the students to make a survey by asking the questions about their last vacation: Did you eat anything at a reastaurant? Did you read anything interesting? …。Make sure the students practice the dialogues again and again and write down the results in the form. Then ask some students to report their results.

Step 8 Homework

Ask your classmates as many questions about their last vacation as possible.

课堂作业

Fill in the blanks.

1、 Where ___ you ___ (go) on vacation?

2、 I ___ (go) to New York City.

3、 —___ you ___ (go) out with ______? —No. No one was here. Everyone was on vacation.

4、 —Did you buy _______ special? —Yes, I _______ (buy) something for my father.

5、 —___ was the food? –Everything tasted really good!

参考答案：1. did, go 2. went 3. Did, go, anyone 4. anything, bought 5. How

教学反思

为了避免语法学习的枯燥，本课设计了几个小组活动和小游戏，让学生在不知不觉中就掌握了知识，学习效果较好。

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

短语归纳

stay at home待在家里

take the bus乘公共汽车

tomorrow night明天晚上

have a class party进行班级聚会

half the class一半的同学

make some food做些食物

order food订购食物

have a class meeting开班会

at the party在聚会上

potatochips炸土豆片，炸薯条

in the end最后

make mistakes犯错误

go to the party去参加聚会

have a great/good 玩得开心

give sb.some advice给某人提一些建议

go to college上大学

make(a lot of)money赚(许多)钱

travel aroundthe world环游世界

work hard努力工作

a soccer player一名足球运动员

keep…to oneself保守秘密

talk with sb.与某人交谈

in life 在生活中

be angry at/about sth.因某事生气

be angry with sb.生某人的气

in the future在将来

run away逃避;逃跑

the first step第一步

in half分成两半

solve a problem解决问题

school clean-up学校大扫除

ask sb.to do sth.要求某人做某事

give sb.sth.给某人某物

tell sb.to do sth.告诉某人做某事

too…to do sth.太……而不能做某事

be afraid to do sth.害怕做某事

advise sb.to do sth.劝告某人做某事

It’s best (not) to do sth.最好(不)做某事

need to do sth.需要做某事

语法讲解

由 if 引导的条件状语从句 (主将从现)

if 用做连词时，可以表示“如果;假如”，用来引导一个条件状语从句。如：

I will go if he asks me.

If you eat bad food, you may be ill.

注意：在主句和条件状语从句中的动词都表示将来的动作时，主句中常用一般将来时，含有情态动词的句子或祈使句，也可以是谓语含有want, hope,wish等动词的句子，但从句中常用一般现在时代替将来时。如：

We will come to see you if we have time.

You won’t be able to pass the exam if you don’t work hard.

I hope to visit her if I am free.

1、I

分析：

be going to do sth.将要、打算做某事。如：

I am going to do some shopping with my mother.

辨析：be going to and will.

be going to and will 两者都可以表示将来，其区别如下：

be going to 常用于事先经过的打算、计划或意图，也可用于根据某种迹象将要发生的动作。如：

Why are you taking down all the pictures?

I am going to repaint the wall.

L ook at the dark clouds in the sky.I t ’ s going to rain.

will 常用于不受人的主观意愿影响的单纯将来，也可用于条件状语从句中，还可以表趋向或习惯的动作。如：

Tomorrow will be Teacher ’ s Day.

I f it doesn ’ t rain tomorrow, we will go to the zoo.

W e will die without air or water.

2、Half

分析：

① half, adj and n.一半(的)。 h alf 常用于名词或修饰名词的冠词前面，即half a/an/the/one ’ s +n.还可以用于a half +n.这中结构。如：

P lease cut the cake into halves.

T he little boy drank half a bottle of water.== the little boy drank a halfbottle of water.

H alf of the children are from Chinese .

注意：half 短语作主语时，谓语动词与half后的名词保持一致

短语归纳

on Saturdayafternoon在周六下午

prepare for为……做准备

go to the doctor去看医生

have the flu患感冒

help my parents帮助我的父母

come to the party来参加聚会

another time其他时间

last fall去年秋天

go to the party去聚会

hang out常去某处;泡在某处

the day after tomorrow后天

the day before yesterday前天

have a pianolesson上钢琴课

look after照看;照顾

accept an invitaton接受邀请

turn down aninvitation拒绝邀请

take a trip去旅行

at the end of this month这个月末

look forward to盼望;期待

the opening of… ……的开幕式/落成典礼

reply in writing书面回复

go to the concert去听音乐会

not…until直到……才

meet my friend会见我的朋友

visit grandparents拜访祖父母

study for a test为考试学习

have to不得不

too much homework太多作业

do homework做家庭作业

go to the movies去看电影

after school放学后

on the weekend在周末

invite sb.to do sth.邀请某人做某事

what引导的感叹句结构：What+a/an+adj.+可数名词单数(+主语+谓语)!

What+adj.+名词复数/不可数名词(+主语+谓语)!

help sb.(to)do sth.帮助某人做某事

be sad to do sth.做某事很悲伤

see sb.do sth.see sb.doingsth.

the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方式

have a surprise party for sb.为某人举办一个惊喜派对

look forward to doing sth.期盼做某事

reply to sth./sb.答复某事/某人

What’s today?今天是什么日子?

What’s the date today? What day is it today?

语法讲解

1、prepare意为“准备”，强调准备的动作与过程。

prepare 强调准备的动作与过程。宾语是这一动作的承受者。其后也可接双宾语，还可接不定式。

get/be ready意为“准备好”，强调准备的结果。常见结构有：①beready(for sth.)②getsth.ready ③beready(for sth)④be get ready to do(准备干某事，乐于干某事)

We _____ the mid-term examination.Miss Li said, “Everyone should______beforeclass.

2.have

3.hang

4.catch

catch up with =keep up with 赶上，跟上 ,catch hold of=take hold of 抓住

5.accept

(1) turn down = refuse 拒绝 turn up 放大调高 turn over 翻身 take turns 依次，轮流

(2) help sb.(to) do sth 帮助某人做某事 helpsb.with sth 在某方面帮助人 help oneself tosth 随便吃

(3)at the end of 在…末尾，在…尽头， bythe end of 到…末为止 in the end of 终于

6.surprised

surprising 形容词，令人惊讶的，主语是物 Thenews was surpring.surprise 名词，惊奇、惊讶 to one’ssurprise使某人吃惊，动词，使惊奇，使感到意外 It surprise sb to do sth.

7.look

hear from sb.收到某人的来信 = receive a letter from sb.

hear of = hear about 听说

8.make

商量确定的时间，表示将来某项计划的安排，后接时间状语。 Let’s make it at seven o’clock on Tuesday.

成功办成某事 = succeed After yearsof hard work, he finally made it.

9.reply

作及物动词，意为回答，回答说。作名词，意为：答道，回信，答复，后跟介词 to .

answer 是最普通的用语，包括口头，书面或行动的回答，可作及物和不及物动词。

短语归纳

milk shake奶昔

turn on接通(电流、煤气、水等);打开

pour…into…把……倒入……

a cup of yogurt一杯酸奶

a good idea好主意

on Saturday在星期六

cut up切碎

put…into…把……放入……

one more thing还有一件事

a piece of一片/张/段/首……

at this time在这时

a few一些;几个

fill… with…用……把……装满

cover…with…用……覆盖……

one by one一个接一个;逐个;依次

a long time很长时间

how many+可数名词复数 多少……

how much+不可数名词 多少……

It’s time (for sb.)+to do sth.到(某人)做某事的时间了

First…Next…Then…Finally 首先……接下来……然后…….最后……

want + to do sth.想要做某事

forget+to do sth.忘记去做某事

how + to do sth.如何做某事

need+to do sth.需要做某事

make+宾语+形容词 使……怎样

let sb.+do sth.让某人做某事

短语归纳

1.on

6.in

8.play

10space station太空站 puter programmer电脑编程员

12.look

14thesame…as…与……一样 15.getbored感到厌烦的

16.over

18.will+动词原形

19.fewer/more+可数名词复数

20.less/more+不可数名词

21.have

22.agree

23.such+名词(词组)

24.play

25.There

26.There

27.make

28.try

29.It’s+

短语归纳

1.grow

3.be

5.send…to…把……送到……

7.the

9.different

11.have

12.ta

13.too…to…太……而不能……

14.be

15.practice

16.keep

17.learn

18.finishdoing

mise

20.help

21.remember

22.agree

24.want

八年级上册英语课件 篇5

I. Key points

1. Words and expressions:flight,make oneself at home,address,ketchup,majority,in total,mother tongue,situation,equal,global,knowledge,communicate,on the radio,directly trade,come about,

Independent,stay the same,end up with,more or less,bring in,a great many,except for,closet,

Toilet,tourism,culture,pizza.

2. Patterns:(1)An equal number of people learn English as a second language.

(2)People from the two countries don’t have any difficulty in understanding each other.

(3)Mother told me not to leave the door open after midnight.

(4)Most of the native speakers of English are found in……

3. Grammar:Direct speech and indirect speech;requests and orders or commands.

4. Goals:(1)Learn about differences between American English and British English.

(2)Learn about communication skills.

(3)Write a passage comparing Amecican English and British English.

II. Teaching plans:seven periods

1. Period one:Warming up,listening,speaking,G1-YY-030926-1

Step1(close books)ask the students to listen to the dialogue and answer two questions.

①What is the relationship between the two.

②What are they talk about.

Step2 read the dialogue and answer another two questions.

①What is it that Joe can’t find in the bathroom?

②Why can’t he find it?

This is the best to deal with some language points.

1. For the first time第一次,初次(介词短语作状语,后不接从句)

The first time(第一次…时,后可接从句)

This∕It is the first time(后接that引导的定语从句,用现在完成时)

eg.They were there for the first time.他们是第一次到那儿。

I remembered John the first time I saw him.我第一次见到约翰时就记住了他。

This isIt is my first time that I have been abroad.这是我第一次出国。

2. We flew all the way direct from Seattle to London.句中all the way一路上;从远道;一直

eg.He came all the way from Australia.他从澳大利亚远道而来。

3. Make yourself at home 别拘束(像在自己家里一样)

befeel at home感到安适,自在;精通。

eg.Make yourself at home and help yourself to these. 别拘束,随便吃。

He is completely at home in chemistry.他精通化学。

Step3:Listen to the tape and ask the student to write down requests and demands.Then tell “requests” from “demands”.

Step4:ask the students to read the following dialogues in pairs or act them out if necessary and it is

good time to ask the students to report requests and demands.

Step5:exercises for period 1

翻译下列句子

1. 我总共有册书(total)

2. 英语发展成为世界上用得最广泛的语言

3. 汤姆和另外三个孩子一起去看电影去了(as well as)

4. 这个人长相很好,只是满头白发(except for)

Period two:Pre-reading,Reading,Post-reading,G1-YY-030927-2

Step1:One question to draw the students’ attention:In what situation do you use English?

Step2:Listen to the tape once and then read the text.Answer somes about the text.

Step3:Read the text again and give the main idea of each paragraph.

Step4:Retell the text briefly (write some key words on the blackboard)

Exercises for period 2. (单项选择)

1. The child imagined______a plane to the moon and______there for a week.

A.to take,to live B.to take,living C.taking.living D.taking,to live

2. Wilson explained______the teacher why he was late______that week.

A.to ,every day B.X,every day C.to,everyday D.X,everyday

3. The Blacks were______a flight______the Pacific Ocean then.

A.in,on B.for,across C.to,over D.on,across

4. The plane crashed and the______on a______island in the Pacific Ocean.

A.landed,deserting B.were landed,deserting

C.landed,deserted B.were landed,deserted

5. Paul likes to make______those who______other.

A.friends to,care about B.friends with,care about

C.friend with,care about D.friends with,care

6. The people______all felt very safe.

A.on plane B.on board the plane

C.on the plane board D.on board on plane

7. Not only the the student but also Tom______about the answer.

A.is sure B.are sure C.sure D.sures

8. -I’ve got your invitation. -Oh,good______. (春高考)

A.Can you come? B.Thanks a lot C.I’ll take it D.May I help you?

Period3:Some language points in reading,word study,grammar:G1-YY-030928-3

Step1:Check homework or ask students to retell the text if necessary.

Step2:Deal with some language points.

1. In only fifty years,English has developed into the language most widely spoken and used in the world.

①develop vtvi 发展,壮大,完善,生长

eg. Plants develop from seeds. 植物由种子发育而成。

Some children develop more slowly than others. 有些儿童比其他儿童发育得慢。

②冲洗

八年级上册英语课件 篇6

Mdule8

Unit2The Lndn Ee is n ur right.

一、教材分析：

本模块以出行旅游为话题，通过大量的语言材料集中展示了纹路、支路、对某一区域进行描述的语言表达方式，同时对伦敦的一些著名景点和标志性建筑物也做了简单介绍。

二、教学目标：

（一）语言知识目标：

1.正确使用下列单词和短语：

tur, painting, clear, bat, ff, twer, get ff, turn left, turn right, g alng, n the right, n the left.

2.能够熟练运用下列句型：

Tae ff the bat bac…

Get ff the bat at…

（二）语言技能目标：

1.能够读懂对地图的描述，读懂对某一个地方的描述。

2.能够根据地图讲清路线，描述某个地点的位置。

（三）学习策略：

1.能够将语言学习与实际应用结合起来。

2.问路与指路应该有礼貌。

（四）情感目标：

乐于参加运用英语的.实践活动，乐于了解其他国家的文化。

三、教学过程：

Step1 Waring up

As the students se questins:

Where have u been?

Have u ever been t Lndn?

Which place d u nw abut Lndn?

Which place is the Lndn Ee?

Step2 Reading and vcabular

1. Read the tur f Lndn and fllw it n the ap.

Have the students l at the ap and failiarize theselves with the places. Explain that the shuld draw the rute given in the passage n their ap.

The can then chec with a partner.

2. Have the students read the passage b theselves. Then as the t find ut the fllwing phases.

在某人的右边

向左转

干某事最好的方式

一个藏有许多名画的博物馆

9）下船 10)走过教堂

它能把你带到离泰晤士河面135米的高空。

在塔桥下船。

向左拐进国王街，走过教堂，就又回到了你出发的地方——广场。

3. Explain se iprtant pints.

辨析：abve , ver与n

（1）abve的意思是“在…之上”，可指“在…斜上方”，既不接触，又不一定垂直，只是位置“高于…”。新课标第一网

The plane is fling abve the cluds.

The teperature will sta abve zer in the datie.

（2）ver的意思是“在…之上”，常常可以和abve替换，它着重指垂直在上，且不接触。还可以表示“盖在…上面，铺在…上面”，用作此意时，不能和abve替换。

The light is ver/abve the table.

There is a picture ver the blacbard.

Spread the tableclth ver the table, please.

（3）n的意思也是“在…之上”，但它含有和表面相接触的意思。

The b is n the des.

Step3 Listening

Mar the places n the ap.

Pla the tape thrugh nce fr the students t listen and fcus s the can understand the eaning f the places. Pla it again fr the t chec the eaning. Then as the t write naes f the places next t the buildings n the ap. The places are:

1 Natinal Galler 2 Lndn Ee 3 Twer f Lndn

4 Huses f parliaent 5 Bucingha Palace

Chec the answers with the whle class, as ne student t sa the answers.

Step4 Sa which places u can see in the phts.

As the students t decide this individuall, and then chec with a partner. Then call bac the answers fr the whle class.

Step5 Match the wrds with the pictures.

As the students t l at the pictures and cplete the activit individuall, and then chec with a partner.

Step6 Writing

Write directins t places in Lndn. Chse a place t start n the ap, and then chse a place t finish.

As the students t d this individuall, and eep their destinatin a secret fr everne.

四、课堂检测：

（一）根据汉语或首字母提示完成单词：

1. Welce t this shrt (旅行) f Lndn.

2. It’s the Natinal G , a useu with lts f faus paintings.

3. Turn left and g t the Huses f (国会).

4. When u are tired, the best wa t see Lndn is b (船).

5. u can see st f Lndn n a c da.

6. Can u swi (横过) the river?

7. I ften wal (经过) the bshp n  wa t schl.

8. The Ban f China is (在…对面) the restaurant.

9. The dctr has ust (到达) at the hspital.

10. There’s a par (在之间) the tw superarets.

11. What a nice place! The hills are green and the water is (清澈的).

12. There’re a lt f faus (油画) in this useu.

(二)单项选择：

1. If the traffic light is red, u crss the rad. It’s dangerus.

A. dn’t B. needn’t C. ustn’t D. wuldn’t

2. Dn’t pla ftball the iddle f the street.

A. in B. n C. at D. b

3. Turn left ing’s Street and g past the church.

A. in B. / C. int D. n

4. Mr Lin gave the textbs t all the students the nes wh had alread taen the.

A. except B. including C. ang D. with

5. ---What a surprise it is that u’ve hied n Munt Tai!

---I didn’t believe I culd d it I gt t the tp.

A. unless B. after C. until D. as

6. We ften have a wal the river after supper.

A. alng B. acrss C. n D. in

7. The best wa t visit Lndn .

A. b bat B. is b bat C. tae a bat D. t tae a bat

8. There’s a bridge the river.

A. n B. in C. ver D. under

9. He was brn the evening f August 28th, 1978.

A. n B. in C. at D. int

10. Everne t g shpping.

A. ens B. lies C. en D. lie

（三）根据汉语提示完成句子：

.

2. (左拐进人) ing’s Street.

.

.

八年级上册英语课件 篇7

Lesson 53

Teaching Objectives

复习动词的一般过去时，能够表达自己过去一天的活动。

Language Focus

What Who Which When Where How

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Revise the Simple Past Tense. Ask a student to perform an action and ask What did he do. Let the students to guess He made a cake. Repeat with other actions.

Ask what they did last Sunday.

Step 2 Ask and answer

Get the students to look at the pictures. Ask them to practise the pictures in the past tense

Ask several pairs to share their stories with the class.

Then ask the students to talk about what you did yesterday.

Get them to know the different expressing ways between the Present tense and the Past tense.

Then get them to practise in the same way. See if they can matter both of the two Tenses.

Step 3 Practise

Show the pictures to the students and ask them to retell the story using the 1st personal pronoun “I”.

You can get a better student to talk about the pictures.

And then choose one of them to ask questions with “wh”.

Step 4 Exercises in class

Rewrite the sentences as required:

1. She often watches TV on Sunday. ( last night)

2. Do you always go to school on foot? (yesterday)

3. Where are you? (two hours ago)

4. What time were he get up yesterday morning? ( tomorrow morning)

5. Why were they talking just now? (now)

Answers:

1. She watched TV last night.

2. Did you go to school on foot yesterday?

3. Where were you two hours ago?

4. What time will he get up tomorrow morning?

5. Why are they talking now?

Step 5 Homework.

1.Write down what you did yesterday.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 53What time did Bob get up? How did he go to school yesterday? When did he have lunch? How long did he do his homework?

Lesson 54

教学目标

1．使同学掌握本课表示频率的重点单词：Never, sometimes, usually, often, always, how often,和部分特殊疑问句。

使同学能够运用本课所学的内容介绍其他学生在校学习情况。

教具：Picture and recorder

教学过程

Step 1 Revision

1. Revise the dialogue.

教师出示上节课的图片，组织学生就“我的一天”进行对话练习，注意时态要一致，对话如下：

A: What time did you get up yesterday?

B: I got up at six.

A: When did you go to school?

B: I went to school at ten past eight.

A: How did you go to school?

B: I went to school by bus.

A: What time did you get to school?

B: …

2. 复习一般过去时态和一般现在时.

教师让学生写出下列动词的过去式和第三人称单数形式.

Eat, get, go, swim, fly, slept, run, begin, catch, have.

Step 2 Presentation

1. 教师引入

This term will be over, we want to know something about you. Now, look at the survey, work in pairs and ask the following question.

教师指导学生先填写调查表。

教师帮助学生解决调查表中的生单词和词组。

教师指导学生根据调查表两人进行问答练习，要求学生尽量使用完整句子来回答。

教师挑选对话情况较好的组进行表演。

组织学生统计一份本班个人情况调查结果报告表。

Like watching TV Twenty nine students

Like eating fruit Ten students

Get to school late Only three students sometimes

Away from school Never

Often be ill None

如下：

Step 3 Writing

教师组织学生写一份详细的关于你的同伴的个人情况报告。

例如：

Tom was never away from school last year. He sometimes was ill. He always got to school early. He wet to bed before 9:30.

He watched TV quite often. Every day he did sport less than five hours. He ate a lot of fruit and vegetables.

Step 4 Summary

学生自己总结特殊疑问句的句子结构.

Step 5 Exercises in class

汉译英

1. 他们经常访问英国。

2. 我们有时外出就餐。

3. 她晚上总是在家。

4. 我从来不能在家做事。

5. 我有时整个周末都在睡觉。

Keys

1. They often visit Britain.

2. We sometimes eat out.

3. She is always at home in the evening.

4. I can never work at home.

5. Sometimes I sleep all weekend./I sleep all weekend sometimes.

Fill in the blanks.

1. ____ ____ hours of sport do you do every week?

Three to six hours.

2. ____ ____ was he not at school last year?

Over two weeks.

3. ____ ____ were you ill last week?

About three days.

4. ____ ____ is your home from the school?

Only about a few kilometres.

5. ____ ____ did you watch TV?

Quite often.

6. ____ ____ bread is there on the plate?

Only a little.

Answers: 1.How many 2.How long 3.How long 4.How far 5.How often 6.How much

Step 6 Homework

Copy the new words and phrase.

（2） Do the exercise 1 in page 150 of your text book .

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 54How long…？ Less/ More than a week. How often…? Never/ Always / Sometimes. How many…? Six hours or more.

Lesson 55

Teaching Objectives

复习食品名称词汇，掌握购物用语；

掌握用餐的表达用语。

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Ask the students: If you need some more food, where can you buy them?

If you need some more clothes.

Where to buy, in the shop?

Student 1 is to be a buyer.

We call him “customer”.

Student 2 is to be a seller.

We call him “shop assistant”.

Suppose you were a customer you want something to buy. Helping the customer in making a decision

Step 2 Presentation

Get the students to know the word ‘buy’, past form ‘bought’. You can't have it in the following sentence.

“I have bought it for half a day.”

You Should say “I have had it for half a day.”

Explain the word “more” not a comparative degree, but sth you get again.

It means there is still one.

The word “have” in the text means “eat”.

Step 3 Practise

Revise the names of different kinds of food by pictures or real objects. Remind the students of the difference between uncountable and countable nouns.

Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask When are Ann and her mother going to buy more food?

Play the tape again while the students listen and repeat.

ave the students practise the dialogue in pairs, substituting the words in the boxes.

Ask several pairs to say the dialogue for the class.

Step 4 Practise

Say now Ann and her mother are shopping. Let’s see what they bought.

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.

Have the students to read the dialogue in pairs and substitute the words in the box.

Call out some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class.

Step 5 Practise

Remember Ann’s birthday party. Here is a party. There are a lot of delicious food. What would you like?

Get the students to practise the dialogue in pairs. And substitute the food in the box to make new dialogues as they like.

Then suppose It’s Ann’s birthday party. Get the students to act the dialogue, as in a real-life party situation.

Step 6 Exercises in class

Rewrite the drills without changing their meanings.

1. How delicious the food is!

____ ____ ____ it is!

2. We need two more grapes.

We need ____ ____ grapes.

3. What’s the price of the coat?

____ ____ ____ the coat?

4. We all enjoyed ourselves at the get - together.

We all ____ ____ ____ ____ at the get - together.

5. Don’t forget to bring some food.

____ to bring some food.

Answers: 1. What delicious food 2. another two 3. How much is 4. had lots of fun/had a great time 5. Remember

Step 7 Homework

1. Finish off the workbook exercises.

2. Make the dialogue from Ex 3.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 55need to buy… Ten people are coming for dinner. need some more Help yourself to…have to What delicious food!

Lesson 56

Teaching Objectives

复习48个音素；

掌握电话留言和书信的写法；

掌握表达天气状况的词汇和谈论天气的表达用语；

Language Points

everything anything nothing something work hard on … bring, take, carry, fetch

Teaching Aids

Letters, tape, flashcards.

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Get the students to go over 26 English letters and 48 phonemes by flashcards.

Play the tape fort the students to listen and repeat.

Ask them to read spelling and pronunciation.

And then tell them how to pronounce the words

Step 2 Listening

Play the tape for the students to listen and ask When should someone begin their message?

Play the tape more times. Make sure the students understand the passage.

Finish the Wb Lesson 56, Ex.2. Then check the answer.

Step 3 Presentation

Get some letters to show the students. Help them practise writing letters.

Dear… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… Yours,……

Let students talk about their summer vacations

From: Susie. To: Jim

Step 4 Reading

Tell the students It will be the winter holiday soon. Get them to talk about what they are going to do during the holiday.

Explain the word during.

Ask the students to read the letter carefully. Then ask the questions:

What holiday will soon begin?

When is winter holiday this year?

What year will it be?

When will Xiaomei have her exams?

What will the students do during the get-together?

Play the tape for the students to listen and find out the answer.

Explain the meaning of Christmas, exam and play.

Tell the differences between ‘every’ and ‘each’.

二者都有“每一个”的意思，都和单数动词连用。each所指的“每一个”，“个别”意义较重；every所指的“每一个”着重在“全体”而不在“个别”。另外，each可以用作代词，直接作主语或宾语；every则是形容词，只有与名词连用或构成复合词时，才能用作主语或宾语。

Play the tape again for the students to listen and repeat. Get them to practise the letter.

Step 5 Practise

Student E's birthday is coming .You sent a birthday card to student E several days ago. You want to write a letter to ask him whether he has got it or not.

Step 6 Writing

Suppose you' ll write a letter to your best friend in Shanghai. Say sth. about your last Weekend. Tell your friend what you did at weekend (Went Camping).

You are sure they write letters easily. Get them to talk about the weather, you can have them based on the weather of that day, vacation, if the condition is OK. You play the video for the students to watch on. Thus, they can watch the real scenes on it. And for them it s easier to say.

Step 7 Practice

教师课前先准备好一段国际电台的世界天气预报，或是从China Dairy上剪下一段世界各城市的天气预报信息。

1.Revise the vocabulary of weather.

rainy, snowy, windy, cloudy, sunny

Teach the new word shower and showery.

2.出示课前准备好的资料，让学生听或看，然后让学生根据各地的天气情况，谈论各地的天气，完成书上的对话。

Then ask several pairs to say their dialogue for the class.

Step 8 Poem

Play the tape for the students to listen. Get them imagine the scene of the poem.

Play the tape again and have the students repeat.

Get them to read the poem. Pay attention to the intonation.

Step 9 Exercises in class

Translation:

1.近况如何？很好。

How _______ everything ________? ________ ________.

2. 我们正在努力学习准备迎考。

We are _______ _______ _______ our exams.

3. 划船太有趣了，我等不及了。

Boating is _______. I _______ _______.

4. 我们每一个人都认为春节是一年中最快乐的日子。

_______ of us _______ Spring _______ is the _______ day of the year.

5.今年是马年。

It’ll _______ _______ _______ _______ _______ this years.

Answers: 1. is, going, Very well 2. working hard on 3. interesting, can’t wait 4. Each, thinks, Festival, happiest 5. be the year of horse

Step 10 Homework

1. Write a dialogue about the weather report.（收看中央台的天气预报）

2. Recite the poem.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises.

Blackboard design

Lesson 56( Revision)during the Christmas holidaythe end of the termhave a longer holidaythe year of horsework hard on the examson the afternoon of January 19thput on playsI can’t wait

八年级上册英语课件 篇8

We should learn teamwork.

【重点单词】

1. 词形转换

(1) adj. + ly → adv.

loud → loudly soft → softly quiet → quietly

clear → clearly angry → angrily easy → easily

(2)过去式

fall → fell break → broke lose →lost throw → threw feel → felt

(3)

ill (同义词)sick (名词)illness

start(同义词)begin

far(反义词)near

smoke(现在分词)smoking

careless(反义词)careful

important(比较级) more important

enjoy(现在分词)enjoying

9.invent(名词)invention; inventor

indoor(反义词)outdoor

century(复数)centuries

coach(复数)coaches

feel (名词)feeling

tiring(近义词)tired

【重点短语】

1. have a soccer game 进行一场足球赛

2. fall ill 病倒了

3. be a little far from… 离……有点远

4. right away = at once 立刻；马上

5. miss a good chance 错过一个好机会

6. get/miss a goal 得到/失去一分

7. shame on sb. 为某人感到羞耻

8. do one’s best 尽某人的力

9. say sorry to sb. 对某人说抱歉

10. be sure to do sth. 确定做某事

11. be angry with… 生某人的气

12. with one’s help= with the help of sb. 在某人的帮助下

13. serve food 上菜

14. turn up/down… 调高/低(音量)

15. keep sb. doing sth. 让某人一直做某事

16. in a minute 一分钟后；马上

17. on the phone 在电话中

18. take a seat 就坐

19. never mind 不要紧

20. a lot of traveling 一系列旅行

21. love/enjoy doing sth. 喜爱做某事

22. have a very exciting life 过着非常兴奋的生活

23. as well 也

24. throw…into… 把……投进……

25. follow/obey the rules 遵守规则

26. over a century later 一个多世纪后

27. more and more people 越来越多的人

28. feel tired 感到疲劳

29. instead of… 替代……

30. ask sb. to do sth. 叫某人做某事

31. make a plan for sb. 为某人订一份计划

32. build up 增进；增强

33. have fun doing sth. 乐于做…..做某事

34. be important to 对于。来说是重要

35. in a minute/ at once/ right away 立刻/马上

【重点句型】

1. Could you please do me a favor? = Could you help me? = Could you give me a hand? 你能帮我吗？

2. Would you mind teaching me? = Would you please teach me? 你教我好吗？

3. Would you mind not smoking here? 你不要在这里抽烟好吗？

4. You are always so careless. 你总是这样粗心大意。

5. I’m very sorry for what I said. 我为所说感到到道歉。

6. We are sure to win next time 下次，我们一定回赢。

7. Let me buy you a new one. = Let me buy a new one for you. 让我为你买一个新的。

8. He invented an indoor game for his students so that they could play it even in bad weather. 他为他的学生们发明了一项室内运动以便他们甚至在恶劣的天气也能玩。

9. And you can throw it with one hand or both hands.你能用一只手或两只手投掷它。

10. I have great fun running and I feel well and look fit 我总是快乐地跑步和我感到很好，看上去很健康。

【考点详解】

1. ill 与 sick 都表示 “生病的”, ill只能作表语，而sick既可作表语也可作定语。

The man is ill/sick. 那个男人病了。 (作表语)

He is a sick man. 他是个病人。 (作定语)

2. Would you mind (not) doing sth? 表示“(不)做某事介意/好吗？”

Would you mind coming and checking it? 来修理它好吗？

Would you mind not smoking here? 不要在这儿吸烟好/介意吗？

3. one of + 名词复数，表示 “其中之一……”, 主语是one，表单数。

One of my teammates is strong and tall. 其中我的一个队友又高又壮。

4. miss 错过，思念，遗失

I missed the last bus yesterday. 昨天我错过最后一班车。

He missed his mother. 他想念他的母亲。

My God! I missed(=lost) my key. 天啊！ 我把钥匙弄丢了。

5. be sure to do sth. = be sure that + 句子 “确定做某事”

We are sure to win next time. = We are sure that we will win next time.

我们确信下次一定会赢。

6. be sorry for… “为某事抱歉”

be sorry to do sth. = be sorry (that) + 句子 “很抱歉做了某事”

I am very sorry for what I said. 我为我所说的话感到抱歉。

I’m sorry I lost your book. = I’m sorry to lose your book. 很抱歉弄丢你的书。

7. tired adj. “(感到)疲惫的” , 主语是人。

如：I feel tired today. 今天我感到累了。

tiring adj. “令人疲劳的”, 主语是事物

如：This job is tiring. 这份工作令人疲惫。

类似的有： excited 感到兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋的

interested 感到有趣的 interesting 有趣的

8. 15-year-old “15岁的”;15 years old “15岁”

如：He is a 15-year-old boy. = The boy is 15 years old.

9. instead “替代，相反”, 一般单独使用，放在句末，前面用逗号隔开。

instead of…“替代……;而不是……”

I won’t go to Shanghai. I’ll go to Beijing, instead. 我不会去上海而会去北京。= I’ll go to Beijing instead of Shanghai.

I drank a lot of milk instead of water. 我喝了许多牛奶而不是水。

10. have fun doing sth. = enjoy doing sth. 表示 “从做…….中获得乐趣”

如：I have great fun running. = I enjoy running.我总能在跑步中得到很大乐趣。

八年级下册英语课件(合集5篇)

教师在教授新的课程时，通常都会准备教案和课件。在编写教案和课件时，教师需要投入大量精力。在设计教案时，必须考虑学生的文化特点和背景差异。为了给您提供全面的介绍，我介绍" 八年级下册英语课件"，请继续阅读，了解更多相关信息，请持续关注本网站！

八年级下册英语课件 篇1

1 . 青草芦苇和红的白的紫的野花，被高悬在天空的一轮火热的太阳蒸晒着，空气里充满了甜醉的气息。

2 . 人生是美好的，因为我们可以从中悟出很多道理。我的人生，我自己走，我的命运，我自己掌握，我一定会通过自己让我的人生更加精彩，更加美好!

3 . 寒冷的冬天过去了，温暖的春风吹遍了每一个角落，春天装着满袋的音乐种子来到人间。她把种子撒向林间，林间飞着百灵鸟动听的欢歌;她把种子撒向溪流，溪流荡着青蛙呱呱的鸣唱;她把种子撒向草地，草地飘着蟋蟀轻盈的歌唱。

4 . Theypaidfamousartiststopaintpicturesofthemselves，theirhousesandotherpossessions，aswellastheiractivitiesandachievements

5 . 人们的注意力更多地集中在人类本身，而对宗教的注意力减少了

6 . convincesbofsth使某人确信/明白某事

7 . consideritadj/n＋todosth

8 . 春天的阳光格外明媚，春姑娘展开了笑脸，太阳，红红的光束射过来，那温柔地抚摸你，像年轻的母亲的手。

9 . 在这个世界上，无论别人怎么看你，其实并不重要。因为好多时候，你没有必要看别人的脸色生活，那样做只会让你徒增压力。

10 . 人们憎恨那种在共同劳动中不肯出力的行为，却不一定为自己谋私利。

八年级下册英语课件 篇2

1 . 在小麦和黑麦地里，在岸边的芦苇丛中，发出微弱而嘈杂的鸣声。

2 . 沿河两岸连山皆深碧一色，山头常戴了点白雪，河水则清明如玉。在这样一条河水里旅行，望着水光山色，体会水手们在工作上与饮食上的勇敢处，使我在寂寞里不由得不常作微笑!

3 . 古代的人想腾云驾雾，没能实现，只能幻想，而现在我们可以腾云驾雾了。你只要坐上飞机就可以了。

4 . 母亲河长多公里，宽多米。河水是蔚蓝色的，远远望去母亲河就像一张蓝色的地毯。树木非常茂盛。很多喜欢钓鱼的人常常在树阴下垂钓母亲河的中央有一条长长的小桥，桥的俩旁雕刻着各种各样的图案，如：双龙戏珠，神龙摆尾。母亲河两岸有花，有草，还有不同叶的树。

5 . ononehand……ontheotherhand……一方面…另一方面…

6 . 古时候的“顺风耳”，成了现在的电话，它可以让两个相距很远的人很快听到对方的声音。还有手机录音机都是神话中的“顺风耳”。

7 . Artisinfluencedbythewayoflifeandbeliefsofthepeople

8 . abstractsthfromsth从…中提取…

9 . (“我越来越体会到我当初是多么幸运。”

10 . Whatcolourisit?It’sblackandwhite它是什么颜色的?它是黑白相间的。 MyschoolbagisheavyWhat’sinit?我的书包很重。里面有什么？

八年级下册英语课件 篇3

一、教学设计思路

为学生设置情境，帮助学生在不同情况下做出正确的选择和回答，使学生在应用中掌握知识。

二、教学目标

(一)知识

1. 掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Can you come to my party? Yes, I'd love to. / Sorry, I can't. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

2. 掌握如何谈论自己或别人必须做的事情：Ihave to ...

(二)能力

能够根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动。

(三)情感

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。

三、教学重点

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I'd love to. / Sorry, I can't. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

四、教学难点

根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。

五、教学媒体

电脑、投影仪、邀请卡片

六、教学过程

1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：

教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。

2.完成任务，合作学习：

教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的.过程中掌握所学的知识。

任务一：Planning abirthday party.

让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。

任务二：Writing aninvitation card.

学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。

任务三：统计聚会人数。

学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。

group member

Yes / No

reasons

完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：

We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?

When is it going tostart?

I'm sorry. I haveto....

3. 拓展学习：

学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。

七、评价方法

可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。

①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。

②合作学习情况：与小组成员共同努力，很好地完成学习任务。

③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。

八年级下册英语课件 篇4

作为一位无私奉献的人民教师，总不可避免地需要编写说课稿，借助说课稿可以让教学工作更科学化。怎么样才能写出优秀的说课稿呢？以下是小编为大家整理的八年级英语下册第三单元优秀说课稿，欢迎阅读与收藏。

一、教材分析:

本单元是人教版初中英语八年级下册 Unit３，主题是“家务和许可”，其功能项目是“礼貌地请求”和“征求许可”。语言目标是要求学生学会用情态动词could来礼貌地进行请求或者征求他人的许可。本节我要讲的是本单元的Section A的第一节。

二、教学目标:

根据以上我对本单元教材内容的分析，我确定以下教学目标：

知识与能力：学会表示家务的短语；学会用could表示礼貌的请求以及征求许可，并能作出相应的回答。

过程与方法：本课采用问题导入方法，教师提问学生在家中是如何帮助父母的，大部分学生都会回答做家务，由此过渡到关于家务和许可的话题，然后教授与家务相关的短语和表达。多采用对话的形式，让学生练习用could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可，让学生学会灵活运用这一结构来进行表达。

情感、态度与价值观：教会学生在日常生活中礼貌、得体地表达自己的请求和意见。引导学生养成良好的生活习惯和劳动习惯，让学生意识到帮助父母减轻负担的重要性，让学生乐于在生活中多做自己力所能及的事情来帮助父母。

三、教学的重、难点:

基于上述对教材的分析，我确定本节的教学重点为一些动词短语和could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可的用法。

教学难点为could表示礼貌的请求和征求许可的用法。

四、教学方法:

通过形式多样的课堂活动和丰富的.练习，让学生能够轻松地掌握本单元的知识要点，提高英语听说读写的能力。

五、教学过程设计

Unit 3

The First Period (Section A)

Step 1 Lead-in

("良好的开端是成功的一半", 因此，我认为能以一种新颖的问候方式或复习方式进入一节课，就能唤起学生的兴趣，使学生保持一种积极的学习状态，或循序渐进地导入所学的内容，那么可为这节课的成功打下基础。)

T: Do you often help your parents to do some housework at home? What do you usually do ?

学生们纷纷站起来说说自己在家做的事情，过渡到本节的内容。

Step 2 Speaking

教师出示几张做家务的图片，引导学生学习一些有关做家务的动词短语。由1a部分的图片引出本节的目标语言，然后要求学生两两对话多多练习目标语言，达到能脱口而出的目的。

Step 3 Listening

接下来的听力要求学生自主完成1b的内容。通过听来巩固目标语言的用法。

Step4 Tips

帮助学生总结本节的语言结构，同时归纳一下英语中表示请求的句型。并要示学生在小组内合作的形式举出相应的例子，然后板书到黑板上让全班来分享。不妥的地方教师可以学生修正。

Step 5 Practice

要求学生自主完成5个单选题来检测学生的学习情况。先独立完成，再小组讨论，最后全班交流。

Step 7 Summary

回顾本节课所学内容，同时能意识到要在生活中多帮助父母做一些力所能及的事情。

八年级下册英语课件 篇5

难 点： 在多项式与多项式的乘法中适当添括号达到应用公式的目的.

三、合作学习

请同学们完成下列运算并回忆去括号法则.

(1)4+(5+2) (2)4-(5+2) (3)a+(b+c) (4)a-(b-c)

去括号法则：

去括号时，如果括号前是正号，去掉括号后，括号里的每一项都不变号;

如果括号前是负号，去掉括号后，括号里的各项都要变号。

(1)2a-b- =2a-(b- ) (2)m-3n+2a-b=m+(3n+2a-b)

(3)2x-3y+2=-(2x+3y-2) (4)a-2b-4c+5=(a-2b)-(4c+5)

添括号法则：添上一个正括号，扩到括号里的不变号，添上一个负括号，扩到括号里的要变号。

(3)(x+3)2-x2 (4)(x+5)2-(x-2)(x-3)

一、学习目标：让学生了解多项式公因式的意义，初步会用提公因式法分解因式

三、合作学习：

公因式与提公因式法分解因式的概念.

三个矩形的长分别为a、b、c，宽都是m，则这块场地的面积为ma+mb+mc,或m(a+b+c)

由上式可知，把多项式ma+mb+mc写成m与(a+b+c)的乘积的形式，相当于把公因式m从各项中提出来，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的一个因式，把m从多项式ma+mb+mc各项中提出后形成的多项式(a+b+c)，作为多项式ma+mb+mc的另一个因式，这种分解因式的方法叫做提公因式法。

例1、将下列各式分解因式：

(1)3x+6; (2)7x2-21x; (3)8a3b2-12ab3c+abc (4)-24x3-12x2+28x.

例2把下列各式分解因式:

(1)a(x-y)+b(y-x);(2)6(m-n)3-12(n-m)2.

首先找各项系数的____________________，如8和12的公约数是4.

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，如(3)中相同的字母有ab,相同字母的指数取次数最___________的.

1.写出下列多项式各项的公因式.

(1)ma+mb 2)4kx-8ky (3)5y3+20y2 (4)a2b-2ab2+ab

(5)(p-q)2+(q-p)3 (6)3m(x-y)-2(y-x)2

五、小结：

其次找各项中含有的相同的字母，相同字母的指数取次数最小的.

2、已知2x-y=1/3 ，xy=2，求2x4y3-x3y4 3、(-2)+(-2)

4、已知a-2b=2，,4-5b=6，求3a(a-2b)2-5(2b-a)3

八年级上册英语课件(精品6篇)

教师将按照课本中的主要教学内容整理教案课件，如今又到了编写教案课件的时候。合理地编排教案和课件有助于激发学生的创造力。如果您对如何编写优质课的教案感兴趣，那么我们的网站有关于“八年级上册英语课件”的相关内容，欢迎您继续关注。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

新目标英语八年级上Unit5教案

一、教学目标： 1.语言知识目标：

1)能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect 能掌握以下句型：

① What do you want to watch? ② What do you think of talk shows? ③ I can’t stand them.④ I don’t mind them.⑤ I like/love them./ I don’t like them.2)能了解以下语法：

动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。2.情感态度价值观目标：

学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。

二、教学重难点 1.教学重点：

1)学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。

2)掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

2.教学难点：

掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

三、教学过程 Step 1 Lead-in 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you think of…? Step 2 New words Learn the names of the TV shows.Step 3 Game 1.引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。2.让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。3.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 4 Listening 1.T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box.Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.3.Play the recording again.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 5 Pair work 1.Let Ss look at the pictures in the box.Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.2.Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box.3.Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.Step 6 Listening Work on 2a: 1.Read the shows in the box of 2a.Tell Ss to remember the information.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].3.Play the recording again to check the on 2b: 1.Let Ss read the sentences below.Explain some main sentences for the Ss.Make sure they know what to do.2.Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.3.Play the recording again to check the answers.Step 7 Pair work 1.Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a.They can use the information that is true for them.2.Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.3.Explain some main points for the Ss.4.Ss act the conversation in pairs.Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.

八年级上册英语课件 篇2

一、教材内容分析

本课是人教版八年级上册英语第一单元第三个话题的第一课时，主要谈话讨论如何给别人提出建议，并给予适当的评论。

二、教学目标（知识，技能，过程与方法情感态度、价值观）

1．知识与技能

（1）掌握Why don’t you get her a scarf ? That’s too boring .这种句型，并认识新单词。

（2）运用新句型熟练的进行小组对话。

（3）进行听力练习。

2．过程与方法

（1）能够通过师生说、两两说和自主听读体验交际式英语教学的一般过程，掌握英语说听的基本方法；

（2）能够通过两两说和综合说体验合作学习的过程和方法；

（3）能够仔细倾听老师和同学的发言，有语言表达和与同学交流的愿望。

（4）能够通过观看图片激发说话的欲望。

3．情感态度与价值观

（1）培养学习英语的兴趣；

（2）在学生两两交流和小组合作交流中，培养孩子合作意识和合作精神，能够相互配合完成一段通顺流畅的说话训练；

（3）使学生学会礼貌待人。

三、学习者特征分析

1学生是八年级的学生。

2学生已经学习了camera、hat,flowers 等物品的词。

3学生对 great,interesting,boring 这些评论性的词非常熟悉。

4学生好奇心强，对送什么礼物很感兴趣。

5学生善于表现自己，乐于交际。

6学生的听力能力不够强。

四、教学策略选择与设计

1谈话策略：运用谈话法引入新课。

2自主听读策略：学生通过自主听读拓展材料，在完成课标要求的基础上训练听说能力，积累和丰富英语词汇和句式。

3角色扮演法：让学生通过扮演不同角色，小组对话练习熟练地掌握重点句型。

五、教学环境及资源准备

1多媒体教室。

2 本课教材，课件。

六、教学过程

教学过程 教师活动 学生活动 设计意图及资源准备

Step1: Greeting Hello , cliass! How are you! Are you happy ... Greeting. 拉近教师和学生的距离。

Step2rensentation 1.教师放映幻灯片，设置妈妈的生日快到了，应该送什么礼物的情景引入新课。

2教师提问:Now, which do you want if it’s a gift for you? 学生畅所欲言: scarf/CD/bike/photo al

学生们自由发言,各抒己见bum/… 设置情景激趣引入新课。

初步感知新句型。

Step3earning new words

图片展示物体,让学生们跟读单词及描述性形容词。

学生跟读单词

学生们读(1a)的内容，将描述性形容词与物品一一对应,完成(1a)内容。 学习掌握新单词

Step4:Speaking practice图片展示情景引入句型及对话,展开课堂问答式的口语交际活动和小组活动。同时引导学生们使用所学句型谈论自己关于礼物的.喜好，可采取师生互动带动生生互动的方式。 学生练习句子并作角色扮演 帮助学生熟练的掌握重点句型

Step5istening

practice 1.播放（1b）（部分的录音，引导学生完成（1b）的教学内容。

2.播放(2a)部分的录音，引导学生完成教学听力任务。 学生听录音，完成（1b）（2a）的教学任务。 训练学生的听力。

Step6:Homework 让学生编写一段对话，讨论爸爸的生日时该买什么礼物。 完成作业。 复习巩固所学。

八年级上册英语课件 篇3

新目标英语八年级上Unit5 Section A 教学设计

上传: 郑家梅

更新时间：2017-6-7 10:10:29

新目标英语八年级上unit5 section a 教学设计

一.教学目标:(知识目标、能力目标、德育目标)(1)知识目标:通过本单元的学习让学生掌握有关邀请和请求许可的用语,拒绝邀请及合理的解释,在互动的交流中学会谈论自己的计划安排.并学会制作邀请函.(2)能力目标:通过在真实情境中的对话操练,听力练习,游戏以及制作邀请函,培养学生动脑,动口和动手的能力.和语言在真实情境中运用的能力.(3)德育目标:在交际,操练和动手操作的合作学习过程中,培养同学们的合作意识,增进同学间的友谊,并培养学生礼貌的接受和合理的拒绝别人请求的意识.教学重点及难点: 重点:本课的重点词汇短语:study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson ,help my parents, visit my aunt.以及时间短语on Saturday afternoon等.以can开头的一般疑问句,can和can't的区分,和sure, I'd love to.sorry, can't, thank you for asking, maybe another time, i have to…等答句.难点:目标词汇和句型在实际情况中的运用.三.教学方法: 任务型教学法为主体,以小组活动,两人协作,为依托.以游戏,听力,动手练习和笔头练习为载体开展教学.四.学具准备: 教学课件,电脑,学生自制的邀请函所需要用的卡片.五.教学程序: 1.热身(warm-up)在课间就开始播放英文故事视频短片,和中学生英文演讲比赛的片断,吸引学生的注意力,培养学生的预感,增强学习英语的兴趣.课前duty:把全班按座位分成三组,每组确定任务,给出中心话题,group 1 take a vacation ,group 2 keep healthy, group 3get to school.让学生以两人一问一答的对话形式,复习前几单元的知识,只要与所给话题相关的问答都可以.(3)课前展标:展示本课的学习目标.2.新课导入(lead-in)猜词游戏:以一个小的猜词游戏导入新课, 用变化字体错综排列的三个字母,c a n让学生从猜 字母入手,然后启发他们猜猜可以组成什么单词,学生可以猜到是can,这也是本课的要训练的重要词汇情态动词.然后复习can引导的一般疑问句,如“can you sing a song? Can you swim? can you play basketball?”等,继而引出“can you come to my party?”这一本课的题目.这个导入环节是从猜词游戏入手激发学生的兴趣,吸引学生的目光和注意力,并自然的引出本课主题,还可以对相关的知识进行复习.3.新授课过程

(1)新授 短语:本课新授短语有study for a test, go to the doctor, have a piano lesson, help my parents, visit my aunt.t: this Sunday is my birthday, i will have a party, can you come to my party?问全体同学 s: sure/yes/ok.T: thank you, and i also invited my friends to my party, but they have a lot of things to do.用师生间的对话引出本课短语,这时候展示图片,练习短语,并用unit3学过的话题“what's he/she doing for weekend?”来提问,这样即可以复习旧的句型,也可以练习新的短语.看图识图以后,让学生one by one的形式看图说短语,或说句子,以达到熟练掌握,人人都会的程度.(2)填图练习:完成书上的section a 1a用这个填图练习来巩固刚学过的短语.(3)小组合作:就刚才练习短语的图片询问 can you come to my party?启发学生答出sure, i'd love to.和i'm sorry, I can't.i have to go to the doctor.以及sorry, I can't.I'm helping my parents.等.在大屏幕中出示这些句子,让学生有一个视觉上的印象,另外对have to 句型进行强调和反复练习.进一步提问三人称“can he come to my party?”以及三人称的答句.师生之间的简短的示范练习之后,让学生根据大屏幕上的语言提示以小组为单位进行对话练习.运用所学短语,也鼓励学生发挥自己的想 像力,根据自己的实际情况练习一 人称和三人称的邀请和拒绝邀请.(4)听力练习:为了巩固所学句型进行听力练习.完成1b.一遍听内容填图,核实答案,一遍看原文复听,最后让学生两人协作复述或阅读听力原文.(5)游戏时间:大段的听力练习过后学生有了些疲劳的情绪,这个时候要积极调动学生的学习兴趣,刺激学习的兴奋点,所以在这里准备了一个游戏,名字叫“can you guess?”准备一些遮住一部分的图片,然后逐步露出图片,让学生猜: t: i invited some of my friends to my party, but they have some weekend plans, so they can't come to my party, can you guess why? keys: can he come to my party? no, he can't.he has to go to the doctor.etc.这一部分即是一个猜图片的游戏,也是对can引导的一般疑问句和have to的三人称的练习,达到了一箭双雕的目的.(6)导入听力:三段听力练习连续而至,势必会使学生有一些懈怠,此处运用一个小的看图练习导入,并对can和can't进行区分练习.准备两个小图片,笑脸和哭脸,笑脸代表can而哭脸代表can't,给出句子,让学生根据是笑脸或是哭脸说出can或can't的句子.如,jeff come to the party.mary swim in the pool.(7)完成2a 2b让学生从听觉上区分情态东西can和否定形式can't, 并进一步强化拒绝邀请的方式和合理的理由.依然采取让学生复述或阅读原文的形式来核对答案.4.动手练习:(1)准备工作:在大屏幕上展示已做好的邀请函,解释邀请函上要出现的信息,提出问题“what is it about? whose invitation is it? when is the party? where is the party?”启发学生了解邀请函上要具备那些信息.完成3a,并请同学两人协作填出正确答案.(2)做一做:拿出准备好的硬纸板,制作自己的邀请函,此时在大屏幕上给出邀请函的模板,让学生能够明确邀请函要包含的信息内容.(3)展示并演练:用实物投影仪展示制作优秀的邀请函,用这样的方法鼓励和表彰制作的优秀的同学,让大家了解他的作品,并以两人协作的方式就此邀请函内容模仿3a进行对话练习.这部分也是本课的一个拓展和延伸的环节也是本课知识的一个生成,跳出了party 这一话题的局限,启发学生就其他方面的邀请制作和讨论邀请函,如it's a sports meeting, it's a movie, it's an English club , etc.给出keys: can you come to my party on Sunday? When is it? where is it? How can I get there? etc.让学生利用本课所学的知识畅所欲言,作为本课知识学习的成果展示.5.小结: 小结部分,本着“把小结换给学生的理念”,在幻灯片中给出总结提示,让学生们参照总结提示,总结本课所学的知识点,和语法项目要点.给出语言提示“can…? sure,…….Sorry ,I can't I have to…….”启发学生说出本课所学到的短语,句子,或有用的表达方式.6.课堂练习: 为了巩固本课所学的知识,为学生及时补充了一些配套的笔头练习,让学生学会运用,和对自己进行检测.1.“can you go to the movie with us on Sunday?” “of course._ it is”5:00 in the afternoon.“ a.where b.what time c.how soon d.when 2.”would you like to join us in basketball?“ ____but I'm afraid I have to study for my science test.” a.I wouldn't b.Id love to c..I don't like it 3.thanks___ your help, and now i have made great progress in my English.a.to b.with c.for d.by 4.the poor lady had to go out for food ____a cold morning.a.in b.at c.on d.

八年级上册英语课件 篇4

【重要词组】

do the dishes，sweep the floor，take out the trash.fold your clothes，clean the living room，do chores，have to do sth，like to do（doing）sth，make dinner，make your bed

重要句型及语法如下：

Could you please clean your room？Yes，sure.

Could you please do the dishes？Sorry，I can’t.I have to do my homework.

Could I please go to the movies？Yes，you can.

Could I please use the computer？No，you can’t.You must do the dishes at first.

二、学生学情分析

本课话题来自学生的生活经历，学生在初一已经学习了许多动词短语，为表达提供了语言基础，此外，学生已初步掌握了用祈使句和Can you…？/Can I…？提出请求和建议，为本课的学习打下了铺垫。

活动设计的话题从谈论家务———对家务的看法（好恶）———父母和孩子之间承担的家务————社交、休闲活动等生活的各个方面，各任务层层递进，与学生的生活紧密相连，又是学生饶有兴趣的内容，为表达提供了真实的材料，使得学生在各个活动中想说、有话说，使活动参与的范围广，达到任务的真实性，有效性。

在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动，学会如何与人交往，学会表达自己对事情的看法，使他们的个性得到张扬。

三、单元重点和难点

1、重点。

1）学习和复习一些常用的动词短语。

2）委婉地提出请求、征求许可做某事。

Could you/I please do things？Yes，Sure./ .I/You can.

Sorry，I / you can’t，，I / you have to do…”

3）学习如何请求他人的帮助。

2、难点。

在实际的生活中委婉地表达自己的请求和征求许可，获取帮助

四、教学过程

1、 Warming up

Enjoy ourselves.Watch cartoon Small Potato’s Sunday.

看动画片段《小土豆的星期天》导入本课话题和新词汇“chores”。小土豆周末一人在家。他过了一个非常快乐而充实的星期天。帮助父母做了许多家务活。片段的主题使学生联想到本课的话题。

2、 Learn new words and phrases

What kind of chores can you find in the cartoon？

学生通过在动画片段里找家务活，利用已学的简单词汇如make breakfast等导入新单词的学习。

Look！What is it used for？

看图。通过问学生这些清洁用品的用处学习动词词组do chores，do the dishes，make the bed，take out the trash，fold the clothes，clean the living room.

3、 Memory game.

What is she doing？Do you still remember？

通过记忆力游戏，让学生适时对所学词汇进行回忆以及进一步的巩固。并适当活跃课堂气氛。从这里开始对学生的活动进行分组竞赛。

4、 Discuss.

What do you usually do on Sunday？

先通过已学的简单句型，让学生再一次对所学的词汇进行练习。并在讨论后让学生做Pair work来热身。

5、 Listening.1b

Peter’s chores or Mom’s chores？

通过听力来巩固目标词汇。

6、 Make a survey.

Discuss in groups of four.

Draw a smiling face on the chore you like and draw a crying face on the chore you dislike

Then give a report.

通过做调查，复习句型I like … because…以及I don’t like … because…

学生在做调查的过程中了解自己同学的喜欢，为下一步如何委婉地提出请求做好铺垫。

调查表格附下：

Chores Like Don’t like

do the dishes

sweep the floor

take out the trash

make your bed

fold your clothes

clean the living room

7、 Pair work

Ask your partner for help

告诉学生可以向同桌寻求帮助，请求别人帮助你做自己不喜欢干的家务活。

导入目标语言Could you please do things？Yes，Sure.

Sorry，I have to do…

并进行对话练习。

8、Game

哑剧表演。一位学生利用Could you please do things？委婉地提出请求。另一位学生表演动作。活跃课堂气氛。

9、Pair work

Act out strict father or mother.

角色扮演。一位学生扮演严格的父母。一位学生扮演孩子。

学习目标语言如何征求许可做某事。Could I please do things？Yes，Sure.No，you must …

并做Pair work

10、Interview

How to be a better boy and girl？

让学生以小组的形式，采访自己的同学。讨论一次自己的周末计划。要帮助爸爸妈妈做什么家务活。在学习中学生受到爱的教育，学会爱父母，爱家庭，爱劳动。并且复习已学句型I’m going to do…

11、颁奖。给每个小组里的最能干者发奖。适时给学生爱劳动，爱父母的教育

12、 总结本节课的教学重点。

13、 Homework

Read the words and phrases you learn today.

Make a dialogue between you and your parent about doing the chores.

2025八年级上册英语课件(精华5篇)

八年级上册英语unit 6的课件应该怎么设计？课件是根据教学大纲的要求，经过教学目标确定，教学内容和任务分析，教学活动结构及界面设计等环节，而加以制作的课程软件。下面小编给大家带来八年级上册英语unit 6课件，欢迎大家阅读。

八年级上册英语课件 篇1

Unit 1 Will people have robots ?

单元教学目标：

1、Words&phrases: robot, paper, less, fewer, simple, unpleasant, factory, seem, etc .

2、will 构成的一般将来时态的陈述句、否定句、疑问句及回答.

3、There be 句型的一般将来时. 4、more , less , fewer 的用法.

5、学习一般将来时态的相关知识，学会对未来进行预测.

单元重难点：

1、will构成一般将来时态的句式。 2、There be 句型的一般将来时态。

3、more , fewer , less 的用法。 4、How to make predictions .

第一课时

课前准备：

教师：录音机、所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练、练习本及相关的学习用具

教学步骤：

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1.Greetings: Welcome to school .

What’s the date today ? Who’s on duty today ?

Do you enjoy your winter holiday ?(你喜欢你的寒假吗?)

Do you finish your Homework(家庭作业) ?(你完成你的假期作业了吗?)

Do you want to live on the moon ?(你想去月球吗?)

Can you guess what will happen in ten years ?(你能猜出十年后将会发生什么吗?)

Collect the Ss’ answers and say something about their predictions .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)

SB Page 2 ,1a .

1.Look at the picture :How will the world be different in the future ,100 years from now ?We’re going to talk about sth in 100 years .

2.Read each predictions to the class .Explain the new vocabulary .

3.Read the instructions .Make sure Ss know what they should do .

4.Do it by themselves .

5.Talk about the answers with the class .

Explain :一般将来时态

构成: will / be going to +动词原形=

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)

SB Page 2 ,1b .

1.Practise reading the six predictions .

2.Read the instructions to Ss .Circle the things you hear on the recording .

3.Play the tape twice .(放录音，两次)

4.Play the tape a third time .At the same time ,check the answers .

SB Page 2 , 1c .

1、Pay attention to the dialogues .

2、Read the dialogues fluently .

3、Pairwork .Work in pairs to make predictions according to the sample .

4、Ask several pairs to share their conversations to the class .

SB Page 3 , 2a & 2b .

1、Read the predictions .

2、Read the instructions and point out the sample answer .

3、Play the tape twice .Ss circle the word they hear in each sentences: more , less , fewer .

4、Check the answers .

学生探究: less , fewer 的区别。

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)

1、Point to the example in the sample dialogue .Practice reading .

2、Look at activity 2b .Groupwork:Take turns to make conversations about the predictions .

Grammar Focus:

1.、Review the grammar box .Ss say the statements and responses .

2、Make summaries about “will” ,“fewer” and “less” .

Homework(家庭作业)(家庭作业)：

1、Make predictions about yourself in 10 years .Write down 5 sentences .

2、Go over the new words .

教学后记:

八年级英语下册课件

老师在正式上课之前需要写好本学期教学教案课件，现在着手准备教案课件也不迟。教案是教学中进行有效沟通的媒介。教师范文大全编辑今天为大家准备了一篇讲述“八年级英语下册课件”的好文章，请记得收藏我们的网站随时了解我们的最新资讯和消息！

八年级英语下册课件【篇1】

【主题一】My Favorite Hobby

I have a lot of hobbies, such as reading, playing sports, and listening to music. But my favorite hobby is drawing. I began drawing when I was just a little kid, and I fell in love with it right away. I enjoy creating different images and bringing my imagination to life.

When I draw, I feel relaxed and happy. It's like I enter into a different world where there are no rules or boundaries, and I can let my mind go wild. I usually draw in my free time, and every time I finish a drawing, I feel a sense of accomplishment.

Drawing helps me express my feelings and emotions in a positive way. Sometimes, I feel sad or anxious, and I don't know how to deal with it. But when I draw, I can let everything out, and it makes me feel better. Drawing also helps me improve my concentration and focus, which is essential for my studies.

In the future, I want to become a professional artist. I believe that the more I draw, the better I will become, and I will be able to make a living from my art. Even if I don't become famous, I will still be happy as long as I can continue to draw and express myself.

【主题二】My Dream Job

My dream job is to become a doctor. Ever since I was a little kid, I wanted to help people and make a difference in their lives. Being a doctor would allow me to do just that. I believe that being a doctor is one of the most honorable professions in the world.

I am currently studying hard to achieve my dream. I am taking science and math courses to prepare me for medical school. I know that the road to becoming a doctor is challenging, but I am willing to put in the work and effort to achieve my goals.

Being a doctor would allow me to help people in many different ways. I could diagnose and treat illnesses, save lives in emergency situations, and even prevent diseases through public education and awareness campaigns.

I know that being a doctor requires a lot of knowledge, skill, and dedication, but I believe that I have what it takes to become a successful doctor. I am passionate about helping others, and I think that this is the most important quality for a doctor to have.

In the future, I hope to work in a hospital or clinic where I can help people who are sick or injured. I believe that being a doctor is not just a job, but a calling. I am excited about my future career and look forward to making a difference in the world.

【主题三】My Travel Experience

I have always enjoyed traveling and exploring new places. One of my most memorable travel experiences was when I went to Japan with my family.

Japan is a beautiful country with a rich history and culture. We visited many famous landmarks, such as the Tokyo Tower, Mount Fuji, and the Imperial Palace. We also tried many delicious Japanese foods, such as sushi and ramen.

One of the highlights of our trip was when we visited Kyoto. Kyoto is a city that is known for its traditional architecture and beautiful temples. We visited the Kiyomizu-dera temple, which is a UNESCO World Heritage site. The temple was built in the 17th century and is famous for its wooden stage that overlooks the city.

Another memorable experience was when we went to Hiroshima. Hiroshima is a city that is famous for being the site of the atomic bombing during World War II. We visited the Peace Memorial Park and Museum, which was both moving and educational.

Traveling to Japan was an amazing experience that allowed me to learn about a different culture and way of life. I realized that there is so much in the world to explore and discover. I hope to have many more travel experiences in the future and continue to learn and grow as a person.

八年级英语下册课件【篇2】

教学目标：知识目标：1.bought, taught and thought

2.where did you do?

3.What did you do?

情感目标：When you play things, you must get good corporation with your players.

教学重点、难点：1.I am throwing the basketball.

教具、学具：some balls and story a tape and pictures

教学过程：

Review “ past tense” and “ future tense” verbs with a game. Write three columns of words on the blackboard and ask for volunteers to match them correctly. As each student makes a match, he or she says “Yesterday I___de. Today I___. Tomorrow I am going to__.

Add “buy” “teach” and “think” to your “today” column. Ask the students to give you the future tense for each verb and write them under your “tomorrow” column. Then write “taught” “thought” “bought” in a different order than the other two columns, and ask the students to guess how they match with the present-tense verbs. Point out the similarities in spelling “bought” “taught” “thought”

Pause after Number 1 in the student book. Review the story so far. Today Jenny and Li Ming went to the store buy some clothes for Li Ming to the pictures in the student book. Who are they talking to?

Note the word “player” in the lesson. A “players” plays something, such as a sport.

Play “What’s wrong?” to practice the new past tense verbs, and other tenses and verbs.

Play “spelling Bee” to practice spelling any vocabulary in this unit.

Tech “Oh, what did you do?” in Number 3 of the student book.

Number 2 in the activity book is a listening exercise. The students listen to each sentence on the audiotape and change it into the past—tense. Here’s how the audiotape goes:

板书：

Lesson4 Where did you go?

Where did you do?

What did you do?

习题：

? 写出buy teach think 的过去式。

? 用Where did you do?练习说话。

? 用What did you do?练习说话。

八年级英语下册课件【篇3】

说课稿

今天我说课的题目是外研版八年级英语下册第七模块的第一单元。She asked if I was practicing too much。

一·教材分析：

这节课是外研版八年级英语下册第七模块的第一单元。本模块话题是“旅游和休假”。通过对北海公园、武陵园景区的介绍和作者旅游经历的描述，激发学生对大自然的热爱，陶冶情操，同时唤起学生的保护环境意识。而且在语境中很自然地体验本单元的语法项目“转述现在进行时、疑问句和祈使句”。本模块紧紧围绕“旅游和休假””这一主题展开多方面的听、说、读、写的语言实践活动,使学生由简单到复杂,渐渐感知新的语言,并通过范例,引导学生总结、归纳，掌握完整的语法知识。

二·学情分析

初二下学期的学生经过一年多的学习，有了一定的英语基础知识和听说能力，正逐渐向读、写过渡，同时，学生们对英语学习还保持着较浓厚的兴趣。经过一年的新课程理念的熏陶及实践，有了初步的自主、合作、探究、实验的能力。

三·教学目标

1..知识目标：掌握本课的重点单词和短语；能转述别人表示疑问，指令或建议的话 2..技能目标： 以谈论“旅游经历”为话题展开教学活动，在旅游体验中轻松学习直接引语与间接引语的转变。

3.情感目标：加深对我国自然风景区的了解，培养学生对祖国大好河山的热爱。

四·教学重点·难点

1.掌握介绍“旅游和休假”的基本词汇，能叙述自己的经历。2.直接引语和间接引语的转换。

五·教学方法

1.任务型语言教学法 2.情景交际法 3.多媒体辅助

在本课的任务型语言教学中，我创造性地设计贴近学生生活实际的任务活动，吸引和组织他们积极参与，使学生通过观察、思考、讨论、交流和合作等方式，在一种自然、真实或模拟真实的情境中体会语言、掌握语言的应用。

六·学法指导

本节课将在课堂活动中把学生分成四人小组的学习小组，让他们围绕着课堂任务分工合作，在活动中相互探讨、相互交流、相互合作，从而获得知识、技能和情感体验，发展他们的能力。

七.教学设计

课前延伸

1.课前读词：学生朗读本单元单词 2.每日播报：My favorite holiday

课内探究

STEP1、新课导入：向学生出示图片.小组竞赛的形式对图片进行描述。然后让学生观看北海公园的录像，通过录像调动学生的学习积极性，培养学生的兴趣，为以后的学习打下基础，使学生在轻松活泼的气氛中开始新课程。STEP2、听前说

通过free talk很自然的导入听力部分的学习。

然后让学生到黑板上展示自己的答案。

本环节是教材安排的任务型听力活动，目的是让学生在听音时抓住关键词，培养学生边听边做笔记的学习策略。STEP3、listen and read 1)整体听一边录音，选择最佳答案 2再听一遍录音，回答下面问题。3再听录音，注意语音语调。STEP4、听后说

1、work in group :分角色朗读对话。

2、compete the sentences 小组内讨论的形式

让学生在小组中交流、合作。易于激发学生的表达欲望，在后动中他们一定会努力表现自己，做到最好。把任务活动放在小组中进行，还可以解决“大班”难于操练的难题，学生在小组有更多的时间来运用英语表达自己的思想。STEP5、疑难解惑：

1、read the dialogue find out the difficulties and focus, then discuss with groups and solve the difficulties(小组自主互助学习)

2、对小组内不能解决的问题，老师适时点拨 STEP6 精讲点拨： STEP7 学以致用

在此环节我创设了四个情景，学生在学完对话的基础上，在创设的情景之中，进一步练习，强化知识的掌握。做上面这个活动可以丰富学生的事业和词汇，以便在对话中运用自如。STEP8 板书设计

STEP9 课堂小结 总结本节课的重点词组和短语及语法知识

课后提升

1、复习当天所学内容，整理学案，掌握词汇、语法。

2、将workbook相关联系完成

3、预习unit2的语法和词汇

由于教材中的环节较多，内容充实，因此我将最后的课后提升环节让学生既复习又预习起到承前启后的作用。

八年级英语下册课件【篇4】

暂时不能提供完整的1000字范文，但是可以提供一个主题范文的开头作为参考：

Lesson 1: My Summer Vacation

教学目标：

学习并运用词汇：vacation, trip, relaxing, exciting, explore等。

学习并运用句型结构：I had a great/good/terrible summer vacation. I went on a trip to… We visited… It was relaxing/exciting/tiring/fun.

学习并运用过去时态。

学习并运用描写性形容词。

教学重点：

学习并运用过去时态。

学习并运用描写性形容词。

教学难点：

正确运用过去时态句型描述自己的暑假经历。

教学准备：

课件、图片

教学过程：

Step 1: Warm-up

1. Greetings and review.

2.Ask students to share their own summer vacation experiences in pairs.

Step 2: Pre-reading

1. Introduce new vocabulary: vacation, trip, relaxing, exciting, explore.

2. Use the new words in sentences.

3. Ask students what they think students do during summer vacation.

Step 3: While-reading

1. Pre-viewing: Show a picture of a beach vacation. Ask students to predict what the article will be about.

2. Read the article "My Summer Vacation" silently. （30秒）

3. Read the article again and answer the questions:

a. Where did the writer go on summer vacation?

b. What did the writer do there?

c. How was the weather?

d. How did the writer feel about the vacation?

Step 4: Post-reading

1. Class discussion. Ask students if they can relate to the writer's experience. Did they have a similar or different vacation?

2. Writing: Ask students to write a short paragraph about their summer vacation using the new words and the sentence structure: I had a great/good/terrible summer vacation. I went on a trip to… We visited… It was relaxing/exciting/tiring/fun.

3. Pair work: Ask students to share their paragraphs with a partner and ask questions to each other about their vacations.

4. Group sharing: Ask some students to share their paragraphs with the whole class.

Step 5: Homework

1. Write a letter to a friend in English, sharing your summer vacation experiences.

2. Prepare a short oral presentation about your summer vacation for the next class.

以上是一个主题范文的教案开头部分，希望对你有帮助。

八年级英语下册课件【篇5】

八年级仁爱英语下册教案3篇

英语老师应抓住学生爱说爱闹、敢想敢说的心理特点，创造一个开放宽松的教学环境。要想上好一节英语课，每个初二八年级英语老师都应该在课前准备一份初二八年级英语教案。你是否在找正准备撰写“八年级仁爱英语下册教案”，下面小编收集了相关的素材，供大家写文参考！

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇1

I’ll help to clean up the city park.

一、教学目标：

1. 语言知识目标：

1) 能掌握以下单词：clean up, city, cheer, cheer up, give out, volunteer, notice,...

2) 能掌握以下句型：① You could help to clean up the city parks. ....

3) 能了解以下语法：情态动词could, should的用法;用should或could提出建议并对别人的建议作出评价。如何表达主动提供帮助。

2. 情感态度价值观目标：

在授课过程中渗透助人就是助己，助人收获快乐的情感目标，使学生在谈论如何为别人提供帮助的对话中能意识到尽己所能，帮助他人，乐于奉献是一种良好的品德，培养学生为他人着想，热爱公益事业，乐于助人的优良品质。

二、教学重难点

1. 教学重点：

1) 掌握这些短语动词的构成和用法：clean up, city, cheer, cheer up, give out, ....

2) 学会提供帮助的基本句型：I’d like to work outside.I’ll help clean the city park.

2. 教学难点：学会提供帮助的基本句型

三、教学过程

Period 1(Section A 1a-2d)

Step 1 Warming up

1. 播放学生志愿者进行义务帮助别人的活动视频，通过询问他们以下问题来引导学生们了解社会上一些的志愿们进行的活动。

Step 2 New words Read new words on p9-10.

Step 3 Discussion

1. 1a. Look at the ways you could help others. Then list other ways.

2. Ss discuss with their partners and write the ways one could help others:

① Help plant trees by the river. ② Help clean up the city park.

③ Visit the old people in the old people’s home. ④ Help young kids to learn English.

Step 4 Listening

1. T: Tell Ss to read the sentences in the chart. Make sure they know the meaning of the sentences.

2. 1b. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the ways the boy and girl could help others.

Step 5 Pair work

1. Let Ss read the conversation in the picture.

2. 1c. Use the information in the chart of 1b to make other conversations.

A: I hope to work outside.

B: You could help to clean up the city parks. ........

3. Let some pairs act out their conversations.

Step 6 Listening

1. 2a:

T: A group of students are planning a City Park Clean-up Day. Listen and check (√) the things they are going to do to tell people about it.

1. Look at the pictures in 2a. Discuss the things they are going to do.

2. Play the recording for the Ss to listen and check the pictures.

3. Play the recording again to check the answers.

2. 2b:

1. Let Ss read the sentences below. Explain some main sentences for the Ss. Make sure they know what to do.

2. Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.

3. Play the recording again to check the answers.

Step 7 Pair work

1. 2c. Tell Ss to make a conversation using the information in 2a and 2b.

2. Let one pair to read out thei r conversation first.

e.g. A: We need to come up with a plan for the City Park Clean-Up Day.

B: Let’s have lunch first.

A: No, we need to start now. Clean-Up Day is only two weeks from now.

B: You’re right. We can’t put off making a plan. As we talk, I’ll write down all our ideas. Then we can decide which ideas are best.

A: Let’s make some notices, too. Then I’ll hand them out after school.

B: And we could each call up ten students and ask them to come.

3. Ss act the conversation in pairs. Ask some pairs to act out their con versations.

Step 8 Reading and Role-play 

1. Read the conversations and answer the two questions:

① Where’s Helen going to work this summer?

__________________________________

② What did Tom do to help the old people?

____________________________________

Answers: She’s going to work in an old people’s home.

Reading the newspaper or just talking to the old people.

2. Read the conversation after the teacher.

3. Practice the conversation with their partner. Then let some pairs to act out the conversation.

Homework:

Teaching thought:

Period 2(Section A 3a-3c)

Step 1 Revision

1. Write down the phrases.

1. 打扫 ________ 2. 分发 ________ 3. 曾经 _______

4. (使)变得高兴 ________ 5. 义务做某事 _________________

6. 大打扫日 ______________ 7. 想出主意(办法)____________

2. Role-play

A: Hi, Tom. I’m making some plans to work in an old people’s home this summer.

B: Really? I did that last summer!

Step 2 New words Read new words on p11.

Step 3 Reading

1.Tell Ss to read the article in 3a quickly and try to find the answers to these questions:

1. What does Mario love?

2. What does Mary love? 

3. What do Mario and Mary volunteer to do?

Ss read the article quickly and try to answer the questions:

Answers: 1. He loves animals.

2. She loves reading books.

3. Mario volunteers at animal hospital and Mary helps kids learn to read.

2.3b: Read the article again and answer the questions.

1. Why does Mario volunteer to help others?

2. Why does Mary volunteer to help others?

3. What does Mario say about volunteering?

4. What does Mary say about volunteering?

Answers: 1. Because he believes it can help him to get his future dream job.

2. Because she can do what she loves to do and help others.

3. He gets such a strong feeling of satisfaction when he sees the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners’ face.

4. Volunteering is a dream come true for her.

Homework Make sentences with these words.

help (to) do; want to do; learn to do; decide to do; how to do; volunteer to do

Teaching thought:

Period 3(Grammar Focus-4c)

Step 1 Revision

Complete the sentences.

Mario and Mary ____ ___ several hours each week __ ____ others. Mario wants __ ___ an animal doctor. He _________ at an animal hospital. He wants __ _____ more about ____ __ care for animals.

Mary is a book lover. She could read by herself __ ___ ____ of four. Last year, she decided __ ___ ___ for a volunteer after-school _______ program. Mary still works there once a week __ ____ kids _____ __ read. Volunteering here is a dream come true for her. She can what she _____ ___ ___and helps others at the same time.

Can you tell something about Mary to us?

Answers: give up, to help, to be, volunteers, to learn, how to, at the age, to try out, reading, to help, learn to, loves to do

Step 2 Grammar focus

1. 阅读Grammar Focus中的句子，然后做填空练习。

Step 3 New words Look at the big screen and learn the new words and expressions:

Step 4 Practice

1. 4a: Fill in the blanks with the phrasal verbs in the box.

Tell Ss to read the sentences in 4a and try to fill in the blanks with the phrasal verbs in the box.

Answers: put off; call up; come up with; cheer up; put up; hand out; give out

2. 4b: Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the box.

Check the answers with the Ss.

3. 4c: Complete the sentences with your own ideas. Use infinitives.

Homework Make sentences with the phrases below.

put up, hand out, call up, cheer up, come up with, give out, put off

Teaching thought:

Period 4(Section B 1a-2e)

Step 1 Warming up and revision

1. Daily greeting. 2. 复习动词不定式的用法，并完成相关任务。

3. Check the homework. Let some Ss report “Who’s the … in class?”

Step 2 Presentation

1. Present the new words on the big screen and learn the new words together.

1) repair v. 修理;修补 2) fix v. 安装;使固定

3) give away 赠送;捐赠 4) wheel n. 车轮;轮子

2. Ss read and try to remember the new words.

3. Work on 1a and match the sentences with the similar meaning.

4. Check the answers with the Ss.

Step 3 Writing . Work on 1b

1. Ask one student read the phrases and the nouns. Tell Ss to match the phrasal verbs with the nouns. Then make sentences with the phrases.

2. Let some Ss come to the blackboard and write down their sentences. Then check together.

Step 4 Listening . Work on 1c:

1. Tell Ss to look at the pictures in 1c. Tell them the boy in the pictures is Jimmy. He’s a good boy. He likes to help others. What is he doing now? Listen to the tapes and number the pictures.

2. Play the recording for the Ss. Ss just listen for the first time. Play the recording again and number the pictures.

3. Check the answers:

Step 5 Role-play

1. Work in pairs. Role-play a conversation between Jimmy and the reporter. Use the information in 1c and 1d.

2. Let two students make a model for the Ss.

3. Ss practice their conversations

4. Teacher can walk around the classroom, and give some help to the Ss.

Step 6 Reading

Fast Reading

1. T: Now let’s work on 2b. First, let’s read the questions and make sure we know the meanings of all the questions. Then read the passage quickly and find the answers to the questions.

1) What kind of letter is it? 2) Who wrote the letter to Miss Li? Why?

2. Ss read the letter quickly and try to find the answers to the two questions.

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇2

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1. 掌握重点词汇和短语：do the dishes，take out the rubbish，fold your clothes，sweep the floor，make your bed，clean the living room

2. 理解并掌握重点句型：Could you please…? Could I …?

3. 能听懂有关做家务和日常活动的对话。

二、过程与方法

采用情境教学法，调动学生的积极性，引导他们积极参与课堂。

三、情感态度与价值观

了解各种家务，能发现要做的家务并积极主动地去做。

教学重点

能用本课的重点词汇和句型对家务作出委婉请求。

教学难点

能抓住录音中的关键词。

教法导航

课上引导学生积极参与课堂活动，老师少讲，鼓励学生多练。

学法导航

加强小组合作学习，积极回答问题。

教学准备

图片，录音机，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the students as usual.

Step 2 Lead-in

T：Good morning，boys and girls! I am always very busy on weekends. So my daughter often helps me with the housework. Do you often help your mother do the chores at home? (Write “chores” on blackboard and explain it.) Here “chore” means housework. Could you please tell me what chores you do at home?

S1：I often clean my room.

S2：I wash my clothes and fold my clothes.

S3：I clean the window.

S4：I make my bed and sweep the floor.

S5：I clean the living room.

T：Well， you are good boys and girls! We should try to be helpful and do some chores at home.

Step 3 New words and expressions

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 17.

T：Look at the picture on page 17. What can you see?

S1：Peter and his mother.

S2：The dustbin is full.

S3：The floor is dirty.

S4：...

T：So there are a lot of chores to do，right? Help students to learn the following phrases about chores：clean the living room; do the dishes; sweep the floor; make the bed; take out the trash; fold the clothes

Step 4 Presentation

T：If you want to ask somebody to do chores，how can you ask in English?

S1：Can you do the chores?

S2：Could you please do the chores?

T：Which one do you think is better?

students：The second one.

T：Yes. We should say“Could you please do the chores?”instead of other ways because it sounds very polite. Write “Could you please ...?” on the blackboard.

Step 5 Pair work

T：In the picture，the mom asks the son to do some chores. What does she say?

S：Peter，could you please take out the trash?

T：Good! Today，we’ll learn how to make polite requests with could. It is very important to be polite in our life. Now work in pairs. Imagine you are the mom and the son in the picture. Ask your partner to do the chores that you see.

First ask two students to read the sample conversation in activity 1c. Then students make their own conversations. Call several pairs to demonstrate their conversations to the class.

Step 6 Listening

T：You will here a conversation between Peter and his mother. What kind of chores do Mom and Peter do? Check Mom or Peter.

Play the recording twice. For the first time students focus on the chores Mom does; the second time，focus on the chores Peter does. Then check the answers.

Step 7 A little game

Find out the best helper at home.

T：Do you often help your parents do the chores? Now let’s choose the best helper at home. First please write down all the chores from your memory on a piece of paper. Then check each chore you do at home. The one who check the most chores will be the best helper at home.

Step 8 Group work

T：Imagine we are going to clean our classroom this afternoon. You need someone to help you do some things. Think of the things you need to do and make polite requests to your partners. You may find these phrases useful.

Show the following phrases on the screen：carry some water，clean the desks，clean the chairs，clean the windows，clean the blackboard，turn off the lights，take down the old pictures，put up the new pictures，sweep the floor. After a few minutes，call several groups to show their conversations.

Step 9 Presentation

T：I can’t find my pen. But I have to write something now. What can I do?

S：You can borrow a pen from others.

T：But what should I say?

S：Can I use your pen?

T：But that doesn’t sound very polite. Any other idea?

S：Could I please use your pen? (Write the sentence on the blackboard)

T：Good! That’s a very polite way.

Step 10 Listening

Ask the students to look at the picture on Page 18. Then say：Look at the picture. That’s Peter and his father. Peter asks his father if he can do four things. Look at the chart in activity 2a. What are the four things? Ask a student to read the things aloud.

T：What does his father say? Now please listen to the tape and check ‘yes’ or ‘no’ in the chart. Play the tape twice. For the first time，they only listen. The second time，they check “yes” or “no”. Then check the answers with the whole class.

T：Why Peter’s father say no? What are his reasons? Let’s listen to the conversation again. Draw lines to the reasons in the chart. Before play the tape，ask a student to read the reasons given. Then play the tape. If necessary，play it again. Check the answers.

Help students to summarize different ways of answering the question “Could I...?” Yes，you can / I guess so / Oh， yeah / Sure. No， you can’t. ... / Sorry， but ...

Step 11 Pair work

T：Now look at activity 2c. Work in pairs. Student A is Peter who asks if he can do things. Student B is Peter’s father who says “yes” or “no”. If you say “no”，give a reason.

First get two students to read the sample conversation. Then students make their own conversations.

Step 12 Group work

T：Imagine we’ll have a self-study class this afternoon. You would like to do many different things. How will you ask your teacher for permission? Please do it in groups of four. One will be the teacher，and the others will be the students，make conversation like this：

S：Could I please listen to music?

T：No you can’t.

S：Could I please go to play basketball?

T：Sorry，you have to stay in class.

S：Could I please draw pictures?

T：Yes，you can.

After that，get several groups to demonstrate their conversations to the class.

Step 13 Homework

1. Suppose you are having a party，and you need more drinks and snacks. But you can’t leave the house. Ask your classmates for help. Write a dialogue between you and your classmate with “Could I please ...?”and “Could you please ...?”

2. Understand，read and role play the conversation in 2d.

课堂作业

1. ---Could you please s the floor?

---Yes，sure.

2. ---Could you please do the d ?

---Sorry，I can’t. I have to do my homework.

3. 我每天早上都整理床铺。

I ________ the ________ every morning.

4. 我父母让我晚上不要在外面呆得太晚。

My parents asked me not to ________ ________ late at night.

5. Could I watch the football match? (作肯定回答)

________，you ________.

参考答案：1. sweep 2. dishes 3. make， bed 4. stay out 5. Yes，can.

教学反思

多媒体能使整个教学过程表现为声、图、文并茂，使声音、图像、文字的呈现更自然。为此，在课堂上，教师应该为学生创造学习氛围，让学生时常有成功感和成就感，以便进一步激发学生学习的内在动力。在本堂课中应注意让发音较标准的同学多朗读，让思维敏捷的同学先回答问题，让善于观察的同学多纠正错误，让反应慢的同学多回答低难度问题。尽量使每个同学多动脑、多动口、多动手。

八年级仁爱英语下册教案篇3

教学目标

一、知识与技能

1.学习并掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

2.阅读短文获得正确信息的能力。

3.能够通过彼此交流了解歌曲、歌手、乐队的信息并能作评论。能够运用阅读策略来获得文章大意。

4. 掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

5. 培养学生的听力能力。

二、过程与方法

阅读，感受，模仿，实践。

三、情感态度与价值观

激发学生对音乐的热爱。

教学重点

1.学习并掌握现在完成时的用法，学习有关音乐的词汇。

2.阅读短文获得正确信息的能力。

教学难点

能够运用阅读策略来获得文章大意，从而提高阅读效率。

教法导航

激励学生认真阅读，认真思考。

学法导航

通过阅读，模仿学习新知识。

教学准备

图片，多媒体。

教学过程

Step 1 Greetings

Greet the students as usual.

Step 2 Warming up

Show some pictures about singers and musicians. Ask and answer：

Who is your favorite singer or musician? Why do you like him or her?

Step 3 New words

Learn the new words：pop，rock，band.

The students read the words one by one. Then they have a dictation.

Step 4 Listening

The students go through the sentences in 1b.

1b, Listen to a conversation between Alex and Dave. Write A for Alex and D for Dave next to each opinion.

____ The Toms must be popular.

____ The Toms play pop music.

____ The Toms’ music sounds more like rock.

____ Listening to The Toms is a good way to wake up.

1c, Listen again. Take notes.

Listen for a third time and check the answers.

Step 5 Speaking

1d, Ask your friends and parents what kind of music they listen to and why. How does the music make them feel?

Ask the students to make a conversation like：

A：What kind of music do you listen to?

B：I listen to pop music.

A：Why do you listen to it?

B：I like it because….

A：How does the music make them feel?

B：It makes me relaxed.

Step 6 Discussion & Reading

2a, Discuss the questions with a partner.

1.Do you have a favorite singer or band?

2. Do you have a favorite song?

3. What facts do you know about your favorite singer，band or song?

Reading guidance:

1. Read the passage and make notes or underline the main idea of the text.

2. After reading，write a short summary in your own words.

在讨论的过程中，教授新单词。

Step 7 Reading tasks

Read the passage and complete the fact sheet.

Country Music Fact Sheet.

Where it is from：___________________

What kind of music it is：_____________

A famous country music place in Nashville：_______________

A famous country music singer：____________

The number of records he has sold：_____________

2c Read the passage again and underline the main ideas. Then use the underlined text to write short answers to the questions below.

First paragraph：

Who is Sarah? Where is she from? What does she like?

Second paragraph：

What is country music? What is country music about?

Third paragraph：

What is Sarah’s dream? Who is Garth Brooks?

Step 8 Writing

2d, Use the notes you made in 2c to write a short summary of the passage. Write no more than 100 words.

示例：

Sarah is an American girl. She likes country music. She is a fan of country music. Country music is a traditional music from the southern states of America. Many songs are about modern life in the US，such as the importance of money and success. Sarah’s dream is to go to Nashville because Garth Brooks is there. She likes to listen to his songs. Garth is one of the most successful musicians in American history.

课堂作业

1. Ask the students to write the following phrases and words.

used to过去常常 fight over争吵 return home回家

on the radio在收音机上 make sb. do sth.使某人做某事 think about考虑

come to realize逐渐认识到 ever since自从…以来

the home of…的家 such as例如 belong to属于

be kind to sb.对某人友好 trust one another互相信任 remind sb. that…使某人想起

have been to去过 do research on研究 hope to do sth. 希望做某事

2. 单选题

1. ---Where is John?

---He ______ the science lab.

A. has gone to B. has been to C. went to

2. ---Where is my sister， mum?

---She ___ to the library. She will be back soon.

A. has been B. is going C. has gone D. will go

3. ---May I speak to Lin Tao?

---Sorry，he is not in.

---He ______ to Changsha.

A. has been B. has gone C. went

参考答案：1. A 2. C 3. B

教学反思

教师一定要想办法使阅读课变得生动有趣，并且教授给学生一定的阅读策略。另外，掌握住“practice makes perfect”的原则，使学生在训练中逐步掌握本课的重点。

八年级英语下册课件【篇6】

I'm sorry, as an AI language model, I cannot provide you the specific courseware content of "人教版八年级下册英语课件". However, I can give you a sample English essay on a related topic with keywords: "teenagers", "challenges and opportunities", and "technology".

Title: The Challenges and Opportunities of Technology for Teenagers

The world we live in today is dramatically different from the previous generations. With the development of technology, the way we communicate, learn, and interact with the world has changed significantly. Teenagers, in particular, are facing a unique set of challenges and opportunities as they adapt to this digital age. While technology offers many benefits, it also brings a range of new obstacles. This essay intends to discuss the challenges and opportunities that technology presents to teenagers.

First, the advancement of technology has made communication more accessible than ever before. Social media, messaging services, and video calls provide teenagers with new ways to connect with their family and friends regardless of distance. However, this endless connectivity has also created a never-ending stream of information that can cause distraction and addiction. Many teenagers struggle with balancing their online and offline life, leading to negative impacts on their mental health.

In addition, technology has revolutionized the education system. Students can access diverse resources online and receive personalized learning opportunities. Many schools are adopting digital platforms to enhance student engagement and academic performance. However, the digital divide also exists in some areas and can lead to unequal access to education. Moreover, the temptation to cheat or plagiarize with readily available online resources is a real issue for students, which can diminish the value of their degrees and future prospects.

Another significant challenge teenagers face is cyberbullying. Social media platforms provide users with anonymity and a broader reach than traditional bullying. Online harassment can lead to significant emotional distress, social isolation, and even suicidal thoughts. The psychological and long-term effects of cyberbullying are severe and cannot be overlooked.

Despite the challenges, technology offers plenty of opportunities for teenagers. It has made entertainment options more accessible, giving teenagers a chance to explore their creative talents and interests. Social media also provides a platform for young people to voice their opinions, participate in discussions, and engage in activism. Online communities can provide valuable support, resources, and mentorship for teenagers who may feel isolated.

In conclusion, technology provides teenagers with a variety of challenges and opportunities. It has influenced how they communicate, learn, and express themselves. While technology presents many benefits, it is vital to recognize the risks that come with it and educate teenagers on how to use it responsibly. By understanding the challenges and opportunities that technology offers, we can ensure that teenagers navigate this digital age safely and successfully.

最新八年级英语上册课件精品

相信我们大家都是有读过一些范文的，学生多看一些范文对学习帮助很大，阅读范文可以让我们进行无声的思考与交流。多阅读范文还会帮助到我们学习的各个方面，您知道关于优秀范文的书写需要注意哪些方面？以下是小编为大家收集的“最新八年级英语上册课件精品”欢迎阅读，希望您能够喜欢并分享！

八年级英语上册课件 篇1

1.掌握如何礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请：Canyou come to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请，礼貌地与人交流。

礼貌地发出、接受、拒绝邀请。Can youcome to my party? Yes, I’d love to. / Sorry, I can’t. today,tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, next week, lesson,invitation

根据日程表中的计划安排自己的活动并对邀请做出适当回答。

1.动画导入，激发学生的学习兴趣：

教师可先播放一段有关“聚会”的动画，激发学生的学习兴趣并导入新知。

2.完成任务，合作学习：

教师可以给学生布置以下任务，让学生在完成任务的过程中掌握所学的知识。

任务一：Planning abirthday party.

让学生以小组为单位为某位同学筹备一个集体生日聚会，讨论在生日聚会上大家可以做哪些活动并列出清单。

任务二：Writing aninvitation card.

学生以小组为单位展开活动，制作邀请卡向其他组的同学发出邀请，请他们来参加本组的集体生日聚会。注意邀请卡的用词和基本格式。

学生以小组为单位开展活动。假设班上要组织一次野餐活动，一个学生为组织者，询问组员并统计本组参加的人数及不参加的原因，并做好记录。

完成任务可能要用到的语言结构：

We are going to have apicnic. Can you come?

When is it going tostart?

I’m sorry. I haveto....

3.拓展学习：

学生设计假期某一周的日程安排。在设计的过程中，要尽可能合理安排好学习、休闲娱乐等各项活动，并留出一些空余时间。要注意有自己的特色，能联系拓展所学的知识。

可从以下三个方面来考查学生的学习情况，并将学生学习的评价融入到教学过程中。

①课堂参与情况：积极主动，声音响亮，较流畅地用英语表达自己要说的话。

③知识掌握情况：是否已经掌握了所学的知识，并能很好地运用。

have a rest play there bebe busy practice be free listen to

1. Can they XXXXXXXXXXthe music in the classroom?

2. I’m sorry. TomorrowI’m XXXXXXXXXX soccer and having a math lesson.

3. He has got a badheadache. Let himXXXXXXXXXXXXXX.

八年级英语上册课件 篇2

Teaching aims and demands:

1)      To train the students’ ability of reading

2)      To talk about some famous actors, actresses and directors

3)      To learn something about Steven Spielberg

Teaching focuses and difficulties:

1)      To understand the passage

2)      To learn something from Steven Spielberg

Teaching procedures:

Free talk with the students and enjoy some pictures.(films/ actors/actresses/directors)

Listen to the tape and tick the things that are mentioned in the passage.

Oscar (   )   birth year (   )   Sophie’s Choice (   )   Schindler’s List (   )

Speed (   )    Schooling (   )     The Matrix (   )    Film Academy (   )

marriage and family (   )    ET (   )

multiple choice :

1)      How many of Steven Spielberg’s moives are mentioned in the passage_______?

2)      When he was young, Steven Spielberg took English as his major______.

A. because it was his dream           B. because he didn’t do very well at school

C. in order to get a job in a film studio   D.because English is his mother tongue

3)      The phrase “take off”( in Para2 ) has the same meaning as the one in “_______.”

A.      The plane was crashed soon after it took off

B.      He took off his hat and said hello to me

C.      After Meryl Streep won her first Oscar as Best Actress, her career really took off

D.     When his wife was sick in hospital, he took off from work

4)      What can be inferred (推断) from the passage______?

A.      All of Spielberg’s films are real blockbusters

B.      If you learn English well, you will succeed

C.     Behind every successful man there must be a great woman

D.     Hard work and perseverance (坚持不懈) is the way to success

5)      What do you think of Steven Spielberg______?

A. He’s brave            B. He doesn’t work hard

C. His grades were low    D. He has a gift (天赋) for directing films

1. Discussion: “When asked about the secret of his success, Steven Spielberg said that he owes

much of his success and happiness to his wife and children.” What does he mean? Make a choice and then explain why.

(  ) He wants to thank his family because he has little time to be with them.

(  ) His family’s support helped his career take off.

(  ) His wife gave up her own career just for him.

(  ) Others:_________________________________________________.

2. Summary: What can we learn from Steven Spielberg?

Assignment:

Write a passage about one of your favorite film stars.

八年级英语上册课件 篇3

【学习目标】

1.学生学会形容词或副词比较级形式的构成及两者进行比较的一些常用词汇与句型。

2.通过听对人物的外表进行描绘、个性进行比较的对话，学生学会怎样就两者进行比较。

3.学生学会用比较级进行信息交流，增强自信心，多交益友，快乐生活，快乐学习。

【学习重点】

用所学的功能语言交流如何运用比较级描绘人物的外貌与个性。

【学习难点】

学习形容词和副词比较级的用法

Learning action tips：Accordingto the actual situation of the students in class, create scene to lead in the new course by the way of teacher and student\'squestion and answer：

—Which one is more hard­working at their lessons? —Lisa is.

And revise the adjectives about describing the appearance and personalityof a person.

Learning action tips: Preview the words on Page17-18 in the word list. Students read the words by phonetic symbols, thenunderline new words in the text and mark the Chinese meaning. At last finish thetask in 1a.

【知识链接】

clearly adv.清楚地;清晰地;明白地

【拓展】

形容词后加上­ly常构成副词。eg：loud→loudly;quiet→quietly;serious→seriously;usual→usually;different→differently;real→really

friendly adj.友好的

(1)friendly的比较级是more friendly。

(2)be friendly to sb.对某人友好的。

【拓展】

某些名词后加上­ly可构成形容词。eg：month→monthly;mother→motherly;week→weekly;day→daily情景导入　生成问题

1.T：Whatdo you think of your best friend?

S：________________________________________________________________________

2.T：Isshe taller than you?

S：________________________________________________________________________

自学互研　生成能力

Task1　Let\'sread the new words and the phrases.

1.I can read.(我会读)

outgoing，better，loudly，quietly，hard­working，competition，fantastic，which，clearly，win，though

2.I can write.(我会写)

翻译下列短语：

(1)敲鼓play__the__drums　(2)长(短)头发long(short)__hair

(3)更外向more__outgoing　(4)和……一样努力work__as__hard__as

(5)起得早get__up__early　(6)跑得快run__fast

(7)歌咏比赛the__singing__competition

(8)最主要的事情the__most__important__thing

(9)学到新东西learn__something__new　(10)玩得高兴have__fun

3.I can summarize.(我会总结)

形容词和副词比较级的变化规则：

(1)一般的在词尾加er

(2)以不发音的字母e结尾的词尾加r

(3)以一个辅音字母结尾的重读闭音节，先双写这个辅音字母再加er

(4)以辅音字母加y结尾先改y为i再加er

(5)多音节和部分双音节词在该词前面加more

(6)不规则的变化需要我们用心记忆

写出下列形容词或副词的比较级。

(1)long longer (2)short shorter 　(3)nice nicer (4)early earlier

(5)big bigger (6)hot hotter (7)thin thinner (8)easy easier

(9)quietly more__quietly(10)beautiful more__beautiful(11)good better

Task2　Let\'slisten to the tape and finish 1b，2a，2b.

Task3　Makeconversations an interview.

1.I can practice.(我会练)

A：Peter，(1)is__that__Paul?

B：No, that\'s Tom. Paul is thinner thanTom.

And he also (2)has__longer__hair(更长的头发)than Tom.

A：Oh，(3)can__they__sing?

B：Yes, they can sing well.

A：(4)Who__can__sing__better，Paul or Tom?

B：Tom sings better than Paul…

win

v.获胜;赢;赢得

n.winner 获胜者

【辨析】

win与beat

两者均可作动词，意为“赢”，但用法不同：

(1)win(won，won)后接比赛、竞赛、战斗、奖品、钱等名词。

(2)beat(beat，beaten)后接竞争对手。

【导练】

(1)我们的队赢得了篮球比赛。Our team won the basketball match.

(2)昨天乒乓球比赛我打败了内莉。I beat Nelly at ping­pong yesterday.

八年级英语上册课件 篇4

Lesson 13

Teaching Objectives:

1. Master the comparative and superlatives of adverbs.

2. the comparative forms of long adjectives.

Language Focus:

fast － faster － the fastest well － better － the best interesting － more interesting get home have to kinds of feed, to give food to

Properties: Tape recorder, overhead projector, flash动画

Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Revise be going to.

Ask individual students to open the door, close the window and do other classroom duties. As they stand up to obey, ask What are you going to do? Then ask the class What is he/she going to do?

Step 2 Presentation

Showing the picture of a farm by the overhead projector.

Ask What is this? What can you see on the farm? What kind of work is there on the farm?

Let the students to talk about the farm.

生活在农村的学生，可以让他们谈谈自己的农场情况，有多少种动物，农场的生活情况。

Step 3 Read and act

Get the students to look at the picture on page 16 and describe it.

Teach the new words about the animals on the farm.

Play the tape for the students to listen and ask How many kinds of animals are there on the farm?

Explain the language points:

have to, the plural form of sheep.

Explain the comparative of long adjectives. Give more examples, “My coat is beautiful. Her coat is more beautiful than mine.”

Play the tape again for the students to listen and repeat.

Have them work in pairs to practise the dialogue. Then ask some pairs to act it out in front of the class.

Step 4 Presentation

Call three students to the front and say, “Mary works hard. Lisa works harder than Mary. Lucy works harder than Lisa. Lucy works hardest of the three.”

Say another group of sentences and get the students to repeat, “Linda gets up early. Kate gets up earlier than Linda. Green gets up earliest of all.”

Step 5 Read and learn

Showing the students the picture of Part 2. Let them to describe the pictures with the comparative and superlatives of adverbs

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat and check their answer.

Step 6 Exercise

Complete the sentences.

1. 我母亲的工作是照看孩子们。

My ______ ______ is ______ ______ ______ ______.

2. 你在家得做些什么？

What ______ you ______ to ______ at ______?

3. 让我帮助你喂鸡。

______ me ______ you ______ the chickens.

4. 吉姆在他们班上每天早晨到校最迟。

Mike ______ ______ school ______ ______ in their class every morning.

Answers:

1.mother’s job, to look after children 2.do, have, do, home 3.Let, help, feed 4.gets to, the latest

Step 7 Homework

1. Make a group of sentences to compare things.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 13wait sheephave to tractorfeed the animals slowmore interesting slower

教案点评：

利用幻灯片打出农场的图片，让学生了解农场导入本课关于谈论农场的对话的教学，通过图片的描述教学副词比较级。

Lesson 14

1． 教学目标；

（1）使学生掌握本课重点词组和单词：agree with, in winter, in summer, hear doing, play with.

（2）使学生掌握形容词和副词的比较级和最高级的用法和句型

Which do you like better, A or B? I like A better than B.

Which do you like best, A, B or C? I like A best.

（3）使学生学会介绍和比较中美两国农场的差别。

2．教具：Recorder and pictures.

3．教学过程：

Step 1 Revision

（1）写出下列单词的形容词和副词的比较级和最高级形式：High ,bright, interesting, good, beautiful, delicious, fast.

（2）出示图一：教师根据图片进行提问：

What kind of sport is it?

Which one is riding faster?

Which one is riding the fastest?

出示图片二：Who is taller? Who is the tallest in the three?

Which one is running faster?

Which one is running the fastest?

Is the second sport man running quickly?

Who is younger? Who is the youngest?

Which sports do you like better, the cycling or the running?

（3）复习第13课的对话，让学生回答以下问题：

Where do Ji Wei and Jone live?

What kind of animals are on Ji Wei’s farm?

What kind of work does he do then?

Step 2 Leading - in

Show students pictures of farms in China and America. They talk about the pictures first, then talk about the questions given in pre - reading in small groups. Teacher calls one group to do it as a model.

Step 3 Presentation

Part 1 Pre –read

（1）Show students a picture of a crowded city to teach the word “city” and a picture of countryside to teach “the country”. Draw a tractor on the blackboard and teach the word “tractor”. Ask them where people use that. Help them to say “in the country” or “in the field” or “on the farm”. Imitate the sound and teach the word “bleat”. Use a picture to teach “lake” and ask them what people can do in a lake, help them to answer “in summer, we can swim, or go fishing; in winter, We can skate on the ice.”

（2）让学生就书上的问题分组进行讨论。教师可以进行巡视指导。

（3）教师检查一组学生的讨论结果。

Part 2 Read

（1）Students read the article silently and answer questions

1. What’s the difference between Ji Wei’s farm and John’s farm?

2. Which play does Ji Wei like better, the city or the country? Why?

3. How about John?

4. Who is Cody? Say sth about Cody.

（3）学生阅读课文并找出课文中的生词和难点。教师进行讲解。

agree with, hear sb doing sth …

（4）教师让学生把这两个农场进行比较.总结相同点和不同点.

Chinese farm American farm

Small, grow more rice than American Big, grow more corn than Chinese, have more tractors and machines, have more animals

Step 4 Practice

（1）教师讲解句型：

Which do you like better A or B? I like A better than B.

Which do you like best A，B，or C ? I like A best 。

学生通过例子比较两个句型的区别。一组句型是两者这比较，另一组句型是三者这相比较。

教师可以出示一些实物如足球，篮球，排球等或红白蓝等颜色使用上句型进行叙述。

（2）Write the topic “The city or the country” on the blackboard for the students to discuss in pairs. (They may read the dialogue in the book as a model) Encourage students to use dictionaries to help them add new reasons. Point out “lots of” means “ a lot of, many.”

（3）教师出示媒体动画，学生根据媒体动画对画面进叙述，教师先只让学生看字幕和图，要求学生自己配上旁白。也可以先让学生看一遍内容然后再叙述。然后学生不再看字幕只看画面进行叙述。

Step 5 Exercise

1. Fill in the blanks.

I have a good friend who lives ① the farm.

He has many ② there, dogs, pigs, cows, etc. He uses a ③ to do the farm work , because it works faster and better. He don’t have to ④ the animals because they can find food themselves. He thinks the country is ⑤ (beautiful) than the city. He can hear the birds ⑥ and sheep ⑦ . And he often play ⑧ his dogs.

2. Compare the two farms, and two boys.

Ji Wei’s parents grow ① and ② , John’s parents grow ③ and ④ . Ji Wei likes to sit and looks at the ⑤ and ⑥ . John likes to sit and listens to ⑦ . John’s farm has a ⑧ where he often goes ⑨ in summer and ⑩ in winter.

Answers: 1. ①on ② animals ③ tractor ④feed ⑤ more beautiful ⑥) singing ⑦ bleating ⑧ with

2. ① rice ② wheat ③ corn ④ wheat ⑤blue sky ⑥ the green hills ⑦ the animals ⑧ lake ⑨ fishing ⑩skating

Step 6 Homework

（1）要求学生完成教科书90页第一题和第三题。

（2）把课文改编成一个对话

（3）To write out the article “The city or the country.”

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 14Li Wei’s farm John’s farm

use a tractor Use animals

like to sit and look at… Go fishing…

教案点评：

通过谈论运动图片复习副词比较等级的运用，展示图片引入关于中美两国农场的比较，让学生总结其特点，最后让学生谈论他们对农村和城市的看法。

Lesson 15

Teaching Objectives:

掌握形容词与副词的比较级与最高级句型的运用。

Language FOCUS:

help sb with sth like doing sth.

Eating too much is bad for you

Properties: Overhead projector, recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

1. To talk about the country life.

2. Revise the comparative and superlative forms of adjectives like interesting, beautiful, etc.

Step 2 Compare

Showing the students the pictures to compare. Saying:

The car goes faster than the bike.

The train goes faster than the car.

The plane goes faster than the train.

So the plane goes fastest of all.

Ask Who works carefully in class? Help the students to answer Jim works carefully. Ask Who works more carefully than Jim? Help the students to answer Kate works more carefully than Jim. Ask Who works the most careful of all? Help the students answer Lucy works the most carefully of all.

Write the model on the blackboard

The car runs faster than the bike.

The train runs faster than the car.

The plane runs the fastest of all

Get some pairs to present their sentences.

Step 3 Practise

Students talk about the farm work they can do, write the jobs on the board “feed the animal, pick corn (wheat, etc), grow corn (wheat, etc)” Then they talk about who can do the most work, use the dialogue in the book as a model.

Give more phrases for them to use “have books” “get home early” “eat much” “run fast” “have a good time”, etc.

Step 4 Read and complete

Students do the exercise themselves and then check the answers

(The answers: older, exciting, beautiful, quickly, better, faster, longer, interesting)

Then explain some words and phrases, point out the comparative and superlative forms of adverbs ending with “ly” are “more + adverbs” and “most + adverbs”.

Step 5 Exercise in class

Complete the sentences

1. 公共汽车和轿车，哪个开得快？轿车。

Which goes__________ ______, the car or the bus? The car_______.

2. 所有人当中，我摘的玉米最多。

I can pick ________ ________ corns of ______.

3. 她喜欢住在乡下。

She likes ______ ______ the country.

4. 迈克经常读书到深夜。

Mike often reads ______ ______ ______ ______.

5. 我认为住在城市比城镇有趣得多。

I think ______ in the city is ______ ______ ______ than in the town.

6. 她经常帮她阿姨干农活。

She often ______ her aunt ______ the farm work.

Answers: 1.more quickly, does 2.the most, all 3.living in 4.until late at night 5.living, much more interesting 6.helps, with/do

Step 6 Homework

1. Preview new lessons.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 15 more the quickest the earliest The car runs faster than the bike. The train runs faster than the car. The plane runs the fastest of all

教案点评：

本课主要是以学生练习为主，通过图片展示让学生进行比较等级的训练。

Lesson 16

Teaching Objectives:

掌握比较级的用法；

掌握元音/u: / /u//uE/的发音。

Language FOCUS:

/u: / u, oo /u/ u, oo, oul /uE/ ure, ua,

What are you going to do after you leave school?

Properties: Tape recorder, pictures

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Revise the comparison of adverbs.

My mother usually gets up earlier than my father.

My father gets up earlier than I.

So my mother gets up the earliest of all.

Step 2 Spelling and pronunciation

Play the tape for students to listen and repeat, then ask students to practise the pronunciations of these words.

Use flashcards to give more words. Get them to practise the words.

Step 3 Rhyme

Play the tape for students to repeat and recite.

Read the chant together as a class.

Then divide the class into two groups to practise the chant.

Step 4 Listening

Play the tape for the students to listen. First make sure the students understand the meaning of the passage.

Then play the tape again and answer the questions.

Step 5 Word puzzle

First explain the word haystack means a large pile of hay firmly packed for storing.

Then students find out the words in pairs.

Step 6 Reading

Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask What is John going to do after he leaves school?

Students read the text silently and ask them for the main idea of the passage.

Play the tape again and answer the following questions.

1. Where are Ji Wei and John now?

2. What are they talking about?

3. Where did they do just now?

4. What is John going to do after school? After college?

5. What does he want to learn at college?

6. Who is following them?

Explain some difficult point “college, school for higher education”, “each, every” nobody, not anybody, not anyone .

Step 7 Writing

Showing the students the picture of Aunt Peggy’s farm. Get them to look at the picture carefully. First have them talk about the picture. Then have them write one paragraph about the picture individually.

Step 8 Checkpoint

Revise the adjectival and adverbial comparatives and superlatives.

Read the useful expressions.

Step 9 Exercise in class

Complete the words, using the proper words.

Different people have different ideas.

O______ people like life in the country, but y______ people don’t. They think life in the country isn't i ______. They like to go to the c______, have dinner in the r______ and s______ and dance with their friends.

My uncle and my a______ aren't f ______, but they live in the country. They grow f______ and vegetables for f ______. Every morning they will walk r ______ the fields. They can hear b ______ singing and sheep bleating. They often say, “Life in the country is much b______ now.”

Answers: Old, young, interesting, cinema, restaurant, sing, aunt, farmers, fun, round, birds, better.

Step 10 Homework

1. To write out the description of the picture.

2. Write one passage about the city or the farm you live.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 16 What is John going to do after he leaves school?(Go to college.)

八年级英语上册课件 篇5

1、教材的地位及作用：

第二册第六单元第一节课，本单元围绕Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?这个题材开展多种教学活动，它与上一单元联系紧密，是它的延续。本节课是本单元的重点。通过学习的Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?进一步加深对询问/指点方向的语法现象的理解和运用。同时通过Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在陈述句与疑问句中的操练，进一步提高学生听、说、读、写综合素质能力。

知识目标：

(1)学习、掌握Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?

(2)学习单词bank, theatre … 。

能力目标：提高学生听、说、读、写及知识自学的综合能力。

确立教学目标的依据：

根据英语教学大纲规定，通过听、说、读、写的训练，使学生获得英语基础知识和为交际初步运用英语的能力，激发学生的学习兴趣，为进一步学习打好初步的基础。此外，根据我国国情和外语教学大纲的要求，现阶段外语教学的素质教育主要包括思想素质教育、目的语素质教育、潜在外语能力的培养、非智力因素的培养等四方面。

3、重点与难点：

重点：学习询问/指点方向Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?

难点：句型Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在实际生活中的应用。

确立重点与难点的依据：

根据教学大纲的要求，及本课在教材中所处的地位和作用。

二、教材处理：

根据以上对教材的分析，同时针对中国学生学习外语存在一定困难的实际情况。首先给学生创造外语语言氛围，身临其境地把学生带到街区里。同时激发学生学习兴趣，使学生在参与询问/指点方向的一系列活动中，掌握知识。最后通过做游戏对学生所学知识点进行训练，从而达到巩固知识的目的。

三、教学方法：

通过五步教学法，精讲巧练，由浅入深，由易到难，由已知到未知，循序渐进地深化教学内容。展开以教师为主导，以学生为主体的师生双边活动。

四、教学手段：

主要以现代化电教手段--多媒体辅助教学，贯穿整个教学过程。增加了直观性和趣味性，加大了课堂密度，提高了教学效果。

为了激发学生的学习兴趣，引起注意，拉近师生距离，首先告诉学生这节课我将带他们去一个有趣的地方，并请他们依据我的提示猜测要去哪里?当学生猜出去农场时， 我们便“上车”， 一路欢歌去农场。随着“嘎”的刹车声，电脑打出农场全景， 给学生一种身临其境的感觉，导入正课。

本课利用多媒体教学手段展示了一幅幅色彩逼真、形象生动的画面，配有汽车声、动物的叫声，栩栩如生。以学生在街区问路为主线，通过询问/指点方向的句型Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?在一系列既关联又相对独立的语境中详细讲解，反复演练，使学生全面掌握。其中多媒体展示的动画部分更具特色，充分地调动了学生的积极性，吸引了全体学生的注意力，达到了教育教学目的，培养学生思想素质、情感素质和英语语言素质。

为了调动学生的积极性，利用Work in threes,in pairs,in row,in group,及Boys ask,Girls answer等多种不同方式操练巩固。使学生处于积极思维的状态之中，全方位、多角度培养学生运用英语的能力。

本课的又一次高潮是将游戏与练习有机结合，融为一体。设计15个街区模型，让一对对学生上街 问路，并配有本课的重点Where’s the … ? It’s next to the … ?使学生在玩中进一步体会到句型Where’s the … ?It’s next to the … ?在实际生活中的运用。学生通过转轮，边做游戏边做练习，寓教于乐，极大地激发学生学习兴趣，同时巩固了学生所学的知识。

本课除了板书所呈现的重点内容外，又把本课内容浓缩成韵律诗形式，巧妙地总结本课重点、难点，学生又通过优美的旋律、音韵动听的节奏。进一步巩固，加强对本课内容的理解和运用。

Language points:

1. Look at the picture.

look at 看 look through 查看 look up 向上看 look out 向外看 look over复习

2.the post office.

合成词：(1)写成一个单词：bookshop. (2) 写成开放式：post office (3) 用连字符连接：pencil-box.

5. excuse me 的用法：

6. Thank you all the same.

教学评价是整个教学过程中的一个不可分割的重要组成部分。本课是在《新课程标准》理念指导下的较能体现“自主、合作、探究”的学习方式，它较之传统教学方式相比有一个很大的区别--能使每一个学生都能积极地参与到课堂学习及课外活动中去。与之同时，带来的问题是：人是千差万别的.，每个人接受知识、获取知识的方式与快慢都有可能与别人存在明显的差异，这是客观存在的现象，更是完全自然的现象，这也就决定了在学习成效上存在明显的差别。有的学生发展较快，有的学生发展较慢，教师如果用一把尺子来量每一个学生所取得的成绩，势必是不合理、不科学的。为此，教师要对每一个学生的实际水平与课堂中在小组中的表现作深入的了解，为他们定一个“水平线”，并坚信每一个学生都能在原有基础上超越这条线，只要有点滴的进步，哪怕是隐性的，也要给予大张旗鼓的表扬与激励，让他们充分体验合作的乐趣，充分享受成功带来的快感。这样的评价，比量化的评价更有效果，比一刀切的评价更有针对性与实际意义;这样的评价，可以激起部分学生再接再厉，可以燃起部分学生“奋发”的欲望;这样的评价，不一定要形成文字，只要教师心中有一把可长可短的尺子。

本课以“小组合作学习”，作为一种教学方法、教学模式，绝不是一种简单的形式，不应该成为一种外部强加的过程，而应该是一个内部需要的自然过程。“合作”二字，对于未来的社会、二十一世纪的人才而言，是必需的;“小组合作学习”，对于未来的课堂可能更是必需的。因此，我们必须对其作一些思考，哪怕只是瀚海中的一朵小小的浪花，也是有价值的。

由于缺少经验，在教学过程中难免会出现不足，敬请各位老师不吝赐教。

八年级英语上册课件 篇6

本学期的英语教学主要以围绕培养学生的语言运用能力的同时，更加重视培养学生的语言学习策略和技能，这些策略和技能是帮助学生进一步学好英语的基础，让学生掌握了一定语言运用技巧后，能够学会用英语表达思想、与人交流。

本学期教材设计具有交际意义的任务和活动，目的是让学生在课堂上“活起来，“动”起来，希望学生充分参与，能够与老师合作。

教材分析：

本套教材根据学生心理特点、认知水平和兴趣爱好来编写。

1、教材不仅帮助学生学习英语语言知识，更重要的是帮助学生发展语言运用能力，让学生学会用英语表达思想、学会交流。

2、教材充分考虑学生的生活实际和学习需要，教材的内容和活动都与学生的生活和兴趣紧密相连，目的是让学生在英语学习中不感到枯燥乏味，而是有话可说、有话想说、有活能说。

3、教材进一步丰富了文化教学的内容，包括民族文化。英语国家的文化和非英国国家的文化。通过文化内容的.学习，使学生视野更开阔，思想更丰富，思维更活跃，交流更得体。

学情分析：

八年级学生，总体基础明显参差不齐，有几个学生根本没有学习目标，一两个完全放弃学习，纪律不够好，这成了班级英语成绩的总体提高的拦路虎。另外，学生在情感态度、学习策略等方面还存在诸多需要进一步解决的问题。例如：很多学生不明确英语学习的目的;有些学生在学习中缺乏小组合作意识;大多数同学没有养成良好的学习习惯，不能做好课前预习课后复习，学习没有计划性和策略性;不善于发现和总结语言规律。

教学重难点：

重点： 继承学习词汇和习惯用语，语法知识点：频率副词、询问情况、方式状语、提出邀请、形容词比较级、最高级等。 重难点：

1、状语从句和形容词。

2、Wh-引导的特殊疑问句，表示频率的副词，情态动词should/shouldnt的用法，When 引导的状语从句，被动语态。

教学措施：

1、认真钻研教材，提高自己驾驭教材的能力。

2、准确引导优秀生，抓好中等生，辅导好学困生。

3、作业批改到位，发现问题及时反溃或单独辅导。

4、认真备课，认真上课，尽量提高课堂的效率。

5、要求学生背诵并默写部分对话，培养语感。

6、认真贯彻晨读制度：规定晨读内容，加强监督，保证晨读效果。

八年级英语上册课件 篇7

Section A

一、主要词汇：

consequence, jeans, let in, organize, bike, you’ll= you will

二、语言目标：

1. I think I’m going to stay at home. If you do, you’ll be sorry.

2. When is a good time to have the party?

3. I think I’ll ride my bike. If you do, you’ll be late.

4. I’m going to the school party.

三、语言结构：

1．If 引导的条件状语从句；

2．情态动词should的用法；

3．句型I think I’ll ride my bike. If you do, you’ll be late.

I think I’m going to stay at home. If you do, you’ll be sorry.

I’m going to the dance with Karen and Ann.

If you do, you’ll have a great time.

---Are you going to the party?

---Yes, I am. I’m going to wear my new jeans.

You should wear your cool pants.

四、学法向导

1． 学会讨论在某些条件下可能会产生的影响。即If you do, you’ll …等；

2． 注意条件状语从句中主句的从句的时态；

3． 了解参加晚会的一些基本常识；

4． 根据上下文培养理解能力和基本的逻辑思维能力。

五、教学过程

I 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

1a

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2.Point out the four pictures and ask students to tell what they see..

（教师）3. Ask two students to read the conversation in the speech bubbles in the first picture.

（教师）4. Say, Now read the statements and responses in the box. Match the statements with the responses you think make sense.

（教师）5. Answer any questions students may have about vocabulary.

（学生）6. Students match the statements and responses.

1b

（教师）1.Say, You will hear four conversations. Each conversation will give you the matching responses for one of the four sentences..

（教师）2. Play the recording. Say, Check your answers to activity 1a.

（教师）3.Talk about the answers together.

（答案）

1. d 2.a 3.b 4.c

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

A: I think I’m going to wear jeans to the party.

B: If you do, the teachers won’t let you in.

A: I think I’m going to stay at home.

C: If you do, you’ll be sorry.

A: I think I’m going to take the bus to the party.

B: If you do, you’ll be late.

D: I think I’m going to go to the dance with Karen and Ann.

C: If you do, you’ll have a great time.

1c

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Ask two students to read the example in the sample dialogue in activity 1c. Say, You will work with your partner. Make a conversation using the things that are happening in the picture.

（教师）3.Ask several pairs of students to say their conversations to the class.

II 放完第二段视频后，

① 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

2a

（教师）1.Read the instructions with the students.

（教师）2 Students complete the task.

（教师）3. Check the answers.

（答案）a. 3 b. 1 c.2 d.6 e.4 f.5

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

Andrea: Hi, Mark. I want to have a class party. Will you help me organize it?

Mark: Sure, Andrea. I can help you. So when shall we have the party?

Andrea: Let’s have it today after class.

Mark: No, today is too early. If we have it today, half the class won’t come.

Andrea: Okay, let’s have it tomorrow.

Mark: Hmm…There’s a test tomorrow. Students will leave early to study for their tests. Let’s have it on the weekend.

Andrea: Okay, let’s have it on Saturday afternoon. We can all meet and watch a video.

Mark: No, I don’t think we should watch a video. Some students will be bored. Let’s play party games.

Andrea: Okay, good idea. Can you organize the party games?

Mark: Sure, I can do that. And can you make some food for us?

Andrea: Yes, that’s no problem.

2b

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Play the recording again.

（学生）3. Students complete the task.

（教师）4. Check the answers.

（答案）

Half the class won’t come.

Students will leave early to study for their tests.

Some students will be bored.

Mark is going to organize the party games.

Andrea is going to make some food.

2c

（教师）1.Draw attention to the sample dialogue.

（学生）2. Students complete the task.

（教师）3. Check the answers.

② 全班讨论

Ask students to work in small groups. Ask each group to write down as many sentences like those in the Grammar Focus as they can. See which group can think of the most sentences. Count how many each group has. Have the groups read their sentences to the class. Write original sentences on the board and discuss the sentences with the class.

III 放完第三段视频后，

请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动（教师）1. Read the instructions. Point out the notice from the principal. Then point to the dialogue. Say, First read the notice from the principal. It is about a school party. Then fill in the blanks in the dialogue.

（教师）2.Ask different students to read one line each of the dialogue to the class..

（教师）3.Read the dialogue to the class saying blank each time you come to a blank line.

（教师）4. Then say, Now read the notice again and fill in the blanks.

（教师）5. As students work, move around the room offering help where needed.

（答案）

1. the school party

2. I’m going to

3. The teachers won’t let you in.

3b（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Point out the words in the box. Say, You will be using the words in this box and the notice from the principal to make conversations.

（教师）3. Ask two students to read the example in sample dialogue in activity 3b. Say, In your conversations, tell what will happen if the student does what he or she is planning to do. Ask students to give some possible ways to complete the last sentence in the example.

（教师）4. Say, Now have a conversation abut the rules with your partner.

（教师）5. Ask one or two pairs of students to say their conversations to the class.

4

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2.Ask two students to read the sample dialogue..

（教师）3. Ask another one or two students to suggest other charity events. Pick a topic of current interest in the news.

（教师）4. Ask students to complete the work in pairs.

.（教师）5. Ask a few students to share sample conversations.

注：黑色的斜体字是老师在课上组织教学时所用到的语言。

八年级英语上册课件 篇8

Section A

一、主要词汇：

surprise, skill, message, suppose, graduate, volunteer, experience, knowledge, border

report, pass, suppose, send, love, copy, aid, complete, gain

simple, thin, average, nervous, disappointing, true, lucky, mad, hard-working, lazy

二、语言目标：

1. He said he was mad.

2. She told me she would call me tomorrow.

3. He said he could speak three languages.

4. He said he was having a party for Lana.

三、语言结构：

1．直接引语与间接引语之间的转换；

2．掌握情态动词can 表示“能力”的用法‘

3．学会运用各种时态。

四、学法向导

1． 学会将直接引语转换为间接引语；

2． 学会用间接引语转述他人的话；

3． 各种时态要分清楚；

4． 形容词的用法。

五、教学过程

I 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

1a

（教师）1. Points to the TV screens in the picture and have students read the words in those TV screens.

（教师）2. Point to the four questions in the box and red the questions to the class again. Then help students form small groups. Say, Now answer these questions and talk about some soap operas.

（教师）3. After five minutes, talk about the questions with the whole class. Ask students from different groups to tell what they talked about in their group. Focus on the ideas the students are talking about. But sometimes when a student starts to tell what another student said, you can help that student make a sentence such as: Anna said she didn’t watch soap operas. Bill said people get mad on soap operas.

1b

（教师）1. Point to the TV screens in activity 1a one by one. Ask different students to look at each picture and tell what is happening.

（教师）2. Play the recording the first time. Students only listen.

（教师）3. Play the tape a second time. This time say, Now, write the numbers 1 through 4 in front of the pictures. Put a number 1 in front of the picture you hear first on the recording, and so forth.

（答案）The TV screens should be numbered in this order:

1 3 4 2

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said she was having a surprise party for Lana on Friday night.

Girl 1: What did Marcia say?

Girl 2: She said Lana thought she was coming to her house to study.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she was mad at Marcia.

Girl 1: What did Lana say?

Girl 2: She said she wasn’t going to Marcia’s house on Friday night.

1c

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You will be talking with your partner as you do this activity.

（教师）2. Ask two students to read the example in the sample dialogue. Then say, Now work with your partner. Ask and answer questions abut each picture in activity 1a.

（教师）3. As students talk, move around the room offering help as needed.

（教师）4.Ask several pairs of students to say a question and answer to the class.

II 放完第二段视频后，

① 请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动

2a

（教师）1. Point to the five sentences and ask different students to read the sentences to the class.

（教师）2.Point to and read the instructions to the class. Say, You will hear a conversation between two people who are talking about a soap opera on TV. Circle true or false after each statement.

（教师）3. Point out the sample answer. Say, This is statement tells what Ben said on the soap opera. The statement is true.

（教师）4. Play the recording .

（答案）5 4 1 3 2.

（听力材料原文答案）Tapescript

A: Did you see “Young Lives” last night?

B: No, what happened?

A: Well, Ben told Lana that Marcia was going to have a surprise party for her.

B: Really? What did Lana say?

A: Well, Lana was very excited. Lana told Ben that she would go to Marcia’s hose on Friday night after all.

B: Oh. Then what?

A: Marcia called everyone and told them she wasn’t going to have the party.

B: Oh, no!

A: Yeah, then Lana called Marcia and told her that she could bring some drinks and snacks to her house on Friday night.

B: Oh, wow…and what did Marcia say?

A: She told Lana she would be glad…

2b

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, This time you are going to circle the actual words people in the soap opera said. Point to the sentence after number 1 and read it to the class. Then point to the speech bubble in picture 1 and say, These are the words the actor in the soap opera said. Point to the sample answer. Say, Circle the correct word here..

（教师）2. Play the recording.

（答案）1. is 2. am 3. will 4. am 5. will

2c

（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2.Point out the pictures in activity 2b. Say, Use these words and pictures as you have your conversations.

（教师）3.Then have students work in pairs.

（教师）4.Check the answers by calling on different pairs to do one question and answer each..

② 全班讨论

Ask students to act out the situation shown in the pictures. Three students pretend to be Ben, Marcia, and Lana. Draw a large TV screen on the board and have these three students sit in front of it. Two other students pretend to be the two girls watching the soap opera on TV. They can sit on the floor. Ask the soap opera characters to read a line from activity 2b. Then have one of the girls report what that actor said. Repeat for all five pictures in activity 2b.

III 放完第三段视频后，

请本地教师组织教学，学生小组活动（教师）1. Read the instructions.

（教师）2. Read the article to the class, saying blank each time you come to a blank line.

（教师）3. Ask students to fill in the blanks on their own.

（答案）

1. was

2. thought

3. told

4. was

5. wasn’t

6. going

7. wasn’t

8. would

9. told

10. wasn’t

3b（教师）1. Read the instructions. Say, You can write anything you want. What do you think Ben and Lana and Marcia will do next?

（教师）2. Ask some students to read their episodes to the class..

4

（教师）1. Read the instructions. Students work in groups of four students.

（教师）2.Ask the students to complete the role pays on their own.

（教师）3. Ask a few students to show their role plays to the class.

注：黑色的斜体字是老师在课上组织教学时所用到的语言。

八年级英语上册课件 篇9

-第一学期 二次备课                                         三年级英语上册第三单元  Let’s paint 教学设计 第一课时 教学内容：A：Let’s learn, Let’s do, Let’s draw 教学目标： 1、能听说、认读blue, green, yellow, red, purple 这些表示颜色的单词。 2、 能听懂所接触的指示语，并能按照指示语做出相应的动作。 3、通过学生认读的方法给小丑涂色，并复习头部的部位和颜色的名称。 教学重点：学习表示颜色的单词blue, green, yellow, red, purple  教学难点：green一词的 gr 发音较难，教师要多带读。 教学准备： 1、教师和学生都准备红、黄、蓝、绿、紫色的蜡笔。 2、本课时录音带。 预习提纲：   1、对照单本图示，找出单词的汉语意思。 2、查找下列单词的汉语意思： face  nose  eyes  mouth  ear 教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、教师放hello 歌曲，师生同唱。 2、检查学生预习情况。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、教师出示彩笔，让学生了解颜色单词。学习颜色单词：教师出示蜡笔向学生介绍 This is a green crayon 之后，强调 green ，教师代读green 。其后，以此类推，教学blue 、yellow, red, purple。 2、用blue, green, yellow, red, purple 的单词卡片和颜色卡片再次讲授单词。学生适当跟读。 注意：green一词的发音较难，教师要多带读，引导学生感悟发音，从而了解英语的语音语调的知识。 3、让学生听录音，跟读Lets learn 部分的词汇，边听边读，边认读边指图，做到眼、手、口、耳、心的结合。 4、听录音，做Lets do 部分的游戏。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 做 Lets paint 部分的练习： 教师手中拿蜡笔，边说边演示，如：Colour the face yellow. 就将小丑的脸涂成黄色。演示时教师的动作要慢点，让学生看清楚，强调动作 Colour 。最后，教师指着句子，带读Colour the face  二次备课                                         yellow. ，让学生跟读的同时也指着自己书上的句子。最后边读边在 做动作。用同样的方法进行第二句。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。   第二课时 教学内容：A：Let’s talk, Let’s play, Let’s sing 教学目标： 1、能听懂、会说How are you?  Fine，thank you. 问候语，并能在实际情景中准确运用。要求模仿正确，语调自然。 2、通过创设实际情景，让学生能在相应的情景中准确运用以上句型。   3、学习本课时的有关颜色的.歌曲。 教学重、难点： 1、How are you? 的得体运用。 2、Fine, thank you.中 fine 一词字母 i 的发音不容易到位。 教学准备：本课时教学配套的录音带、预习提纲、限时作业 预习提纲：   1、问答练习连线 Good morning. Nice to meet you,too. Good  afternoon.  Good morning. Nice to meet you.  Good  afternoon. 2、观看图意，找出Miss Green,Mr Black,Miss White. 教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、师生同唱歌曲 Hello。教师可以边唱边用手势示意学生，将歌曲中的人名改为同班同学的名字。 2、进行预习展示。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、师生观看教学插图。利用课本插图，使学生一目了然，既了解了句型的含义，又了解句型运用的情景。 2、教师提问：Mr. Black 和Miss Green 是怎样用英语打招呼的。能力强的学生或学过英语的学生尝试性的说 How are you? Fine,  thank you. 二次备课                                         3、录音展示，学生听录音跟读对话。 4、做Lets play 部分的活动，教师让学生按教材的方法两人一小组的活动，两人相互击掌问好，如： S1: Hi/Hello/Good morning, A . How are you? S2: Im fine./Fine, thank you.  在同桌练习之后，两人一组练习。 5、学唱歌曲 Who is wearing yellow today? 方法为： 教师带读歌曲中的单词和句子。 教师带领学生边打节拍边说歌词。 听录音，试唱歌曲。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 学生分角色练习、表演Let’s talk部分对话。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。 第三课时 教学内容：B：Let’s learn, Let’s do, Let’s chant 教学目标： 1、 听说、认读white, black, brown, pink, orange这些表示颜色的单词。 2、能听懂本课时所接触的指示语，并做出相应的动作。 3、复习颜色单词，学习本课歌谣，进一步让学生了解英 语的语音语调。 教学重点：表示颜色单词white, black, brown, pink, orange的学习。 教学难点：white 一词中元音字母 i发的音不易到位，black, brown  的发音也较难，且学生不易区分。 教学准备： 1、 教师准备一个用硬纸壳制作的颜色转盘，和用硬纸壳制作的小雨伞。 2、 教师准备有颜色的纸板制作的指令牌。 预习提纲： 1、对照单本图示，找出单词的汉语意思。 2、Let’s chant部分，在同学或家长的指导下试读，将不懂的句子标记下来。 二次备课                                         教学过程 ： （一）Warm---up （热身及预习展示） 1、师生相互问候 T: Hello,/Hi,/Good morning,/Good afternoon, boys and girls. S: Hello,/Hi,/Good morning,/Good afternoon, teacher. T: How are you? S: Fine, thank you. 2、检查学生预习情况。 （二）Presentation and  practice（精讲点拨） 1、教师让学生拿出蜡笔和水彩笔，学习black, brown, pink,  orange 。方法：教师举起粉色水彩笔或蜡笔说：Pink, pink, this  is pink. 边说边举，边听边看，训练学生手、脑、口、心、眼协调统一的能力。注意 black, brown 的发音，适当提示，切忌盲目纠音。 2、利用颜色卡片，教师再次带读 white, black, brown, pink,  orange ，提示 white, black, brown 的发音。 3、学生听Lets learn 的录音，指着书上的图跟读。边说边指，边听边看，也训练了学生手、脑、口、心、眼协调统一的能力。 4、让学生听Lets do部分的录音，根据录音做动作，说到颜色时就手中举起蜡笔，左右会懂。 5、教师播放Lets chant部分的录音，学生试说。 （三）Consolidation and extension（拓展延伸） 游戏 BINGO  教师让学生将自己喜欢的9种颜色的蜡笔，按三行三列的方法摆在桌面上，教师任意说颜色，学生如果听到教师说到自己所摆的蜡笔的颜色，则在蜡笔上放一小张纸片，当摆出的纸片，有三个成为一条线时说：BINGO ，为游戏的胜利者。 （四）Sum-up（总结） 教师：我们这节课主要学习了什么内容？请学生回答总结。 （五）The limited―time  exercise （限时作业） 教师下发限时作业，请学生独立完成。 （六）Check and  explain（检查限时作业并反馈） 集体进行作业的讲评，学生相互交换进行批改，教师进行等级评价。 第四课时 教学内容：A：Let’s talk, Let’s play, Let’s check 教学目标：  1 、能听懂、会说表示赞成别人提议的感叹语Great！并能在实际情景中恰当的运用。 二次备课                                         2、复习巩固所学问候语、打招呼用语及自我介绍用语，并在 A 部分 Lets talk 会话学习的基础上，增加 Im fine. Thank you. / Very well,  thanks. 等对问候的多种回答语。 3、做本课的听力练习，训练听力的同时检查学生对本课内容的掌握情况。 教学重点：学习 Lets talk部分对话。 教学难点：表示赞成别人提议的感叹语Great！和 How are you?的答语 Very well, thanks. 的发音不易到位，教师要适当

八年级英语上册课件十二篇

教案课件是教师上课不可或缺的重要部分，现在是准备教案课件的时刻了。教案是教育教学工作的重要规范和标准，要如何写出令自己满意的教案课件呢？根据您的需求，我整理了以下信息：“八年级英语上册课件”。感谢您使用我们的网站，我们希望能够为您提供有价值的内容！

八年级英语上册课件(篇1)

Lesson 13

Teaching Objectives:

1. Master the comparative and superlatives of adverbs.

2. the comparative forms of long adjectives.

Language Focus:

fast － faster － the fastest well － better － the best interesting － more interesting get home have to kinds of feed, to give food to

Properties: Tape recorder, overhead projector, flash动画

Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Revise be going to.

Ask individual students to open the door, close the window and do other classroom duties. As they stand up to obey, ask What are you going to do? Then ask the class What is he/she going to do?

Step 2 Presentation

Showing the picture of a farm by the overhead projector.

Ask What is this? What can you see on the farm? What kind of work is there on the farm?

Let the students to talk about the farm.

生活在农村的学生，可以让他们谈谈自己的农场情况，有多少种动物，农场的生活情况。

Step 3 Read and act

Get the students to look at the picture on page 16 and describe it.

Teach the new words about the animals on the farm.

Play the tape for the students to listen and ask How many kinds of animals are there on the farm?

Explain the language points:

have to, the plural form of sheep.

Explain the comparative of long adjectives. Give more examples, “My coat is beautiful. Her coat is more beautiful than mine.”

Play the tape again for the students to listen and repeat.

Have them work in pairs to practise the dialogue. Then ask some pairs to act it out in front of the class.

Step 4 Presentation

Call three students to the front and say, “Mary works hard. Lisa works harder than Mary. Lucy works harder than Lisa. Lucy works hardest of the three.”

Say another group of sentences and get the students to repeat, “Linda gets up early. Kate gets up earlier than Linda. Green gets up earliest of all.”

Step 5 Read and learn

Showing the students the picture of Part 2. Let them to describe the pictures with the comparative and superlatives of adverbs

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat and check their answer.

Step 6 Exercise

Complete the sentences.

1. 我母亲的工作是照看孩子们。

My ______ ______ is ______ ______ ______ ______.

2. 你在家得做些什么？

What ______ you ______ to ______ at ______?

3. 让我帮助你喂鸡。

______ me ______ you ______ the chickens.

4. 吉姆在他们班上每天早晨到校最迟。

Mike ______ ______ school ______ ______ in their class every morning.

Answers:

1.mother’s job, to look after children 2.do, have, do, home 3.Let, help, feed 4.gets to, the latest

Step 7 Homework

1. Make a group of sentences to compare things.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 13wait sheephave to tractorfeed the animals slowmore interesting slower

教案点评：

利用幻灯片打出农场的图片，让学生了解农场导入本课关于谈论农场的对话的教学，通过图片的描述教学副词比较级。

Lesson 14

1． 教学目标；

（1）使学生掌握本课重点词组和单词：agree with, in winter, in summer, hear doing, play with.

（2）使学生掌握形容词和副词的比较级和最高级的用法和句型

Which do you like better, A or B? I like A better than B.

Which do you like best, A, B or C? I like A best.

（3）使学生学会介绍和比较中美两国农场的差别。

2．教具：Recorder and pictures.

3．教学过程：

Step 1 Revision

（1）写出下列单词的形容词和副词的比较级和最高级形式：High ,bright, interesting, good, beautiful, delicious, fast.

（2）出示图一：教师根据图片进行提问：

What kind of sport is it?

Which one is riding faster?

Which one is riding the fastest?

出示图片二：Who is taller? Who is the tallest in the three?

Which one is running faster?

Which one is running the fastest?

Is the second sport man running quickly?

Who is younger? Who is the youngest?

Which sports do you like better, the cycling or the running?

（3）复习第13课的对话，让学生回答以下问题：

Where do Ji Wei and Jone live?

What kind of animals are on Ji Wei’s farm?

What kind of work does he do then?

Step 2 Leading - in

Show students pictures of farms in China and America. They talk about the pictures first, then talk about the questions given in pre - reading in small groups. Teacher calls one group to do it as a model.

Step 3 Presentation

Part 1 Pre –read

（1）Show students a picture of a crowded city to teach the word “city” and a picture of countryside to teach “the country”. Draw a tractor on the blackboard and teach the word “tractor”. Ask them where people use that. Help them to say “in the country” or “in the field” or “on the farm”. Imitate the sound and teach the word “bleat”. Use a picture to teach “lake” and ask them what people can do in a lake, help them to answer “in summer, we can swim, or go fishing; in winter, We can skate on the ice.”

（2）让学生就书上的问题分组进行讨论。教师可以进行巡视指导。

（3）教师检查一组学生的讨论结果。

Part 2 Read

（1）Students read the article silently and answer questions

1. What’s the difference between Ji Wei’s farm and John’s farm?

2. Which play does Ji Wei like better, the city or the country? Why?

3. How about John?

4. Who is Cody? Say sth about Cody.

（3）学生阅读课文并找出课文中的生词和难点。教师进行讲解。

agree with, hear sb doing sth …

（4）教师让学生把这两个农场进行比较.总结相同点和不同点.

Chinese farm American farm

Small, grow more rice than American Big, grow more corn than Chinese, have more tractors and machines, have more animals

Step 4 Practice

（1）教师讲解句型：

Which do you like better A or B? I like A better than B.

Which do you like best A，B，or C ? I like A best 。

学生通过例子比较两个句型的区别。一组句型是两者这比较，另一组句型是三者这相比较。

教师可以出示一些实物如足球，篮球，排球等或红白蓝等颜色使用上句型进行叙述。

（2）Write the topic “The city or the country” on the blackboard for the students to discuss in pairs. (They may read the dialogue in the book as a model) Encourage students to use dictionaries to help them add new reasons. Point out “lots of” means “ a lot of, many.”

（3）教师出示媒体动画，学生根据媒体动画对画面进叙述，教师先只让学生看字幕和图，要求学生自己配上旁白。也可以先让学生看一遍内容然后再叙述。然后学生不再看字幕只看画面进行叙述。

Step 5 Exercise

1. Fill in the blanks.

I have a good friend who lives ① the farm.

He has many ② there, dogs, pigs, cows, etc. He uses a ③ to do the farm work , because it works faster and better. He don’t have to ④ the animals because they can find food themselves. He thinks the country is ⑤ (beautiful) than the city. He can hear the birds ⑥ and sheep ⑦ . And he often play ⑧ his dogs.

2. Compare the two farms, and two boys.

Ji Wei’s parents grow ① and ② , John’s parents grow ③ and ④ . Ji Wei likes to sit and looks at the ⑤ and ⑥ . John likes to sit and listens to ⑦ . John’s farm has a ⑧ where he often goes ⑨ in summer and ⑩ in winter.

Answers: 1. ①on ② animals ③ tractor ④feed ⑤ more beautiful ⑥) singing ⑦ bleating ⑧ with

2. ① rice ② wheat ③ corn ④ wheat ⑤blue sky ⑥ the green hills ⑦ the animals ⑧ lake ⑨ fishing ⑩skating

Step 6 Homework

（1）要求学生完成教科书90页第一题和第三题。

（2）把课文改编成一个对话

（3）To write out the article “The city or the country.”

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 14Li Wei’s farm John’s farm

use a tractor Use animals

like to sit and look at… Go fishing…

教案点评：

通过谈论运动图片复习副词比较等级的运用，展示图片引入关于中美两国农场的比较，让学生总结其特点，最后让学生谈论他们对农村和城市的看法。

Lesson 15

Teaching Objectives:

掌握形容词与副词的比较级与最高级句型的运用。

Language FOCUS:

help sb with sth like doing sth.

Eating too much is bad for you

Properties: Overhead projector, recorder

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

1. To talk about the country life.

2. Revise the comparative and superlative forms of adjectives like interesting, beautiful, etc.

Step 2 Compare

Showing the students the pictures to compare. Saying:

The car goes faster than the bike.

The train goes faster than the car.

The plane goes faster than the train.

So the plane goes fastest of all.

Ask Who works carefully in class? Help the students to answer Jim works carefully. Ask Who works more carefully than Jim? Help the students to answer Kate works more carefully than Jim. Ask Who works the most careful of all? Help the students answer Lucy works the most carefully of all.

Write the model on the blackboard

The car runs faster than the bike.

The train runs faster than the car.

The plane runs the fastest of all

Get some pairs to present their sentences.

Step 3 Practise

Students talk about the farm work they can do, write the jobs on the board “feed the animal, pick corn (wheat, etc), grow corn (wheat, etc)” Then they talk about who can do the most work, use the dialogue in the book as a model.

Give more phrases for them to use “have books” “get home early” “eat much” “run fast” “have a good time”, etc.

Step 4 Read and complete

Students do the exercise themselves and then check the answers

(The answers: older, exciting, beautiful, quickly, better, faster, longer, interesting)

Then explain some words and phrases, point out the comparative and superlative forms of adverbs ending with “ly” are “more + adverbs” and “most + adverbs”.

Step 5 Exercise in class

Complete the sentences

1. 公共汽车和轿车，哪个开得快？轿车。

Which goes__________ ______, the car or the bus? The car_______.

2. 所有人当中，我摘的玉米最多。

I can pick ________ ________ corns of ______.

3. 她喜欢住在乡下。

She likes ______ ______ the country.

4. 迈克经常读书到深夜。

Mike often reads ______ ______ ______ ______.

5. 我认为住在城市比城镇有趣得多。

I think ______ in the city is ______ ______ ______ than in the town.

6. 她经常帮她阿姨干农活。

She often ______ her aunt ______ the farm work.

Answers: 1.more quickly, does 2.the most, all 3.living in 4.until late at night 5.living, much more interesting 6.helps, with/do

Step 6 Homework

1. Preview new lessons.

2. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 15 more the quickest the earliest The car runs faster than the bike. The train runs faster than the car. The plane runs the fastest of all

教案点评：

本课主要是以学生练习为主，通过图片展示让学生进行比较等级的训练。

Lesson 16

Teaching Objectives:

掌握比较级的用法；

掌握元音/u: / /u//uE/的发音。

Language FOCUS:

/u: / u, oo /u/ u, oo, oul /uE/ ure, ua,

What are you going to do after you leave school?

Properties: Tape recorder, pictures

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Revise the comparison of adverbs.

My mother usually gets up earlier than my father.

My father gets up earlier than I.

So my mother gets up the earliest of all.

Step 2 Spelling and pronunciation

Play the tape for students to listen and repeat, then ask students to practise the pronunciations of these words.

Use flashcards to give more words. Get them to practise the words.

Step 3 Rhyme

Play the tape for students to repeat and recite.

Read the chant together as a class.

Then divide the class into two groups to practise the chant.

Step 4 Listening

Play the tape for the students to listen. First make sure the students understand the meaning of the passage.

Then play the tape again and answer the questions.

Step 5 Word puzzle

First explain the word haystack means a large pile of hay firmly packed for storing.

Then students find out the words in pairs.

Step 6 Reading

Play the tape for the students to listen. Ask What is John going to do after he leaves school?

Students read the text silently and ask them for the main idea of the passage.

Play the tape again and answer the following questions.

1. Where are Ji Wei and John now?

2. What are they talking about?

3. Where did they do just now?

4. What is John going to do after school? After college?

5. What does he want to learn at college?

6. Who is following them?

Explain some difficult point “college, school for higher education”, “each, every” nobody, not anybody, not anyone .

Step 7 Writing

Showing the students the picture of Aunt Peggy’s farm. Get them to look at the picture carefully. First have them talk about the picture. Then have them write one paragraph about the picture individually.

Step 8 Checkpoint

Revise the adjectival and adverbial comparatives and superlatives.

Read the useful expressions.

Step 9 Exercise in class

Complete the words, using the proper words.

Different people have different ideas.

O______ people like life in the country, but y______ people don’t. They think life in the country isn't i ______. They like to go to the c______, have dinner in the r______ and s______ and dance with their friends.

My uncle and my a______ aren't f ______, but they live in the country. They grow f______ and vegetables for f ______. Every morning they will walk r ______ the fields. They can hear b ______ singing and sheep bleating. They often say, “Life in the country is much b______ now.”

Answers: Old, young, interesting, cinema, restaurant, sing, aunt, farmers, fun, round, birds, better.

Step 10 Homework

1. To write out the description of the picture.

2. Write one passage about the city or the farm you live.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 16 What is John going to do after he leaves school?(Go to college.)

八年级英语上册课件(篇2)

新目标英语八年级上Unit5教案

一、教学目标： 1.语言知识目标：

1)能掌握以下单词：sitcom, news, soap, educational, plan, hope, find out, discussion, stand, happen, may, expect 能掌握以下句型：

① What do you want to watch? ② What do you think of talk shows? ③ I can’t stand them.④ I don’t mind them.⑤ I like/love them./ I don’t like them.2)能了解以下语法：

动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。3）学会陈述自己的看法；学会谈论自己的喜好。2.情感态度价值观目标：

学会谈论流行文化，了解各类电视和电视节目的名称和自己的喜欢。注意引导学生们形成正确的文化观念，大力培养学生们的跨文化意义，形成自己独立的个性。

二、教学重难点 1.教学重点：

1)学习掌握各类电视和电视节目的名称。

2)掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

2.教学难点：

掌握动词不定式结构做动词的宾语；了解后面接动词不定式做宾语的动词。

三、教学过程 Step 1 Lead-in 学生们根据图片提示学习各类电视节目并且练习运用What do you think of…? Step 2 New words Learn the names of the TV shows.Step 3 Game 1.引导学生们看1a中的图片，根据提示依次说出每一部TV Show的名称。2.让学生们看图片及1a中的词汇，将图片与正确的词汇相连。3.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 4 Listening 1.T: Tell Ss to read the shows in the box.Make sure they know the meaning of the shows.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the shows1-4.3.Play the recording again.Check the answers with the Ss.Step 5 Pair work 1.Let Ss look at the pictures in the box.Then explain the meaning of each expression to the Ss.2.Let Ss read the conversation after the teacher.Then let Ss make their own conversation using the shows and expressions in the box.3.Let some pairs ask and answer about the shows.Step 6 Listening Work on 2a: 1.Read the shows in the box of 2a.Tell Ss to remember the information.2.Play the recording for the Ss to listen and number the TV shows [1-5].3.Play the recording again to check the on 2b: 1.Let Ss read the sentences below.Explain some main sentences for the Ss.Make sure they know what to do.2.Play the recording for the Ss to write the correct words in the blanks.3.Play the recording again to check the answers.Step 7 Pair work 1.Tell Ss ask and answer questions about the TV shows in 2a.They can use the information that is true for them.2.Let Ss read conversation after the teacher.3.Explain some main points for the Ss.4.Ss act the conversation in pairs.Ask some pairs to act out their conversations.

八年级英语上册课件(篇3)

教学目标: 1.学生能够理解对话大意,能够用正确的语音语调朗读对话,能够在情景中恰当运用句型what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.能够在情景中理解新词lost,toy,notebook的意思并能正确发音。

教学重点: 1.句型:what color is it? It’s ?问答颜色。 2.词汇:lost,toy,notebook

教学难点:对here it is和here you are的理解。

教学过程:

(一)热身/复习(Warm-up/Revision)复习What’s in the schoolbag?

1.教师带领学生看图:Sarah和Amy讨论丢失的笔记本的画面。教师指着图片说Sarah lost her notebook.板书新单词lost,并带读单词。

2.教师继续提问Is Sarah happy or sad?请学生注意Sarah说的话:I like it very much。学生回答She is sad教师继续问What can she do?

3.教师指着张鹏说Zhang Peng lost something,too。 Let’s go and have a look。

4.教师出示句子:Zhang Peng lost his English book。请学生完整听一遍对话录音,判断句子正误。学生听完后进行判断,并讲English book更正为schoolbag。

5.教师提问What color is Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?板书核心句型:What color is it?学生跟读并听录找答案。听音之前教师给出答案的选项: A. It’s black and white. B. It’s blue and white.学生听完后选择正确的答案。

6.学生同桌之间互相询问对方书包的颜色,运用句型What colour is it? It’s......

7.学生做Let’s play板块的活动。

8.教师提问What’s in Zhang Peng’s schoolbag?请学生在对话中找出答案: An English book,two toys and a notebook。教师利用单词卡片和实物教学单词toy notebook。

1.教师出示对话板块的板书,播放录音,请学生看图听音后填充句子:Zhang Peng’s schoolbag isXXXXXXXandXXXXXXXX.

2.学生自由朗读对话,教师提醒学生注意按照意群朗读。

作业布置:

八年级英语上册课件(篇4)

《昆明的雨》

教材分析：

《昆明的雨》是语文（人教版）八年级上册第四单元的一篇散文，这篇文章或写人或写景，但字里行间都饱含着汪曾祺深挚的情感，倾诉着他对昆明的雨的想念与热爱。

教学目标

【知识目标】 了解昆明的雨的特点。

【能力目标】  1.通过朗读，感受作者对昆明的热爱。

2.尝试以平淡生活入手表达自我感悟。

【情感目标】 感悟作者表达的情感，培养学生关注日常生活细节的习惯，引导他们在平淡的生活中发现情趣。

【教学重难点】   重点：感悟作者表达的情感。  

难点：通过朗读，感受作者独特的情趣。

【课时安排】 一课时

【课前准备】 预习本文字词，扫清阅读障碍。

教学过程

一、诗情导入 初读情感

读汪曾祺的一首小诗： 莲花池外少行人，野店苔痕一寸深；

浊酒一杯天过午，木香花湿雨沉沉。

二、整体感知

1.作者简介

2.在预习的基础上，提醒字音，学生自由速读课文，并圈点出昆明雨季的特点。

明确：昆明的雨季是明亮的、丰满的，使人动情的。

三、深化理解 体悟情感

1.为什么昆明的雨季是明亮的？（请用文中的句子回答）

明确： 因为“是下下停停、停停下下，不是连绵不断，下起来没完”。

2. 为什么昆明的雨季是丰满的？（请用文中的句子回答）

明确：因为“草木的枝叶里的水分都到了饱和状态，显示出过分的、近于夸张的旺盛”。

3.文中写了哪些植物体现昆明雨季的丰满？

明确：仙人掌、各类菌子、杨梅、缅桂花、木香花……

因为“仙人掌不仅多，且极肥大，可以种在菜园的周围代替篱笆，并且倒挂着也能开花。”

因为“昆明的杨梅很大，有一个乒乓球那样大，颜色黑红黑红的，叫做“火炭梅”。

四、点明主旨

1．昆明的雨季是使人动情的，作者动了什么情？（明确情感）

明确：想念  热爱  （解释乡愁的缘由）

2.朗读小结（升华情感）

五、写作练习

仔细观察品味生活中一草一木、一枝一叶，抓住其特点，并融入自己的个人情感，写一点能表现自己独特感悟的文字。

随堂展示、评价。

六、课堂小结

同学们的习作都很有趣，希望也能像汪曾祺一样，在寻常小事中体悟出属于自己的人生滋味。

七、板书设计

昆明的雨   

汪曾祺

想             明亮的           热

念             丰满的           爱

使人动情的

八年级英语上册课件(篇5)

Mdule8

Unit2The Lndn Ee is n ur right.

一、教材分析：

本模块以出行旅游为话题，通过大量的语言材料集中展示了纹路、支路、对某一区域进行描述的语言表达方式，同时对伦敦的一些著名景点和标志性建筑物也做了简单介绍。

二、教学目标：

（一）语言知识目标：

1.正确使用下列单词和短语：

tur, painting, clear, bat, ff, twer, get ff, turn left, turn right, g alng, n the right, n the left.

2.能够熟练运用下列句型：

Tae ff the bat bac…

Get ff the bat at…

（二）语言技能目标：

1.能够读懂对地图的描述，读懂对某一个地方的描述。

2.能够根据地图讲清路线，描述某个地点的位置。

（三）学习策略：

1.能够将语言学习与实际应用结合起来。

2.问路与指路应该有礼貌。

（四）情感目标：

乐于参加运用英语的.实践活动，乐于了解其他国家的文化。

三、教学过程：

Step1 Waring up

As the students se questins:

Where have u been?

Have u ever been t Lndn?

Which place d u nw abut Lndn?

Which place is the Lndn Ee?

Step2 Reading and vcabular

1. Read the tur f Lndn and fllw it n the ap.

Have the students l at the ap and failiarize theselves with the places. Explain that the shuld draw the rute given in the passage n their ap.

The can then chec with a partner.

2. Have the students read the passage b theselves. Then as the t find ut the fllwing phases.

在某人的右边

向左转

干某事最好的方式

一个藏有许多名画的博物馆

9）下船 10)走过教堂

它能把你带到离泰晤士河面135米的高空。

在塔桥下船。

向左拐进国王街，走过教堂，就又回到了你出发的地方——广场。

3. Explain se iprtant pints.

辨析：abve , ver与n

（1）abve的意思是“在…之上”，可指“在…斜上方”，既不接触，又不一定垂直，只是位置“高于…”。新课标第一网

The plane is fling abve the cluds.

The teperature will sta abve zer in the datie.

（2）ver的意思是“在…之上”，常常可以和abve替换，它着重指垂直在上，且不接触。还可以表示“盖在…上面，铺在…上面”，用作此意时，不能和abve替换。

The light is ver/abve the table.

There is a picture ver the blacbard.

Spread the tableclth ver the table, please.

（3）n的意思也是“在…之上”，但它含有和表面相接触的意思。

The b is n the des.

Step3 Listening

Mar the places n the ap.

Pla the tape thrugh nce fr the students t listen and fcus s the can understand the eaning f the places. Pla it again fr the t chec the eaning. Then as the t write naes f the places next t the buildings n the ap. The places are:

1 Natinal Galler 2 Lndn Ee 3 Twer f Lndn

4 Huses f parliaent 5 Bucingha Palace

Chec the answers with the whle class, as ne student t sa the answers.

Step4 Sa which places u can see in the phts.

As the students t decide this individuall, and then chec with a partner. Then call bac the answers fr the whle class.

Step5 Match the wrds with the pictures.

As the students t l at the pictures and cplete the activit individuall, and then chec with a partner.

Step6 Writing

Write directins t places in Lndn. Chse a place t start n the ap, and then chse a place t finish.

As the students t d this individuall, and eep their destinatin a secret fr everne.

四、课堂检测：

（一）根据汉语或首字母提示完成单词：

1. Welce t this shrt (旅行) f Lndn.

2. It’s the Natinal G , a useu with lts f faus paintings.

3. Turn left and g t the Huses f (国会).

4. When u are tired, the best wa t see Lndn is b (船).

5. u can see st f Lndn n a c da.

6. Can u swi (横过) the river?

7. I ften wal (经过) the bshp n  wa t schl.

8. The Ban f China is (在…对面) the restaurant.

9. The dctr has ust (到达) at the hspital.

10. There’s a par (在之间) the tw superarets.

11. What a nice place! The hills are green and the water is (清澈的).

12. There’re a lt f faus (油画) in this useu.

(二)单项选择：

1. If the traffic light is red, u crss the rad. It’s dangerus.

A. dn’t B. needn’t C. ustn’t D. wuldn’t

2. Dn’t pla ftball the iddle f the street.

A. in B. n C. at D. b

3. Turn left ing’s Street and g past the church.

A. in B. / C. int D. n

4. Mr Lin gave the textbs t all the students the nes wh had alread taen the.

A. except B. including C. ang D. with

5. ---What a surprise it is that u’ve hied n Munt Tai!

---I didn’t believe I culd d it I gt t the tp.

A. unless B. after C. until D. as

6. We ften have a wal the river after supper.

A. alng B. acrss C. n D. in

7. The best wa t visit Lndn .

A. b bat B. is b bat C. tae a bat D. t tae a bat

8. There’s a bridge the river.

A. n B. in C. ver D. under

9. He was brn the evening f August 28th, 1978.

A. n B. in C. at D. int

10. Everne t g shpping.

A. ens B. lies C. en D. lie

（三）根据汉语提示完成句子：

.

2. (左拐进人) ing’s Street.

.

.

八年级英语上册课件(篇6)

教材分析

1.本节的语言功能项目是“礼貌请求，询问许可”，整节内容围绕“家务杂事“展开谈论以及展开一系列的教学活动安排。本节课是本单元的的第一节课，在学完第一节课后，学生有了一定的积累，从而为后面几节课的语言输出作了很好的铺垫。

2.这是本单元的第一节课，学这节课是为了让学生学会用英语表达礼貌请求，询问许可的能力，为学生日后用英语口头表达礼貌请求，询问许可垫定坚实的基础。

学情分析

由于我是中途接别的老师的班，又加上我所教学的对象是初二学生,对英语普遍感兴趣,但有些不太发言,他们学习英语既感到好奇又担忧,希望能得到他人的肯定。因此我在教学活动中尽量让他们参与到活动中来,我注意提问方式,为了让不发言的学生发言,我采取的是处罚的方式,不过我据说的处罚不是体罚，我是让他们背英语作文或抄英语课文等。让他们有更多的机会来说英语,减少他们的恐惧感,通过学生间的合作学习,降低他们的学习难度,使他们体验到成功的喜悦。提高他们综合运用语言的能力,使各层次的学生都有所收获。

教学目标

1.语言目标

1)短语和单词do the dishes, do the laundry, take out the trash, teenager, take care of, feed 等。

2)句型结构

a. ---could you take out the trash?

---sure.

b. ---could i borrow the car?

---sorry, but i need it. i have to go to a meeting.

3)语法：情态动词的could 的用法。

2.语言技能

能用could you .....?和could i .....?来进行征求对方的意见和建议对方干什么以及应答形式。

2)会采访和调查自己同学、朋友，写出并于做家务的调查报告。

3、学习 策略

通过本节课的教学,我鼓励学生加强口语训练，老师设置情景，通过小组合作方式编对话等。

4、情感态度

通过对本单元的任务性活动,我的目的是让学生注意征求对方的意见和建议时的语气，并且能培养学生学习英语的强烈兴趣,乐于参加各种活动的积极情感,乐于合作,培养学生团结合作的精神。

5、文化意识

了解人们应该怎样用英语口头表达礼貌请求，询问许可。

教学重点和难点

本堂课的重点是：能用could you .....?和could i .....? 来进行征求对方的意见和建议对方干什么以及应答形式。

本堂课的难点是：如何对could you .....?和could i .....?进行反应，特别是在特定的情境中。

教学过程

step 1 lead in and warming up

ask students what chores they do at home.

list them on the blackboard. lead in the topic of this unit.

step 2 presentation

1. ask for help with different sentences.

give examples: please give me your book or give me your book.

ask students which is the better way to ask for help.

if possible, enable students to ask in their ways.

2. read the phrases in 1a.

ask students if they do these chores at home.

3. listen to the tape and complete the chart.

read after the tape and imitate.

step 3 consolidation

retell the content according to the chart in 1b.

give students some tips.

ask students why peter and his mother have to do the chores now.

students know why and maybe they will begin like this:

peter’s grandma is coming at 7:00. so they have to clean the house. ........

step 4 practice

read the sample dialogue. then ask students to work with partners. make new dialogues.

remind students how to ask and answer.

role play.

step 5 homework

pay attention to the tone or manner of speaking when talking to others.

ask others for help with what they have learnt today in english.

板书设计

a. ---could you take out the trash?

---sure./ok/.......

b. ---could i borrow the car?

---sorry, but i need it. i have to ......

学生学习活动评价设计

本人主要是采取小组竞争的方式让学生愉快并有激情地上课，并且达到预期效果。

教学反思

本课时学生参与面广, 不同层次的学生均有所获。基础较差学生能运用所学句型进行简单的口语交际练习。英语能力较强的学生则能注意到本课情态动词could 的用法,语言能力拓展达到一定深度和广度。

通过本节课的教学实践,我认识到教学成功与否,学生掌握程度如何,关建在于教师如何创造性地设计课堂教。面对不同的学生群体,任务的难度系数(深度)是可以调控的;而面对同一群体里的不同程度的学生,教师可以在任务设置时注意不同角色的设定,做到有针对性,使每一层面的学生皆有所得。教师要有意识地积极引导学生以教材上学到的知道运用到生活中去，并且要能对所学知识转化为能力。如本堂课中，老师要求学生用所学内容进行口语训练，从而激发了学生表达的积极性。

要是让我再重新上这节课，我会照顾到学生说的能力，就是采取retell的形式学生口头说出所学内容，以检查学生是否掌握本堂内容，然后再进行写作训练，这样不仅有效的评价了学生，也训练了学生的能力。

八年级英语上册课件(篇7)

Lesson 45

Ⅰ. Teaching Objectives

1. Learning new words about the weather and talk about the weather.

2. Learn to use exclamatory sentences.

3. Teaching a new tense the simple future tense.

Ⅱ. Properties

Recorder, Overhead Projector, Computer

Ⅲ. Language FOCUS :The simple future tense and exclamatory sentences.

Ⅳ. Teaching Procedures

Leading-in

1．教师身披一件厚外套,进班和学生打招呼时做出很冷的样子说：

How cold it is today! But it’s warm in class. So I will put off my coat.

然后把外套脱掉

2．把cold， warm两词写在黑板上， 问学生：Did you listen to the weather forecast yesterday? 然后放一段当天的天气预报的英语录音，将录音中出现的形容天气的词写在黑板上并解释。

cloudy sunny rainy wet windy snowy

Presentation

1．通过一段全国各地天气预报的动画图中各种天气的图标，解释其他天气的英文说法。

引导听录音，听前提问：

--What’s the weather like in Harbin today?

放一段Harbin的天气报告录音，请单个同学回答。之后再听一遍，集体重复问答。

再逐个听广州，兰州，上海的天气报告录音。比较各处天气，引出形容词的比较级。

colder, warmer, drier, hotter, wetter

2．不放录音，请学生根据图标自己复述，教师在必要时给与帮助。

Practice

Ask the students to make sentences about the weather. Then let them do some exercises.

A: What’s the weather like?

B: 1. It’s wet and windy.

2. It s rainy and windy.

3. It’s sunny and hot.

4. It s very snowy, but quite warm.

5. It s very rainy, but quite hot.

6. It s very dry, but quite cold.

Presentation

1．放一段明天全国各地天气预报的动画，引导学生注意其中的时态：一般将来时的构成。比较其与一般现在时的不同。

2．引导学生分析感叹句的构成。

Remember the structures:

1. How + adj. + subject + verb！

2. What + adj. + noun(singular or plural) + subject + verb!

e.g. How cold it is today!

What a cold day (it is today)!

Practice

1. Look at the chart below and ask the students to make sentences using the simple future tense.

Notes: 1) Mark “√” refers to affirmative sentences.

Mark “×” refers to negative sentences.

Mark “?” refers to general questions and make answers to all these questions.

2) Add a future time to the end of each sentence if necessary, eg. tomorrow, the day after tomorrow, tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening, next Sunday/year/month, later on, soon, …

2. Let the students do some translations.

1. 她是一位多么善良的女孩呀！

2. 这是一部多么有趣的电影呀！

3. 他们是多么有耐心的医生呀！

4. 这些书是多么新呀！

5. 今天天气是多么好呀！

Keys: 1. How kind the girl is! = What a kind girl she is!

2. How interesting the film is! = What an interesting film is!

3. How patient the doctors are! = What patient doctors they are!

4. How new these books are! = What new books they are!

5. How fine it is today! = What a fine day (it is today) !

3. Dialogue Practice

T: Look at Exercise Two. Listen to the tape and repeat after it.

Now let the students use the patterns to practise more.

At last, try to ask them to make some new sentences. For example:

1. A: How dry it is today!

B: Yes, but it’ll be wetter later on.

2.A: What a dry day!

B: Yes, and it’ll get drier, I’m afraid.

Exercises in class

Fill in the blanks

A. Exclamatory sentences practice.

1. ______ nice ties they are!

2. ______ lovely weather it is!

3. ______ funny the joke is!

4. ______ a good idea this is!

5. ______ clever you are!

6. ______ terrible that is!

7. ______ handsome actors they are!

8. ______ wonderful it is!

B. The simple future tense practice.

1. I ______ the museum tomorrow, (not visit)

2. It ______soon. (rain)

3. ______ I ______ for Julia at the school gate tomorrow morning? (wait) Yes, you ______.

4. They______ care of the children next Sunday, (take)

5. ______ you ______ to university next year? (go)

No, I ______. Because I m not old enough.

6. Peter______ us the truth this evening, (not tell)

Keys: A: l. What 2.What 3.How 4.What 5.How 6.How 7.what 8.How

B: 1.won’t visit 2.will rain 3.Shall/wait/will 4.will take 5.Will/go/won’t 6.won’t tell

Homework

1. Remember the adjectives of weather and make a dialogue.

2. Make three exclamatory sentences and another three sentences using the simple future tense.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 45How cold it is today! What a cold day it is!

教案点评：

本设计导入部分利用真实的情节引入关于天气的词汇的教学，然后利用各种天气的图标来说明天气的说法，利用媒体搜集资源：天气预报，介入一般将来时的认识，但并非本课的重点，而是着重练习感叹句的运用，这样处理达到了本课的目标。

Lesson 46

Teaching Objection

1．学习方位词，并能在图中正确辨别。

2．学习并掌握表示将来时的用法。

3．能运用描述未来天气情况。

Main Points

The expression of weather; noun of locality; the expression of direction;

Difficult Points

The simple future tense

Teaching Aids

Recorder, Overhead Projector, Video

Teaching Procedures

Step 1 Revision

Revise the weather vocabulary by asking: What’s the weather like?

T: What's the date today?

Ss: It's December 28th.

T: What s the weather like?

Ss: It’s very rainy, windy and cold.

T: How cold it is today!

Ss: Yes, but it’ll be warmer later on.

T: What a cold day!

Ss: Yes, and it'll get colder, we' re afraid.

Step 2 Presentation

1. Part 1 Read and act

T: Now listen to the tape and try to understand it. And answer the question: What’s the weather like where Bruce’s father is?

After Listening the tape, check the answer: It’s warm and sunny.

Answer the following questions according to the dialogue

1. Where is Bruce now?

2. What ' s the weather like in Xinjiang?

3. What kinds of fruit does Bruce like very much?

4. What are his parents going to do?

5. Are they very happy to talk by telephone?

答案：1.Bruce is in Xinjiang, China.

2.It's cold in the morning, but turns very warm at noon.

3. He likes the grapes and melons very much.

4. They are going to hike.

5. Yes, they are.

2. Ask students to talk about the weather in Xinjiang?

Show these words: strange, dry, fruit, grapes, melons

The weather is very strange in Xinjiang. It’s cold in the morning, but turns very warm at noon. It’s also very dry, so the fruit here is very sweet. There are grapes and melons in Xinjiang.

3. Language Points

1) ring up, get into communication with sb by telephone.

eg. I’ll ring you up this evening.

ring up = call up(us)

2) hike [haik] V. go for a long walk in the country, taken for pleasure or exercise.

eg. They are going to hike tomorrow.

-hiker n. person who hikes.

4. Learning the nouns of locating by Overhead Projector

This is north/east/south/west/northwest/northeast/southwest/southeast.（手指着各个方向分别教学方位名词）

Note the different way of saying northeast, southwest, etc. in Chinese.

T: What part of China do we live in?

Ss: We live in the north/south/…of China.（教师可帮助学生回答）

T: What cities are in the north/south/east/southwest/…?

5. A Weather Report

T: Every morning I listen to the weather report. I like to hear what the weather is going to be like all around the world. Listen to this report and see what you can hear.

Play the tape several times for the students to listen to the tape.

Question: What will the weather be like in Northwest?

Check the answer: It will snow in the night.

6. Language Points

Explain that will is another way of saying going to be. Will expresses the simple future as be going to does.

Explain the sentence There will be a strong wind to the north of the Huai River.

there will be

It’s the way of expressing the simple future of there be.

e.g. I will go to the park this weekend.

The phrase to the north of expresses beyond some area.

e.g. Japan is to the east of China.

Prep in express inside some area.

Step 3 Practice

Fill in the form according the weather report

Places Weather Temperature

Most North China

Cold wet /cloudy

1.A strong wind2.(after tomorrow)Sunny

Northeast Above zeroBelow zero

Snow (night)/heavy

Beijing

Tianjin 2 ---9

Let the students look at the radio report and fill in the form..

Weather Report

Good evening. Let’s look at tomorrow's weather. In England the temperature is going to be around 15℃, except in the north where it’s going to be cooler; around 12℃.The day’s going to be generally fine, with a lot of sunshine, especially in the south. Over Wales and northern England, it’ll be cloudy in the afternoon and by early evening it’s going to rain. But only a little. In Northern Ireland, it’s going to be generally colder with strong winds and temperatures around 10℃.The story for Scotland is quite different - in the east of Scotland, it’s going to be wet and windy with temperatures around 5℃.To the north and west, however; up in the Highlands, the temperature’s going to be much lower around 2℃ and it looks like it’s going to snow in the evening.

North of England-South of England-Wales-Northern Ireland-East of Scotland-North and west of Scotland-

Keys:

North of England-cooler, around 12℃;

South of England - fine, with a lot of sunshine

Wales - cloudy in the afternoon, a little rain in the early evening

Northern Ireland - colder with strong winds, around 10℃

East of Scotland - wet and windy, around 5℃

North and west of Scotland - snow in the evening, around 2℃

Step 4 Exercise

Rewrite the sentences without changing their meanings.

1. Most of North and South China will have a cold wet day.

It _______ _______ cold and wet _______ most of North and South China.

2. It'll rain in Beijing.

Beijing will ______ ______.

3. The rain was heavy last night.

It ______ ______ last night.

4. The snow is heavy now.

There ______ ______ now.

5. What's the weather like today?

______ ______ the weather today?

6. We played happily in the park last Sunday.

We ______ ______ ______ ______ in the park last Sunday.

7. Bruce rings up his father in Sydney.

Bruce ______ his father ______ ______ in Sydney.

Answers: 1. will be, in 2. be rainy 3. rained heavily 4. is heavy snow 5. How is 6. had a great time 7. gives, a ring

Step 5 Homework

1. Read the dialogue and the text fluently.

2. Make a radio report of the weather in winter.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 46A Weather Reporthave a cold day in the night at timesstay above zero Have a great timefall below zero It will be + adj.in the daytime There will be + n.

教案点评：

本设计对词汇的处理比较自然，包括两个方面：利用图片，在语境中教学词汇；利用手势、方位和方位图教学表示方位的词汇。

Lesson 47

Teaching Objectives:

掌握谈论天气的词汇和用语；

掌握感叹句和一般将来时的用法。

Properties: Recorder, Overhead Projection

Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Revise the vocabulary of direction.（可利用学生互相的位置进行表达）

Revise how to express the weather

Step 2 Read and act

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.

Have students read and act out the dialogue in pairs.

At last, let several pairs act it out.

Step 3 Read and learn

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.

Pay attention to the followings: play football, on our school playground, climb the mountain, have to do, stay home, do some reading. It’s better to do sth, on rainy days. I'm afraid… ,go roller-skating, would you like to do sth? play with sb, make a snowman.

Now encourage the students to make some different dialogues with the patterns given in students Book.

For Example:

Example 1

A: What a fine day today!

B: Yes, it’s sunny and not very hot. Will you go to Beihai Park with me?

A: Ok. Let s go and row a boat there.

B: That’s a good idea!

Example 2

A: Look! How heavy it rains!

B: Anna, you can't take a walk outside today, I'm afraid. What will you do?

A: I have to stay home and do some cleaning.

B: Good. It s better to do some cleaning on rainy days.

Example 3

A: Wow! What a heavy snow! I'm afraid you can't play football. Jack. What will you do?

B: I can go skiing. Would you like to go with me, Jim?

A: Certainly! Let’s carry our skiing-gears!

B: OK./Come on!

Step 4 Listening

Play the tape and ask What will the weather be like for Taiyuan?

Make sure the students get the answer. Then play the tape again and have the student write down the temperatures of the cities on Page 139.

Play the third time. Make sure the students finish the exercises. Then check the answer with the whole class.

Step 5 Exercises in class

Rewrite the following sentences.

1. He goes to school on foot every day. ( by bike tomorrow)

2. They don't have a meeting every Friday, (next Friday)

3. Does Polly often help his friends? Yes, he does. (tomorrow)

4.I play basketball with my classmates every afternoon. ( tomorrow afternoon)

5. Do you keep a diary in English this year? ( next year) No, I don’t.

Keys:

1. He will go to school by bike tomorrow.

2. They won’t have a meeting next Friday.

3. Will Polly help his friends tomorrow? Yes, he will.

4.I will play basketball with my classmates tomorrow afternoon.

5. Will you keep a diary in English next year? No, I won’t.

Step 6 Homework

1. Finish off the workbook exercises.

2. Make three different dialogues according to Exercise Two.

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 47 I don’t like the snow/ rain/ cold. The snow will stop later in the day. What a heavy snow! It’s better to do some reading on rainy days.

Lesson 48

Teaching Objectives:

复习辅音音标及有关字母和字母组合的拼读规则；

掌握本课的重点语言项目：

I think it will be …

I hope …

I don’t like the …

I love the …

掌握有关天气状况的词汇及表达天气的用语；

学会写weather report and an e-mail。

Properties: Recorder, Overhead Projector

Teaching Procedures:

Step 1 Revision

Write a short passage using the words given below

bad, last, not, long, think, get better, soon, radio, rain, stop, later on, so, go shopping, later.

Reference answer:

The weather is bad now. But it won’t last too long. I think it’ll get better soon. Because the radio says the rain will stop later on. So I'll go shopping later.

Step 2 Spelling and pronunciation

Play the tape for the students to listen and repeat.

Practise the individual sounds, the show flashcards with more words and get the students to pronounce the words.

Step 3 Practise

Revise the vocabulary of weather.

windy rainy sunny cloudy hot cold etc.

Teach the new word foggy by showing a picture.

Slides showing.

1

A: I think it will be windy/sunny/rainy/cloudy tomorrow.

B: I hope you ' re wrong. I don ' t like the wind/sun/rain/cloud.

I hope you ' re right. I love the wind/sun/rain/cloud.

2

A: I think it will be cloudy/windy/sunny/hot/rainy/cold tomorrow.

B: No, it won't! I think the weather will be much better/worse!

Read through the dialogue with the students.

Get the students to practise the dialogue in pairs. Substitute the words in the box to practise the dialogue. Ask several pairs to practise the dialogue.

Step 4 Presentation

Language Points.

1. I hope (that) subject + verb

I hope you’ll get well soon.

2. I love + noun.

I love my family and my school, and I love my country, too.

3. much + comparative degree.

Mike is much taller than Jim.

Step 5 Look, read and say

课前一天教师可让学生观看中央电视台的天气预报，或是收听电台的天气预报，教学此部分时先让学生说说昨天预报的天气情况，尽量用英语表达。或是让学生当播音员把Lesson 46的weather report用自己的语言说一遍。

Ask the students to look at the table, then read it together.

Ask them to guess what season it is.

Have the students to write their weather report individually.

Then choose several students to read their weather reports for the class.

Step 6 Practice

Listen to another model.

Tokyo→rainy-→ 11→-3

Model: Good morning! Here's the weather report for some big cities in the world. Tokyo is rainy. The high temperature will be 11. There'11 be plenty of rain in the daytime, but the low temperature tonight will be minus three. Wear warm clothes at night when you go out….That's the weather report for today. Thank you for listening.

(Ask the students to report that of the rest big cities-London, Ottawa, New York and Melbourne to their classmates. )

Step 7 Writing

T: Look at Exercise Four. Try to learn how to write an e-mail.

T: Read the e-mail form, and listen to a model.

Model:

Dear Miss West,

Welcome to our school! My name is Josie Zhou. I' m in Class One, Grade Two. You will come here next month, won’t you? Now let me tell you something about the weather here. The sky is usually blue in the daytime, the high temperature is about 6 and the low temperature is about minus 6. The weather here is really nice, isn't it? But you'd better bring some warm clothes because it'll get colder and colder. I' ll wait for your arrival and have a safe journey.

(Ask the students to discuss in class)

Step 8 Checkpoint 12

1. Grammar: the simple future tense and exclamatory sentences.

2. Useful expressions: later on, ring up. Happy New Year! The same to you.

eg. Merry Christmas! The same to you!

Note:

①Teachers: Happy Teachers ' Day!

Teachers: The same to you.

②Students: Happy Teachers’ Day!

Teachers: Thank you.

Step 9 Exercises in class

Write a Weather Report according to the following form about 50 words.

上海未来24小时天气预报

时间 天气情况 温度（℃）

今天晚上 有雨，部分地区有大雨 2-9

明天上午 有云，风向偏东，风力不大 9-12

明天下午 晴天 12-16

Answers:

Weather report of Shang hai for the next 24 hours. It will be rainy tonight. The lain will be very heavy in some places. The temperature will be 2 to 9. It will be cloudy tomorrow morning. There will be a wind to the east. It’s not strong. The temperature will be 9 to 12. After noon it will be sunny. The temperature will be 12 to 16.

Step 10 Homework

1. Write a weather report according to the model in Exercise Three.

2. Write an e-mail according to the pattern in Exercise Four.

3. Finish off the workbook exercises..

The design of the blackboard

Lesson 48 ch -ch - tch I think it will be … tomorrow. - ge j There’ll be beautiful sunshine. tr That’s the weather report for today. dr I hope … -ts-tes I don’t like the … -ds- des I love the …

八年级英语上册课件(篇8)

课前准备：

教师：录音机，所学物品的图片。

学生：英语点金教练及相关的学习用具

Teaching procedures(教学步骤):

Step 1 Leading in(导入话题，激活背景知识)

1.Greetings and free-talk .

2.Check the Homework(家庭作业) .

Step 2 Pre-task(任务前活动)SB Page 24 , Groupwork .

1.Arrange the Ss in small groups .Ask them to look at the pictures and talk

about the events .Encourage students to say how historical events affected their

lives .

2.Tell the Ss to help each other with vocabulary they might need and don’t

know .

Step 3 While-task(任务中活动)

1.Reading strategy :The title can be helpful for you to understand a text

.It is also a good idea to read the first sentence of each paragraph before

reading .

2.Read the title ,which gives an indication of the content of the reading

.Think of one question they think might be answered in the reading .

3.Play the recording , Ss listen . 4.Ask Ss to read the story out to the

class .

5.Ask Ss to comment on whether their questions in the previewing stage were

answered .

Step 4 Post-task(任务后活动)SB Page 25 , 3a .

Read the four events and match them to the correct dates .When finished

,ask Ss to swap their book with a partner for correction .

Homework(家庭作业) :

Write about an event that you remember well .Give dates and say why you

remember it ,and what you were doing at the time when you heard the news .

教学后记:

第六课时：测试课

一、单项选择。

( )1. What ____ you ____ when she came in?

A. did, do B. are, doing C. do, do D. were, doing

( )2. The girl is ill. She’s ______.

A. in hosp

八年级英语上册课件(篇9)

一、学生分析

本班学生都是适龄的学生及有一定的认识能力，对学习英语较热情，在学习本课之前都会进行简单的日常交际会话，并有预习的习惯，对本节课的知识有了解。

二、教材分析

本节课是本单元的第一课时。之前学习过现在进行时，有类似的。根据本班学生实际情况，对教材内容有所调整，本来一个课时完成两个句型，现在抽一个句型先讲，掌握好该句型，对本单元接下来的知识就较容易理解、掌握及运用。

三、教学目标

学习和掌握I’m going to a /an……的句型及其问句what are you going to be when you grow up?会运用该句型进行会话。并能推出除第一人称的用法之外，其他人称都可以用。学习了该句型，学生能用英语进行谈话、讨论，将来干什么职业，并能表达出自己、亲戚及朋友，将来干什么职业。

四、教学策略

运用了演示法，通过演示使学生明确其意义，提高学生的自我认识及理解能力。也运用了交际法，通过交流，使学生在学中用，用中学，巩固了旧知识，掌握了新知识。本节课课前准备了图片的幻灯片，录音材料，联系幻灯片，上课时运用了录音机，多媒体教学。增强了课堂的密度，收到了更好的效果。

五、教学过程

首先运用句型：what does your father /mother do? my father /mother is a worker /mother is a worker/teacher ……，复习了部分职业名词，为本节课的句型I’m going to be a/an ……埋下伏笔，打下基础，接着通过幻灯机示出本节课的标题：i am going to be a basketball player。并演示两个句型如：what are you going to be when you grow up ? I’m going to be a teacher .what are you going to be you grow up? I’m going to be an engineer。让学生先感知本节课的语言知识。并用幻灯片示出本节课的主要句型，what are you going to be when you grow up? i’m going to be a/an ……然后，出示幻灯图片共15幅，让学生根据图片，运用本课的主要句型，进行两两对话，在练习过程中掌握句型。下一步，让学生互相讨论，进行会话，更一步理解、 掌握和运用该句型。进行了几分钟后，让学生进行会话表演，检查学生掌握得如何，如有问题及时进行纠正，做得好的及时表扬，增强学生的学习积极性。为了使学生进一步熟练运用该句型，再出示幻灯图片，让学生进行会话，学生都做得较好。

进行了口头表达训练之后，通过幻灯片出示练习：第一道题是听力练习，listen and fill in the “who” and “what” columns in the chart 。学生听完两次后，检查纠正答案，提高学生的听写能力。第二道题是：finish the words according to the first letter and the sentences meaning 。学生完成后，逐个学生提问答案，并出示正确的答案，提高学生记忆本节课所学的新单词，第三道题是：ask questions according to the line。同样学生先完成后，逐题提问学生，检查其答案是否对错，并指出其存在的问题，出示正确的答案。

练习完成后，对本节课所学的内容进行小结：本节课学习了what are you going to be when you grow up? I’m going to be a/an ……从会话及练习的检查，大部分同学都掌握得好，都能表达自己将来打算干什么，希望大家回去后调查一下自己的同学或朋友将来打算干什么，并能用英语写出来。及完成补充练习，为我们下一节课学习做准备。

六、课后的反思

运用了多媒体教学及教学过程中运用了前所未尝试过的教学手段及方法，大大提高了学生学习的积极性和主动性，收到更好的教学效果。如：学生在课堂上积极思考，大胆举手发言及回答问题；课堂气氛活跃。

由于对多媒体的运用不够熟练，因此，延迟了下课的时间，并在教学过程中还有小部分学生掌握得不够好，今后还需要多运用多媒体教学，尝试新方法，把教学质量提到更高。

七、课例评析

本课例运用了先进教学理论及教学媒体来进行，收到良好的效果。该课运用了许多有趣的图片，且课堂环节紧凑，以操练为主，令学生在轻松愉快的环境中学习，在操练中掌握所学句型并能作简单的交流，而不是单纯地讲完语法知识。若本节课的引入部分能更详细、更充分些，其教学效果会更好。

八年级英语上册课件(篇10)

第一单元 相亲相爱一家人

第一课 爱在屋檐下

第一框：我知我家

教学目标

情感、态度、价值观目标：爱自己的家、热爱父母的情感和厌恶不孝行经的情感。

能力目标：认识自己家庭的能力。

知识目标：了解家庭的一般概况;家庭关系的确立;子女与父母的关系不可选择;了解父母的特点;家人的优秀品质。

重点与难点：子女与父母的关系不可选择

教学准备

和父母一起回忆在你们的家庭生活经历中，印象最深的一件事(如生病、惹祸、比赛成功等)是什么?父母当时是怎么做的?

教学过程

[导语]有了泥土，嫩芽才会长大;有了阳光，春芽才会开花;我们每个人的成长都离不开我们的家。当我们还在妈妈肚子里的时候，爱我们的爸爸、妈妈、爷爷、奶奶就开始为我们绘制宏伟的蓝图，编制美丽的理想甚至为我们早早起好了名字。

有没有同学愿意为大家介绍一下你们名字的含义呀?(请2—3名同学介绍。)

一、“什么是家呢?”

简简单单的名字，寄予了家长深切的爱。我们从出生那一刻起，就被家的温暖所包围。

[情景故事]教材P4两则故事说：“那……不是我的房子” “我又有家了”。那么“家到底是什么?”

二、体验活动： “家”的遐想 /我眼中到的家。(并请说明理由)

[小结]家是温暖的避风港;是一片蓝天;是一把伞……

三、“画”家

A 爸爸、妈妈、哥哥、小松

b 爷爷、奶奶、爸爸、妈妈、小兰

c 爸爸、小刚

d 爸爸、妈妈、小浩、叔叔、婶婶

——我们有不同的家庭结构：大致有核心家庭，主干家庭，单亲家庭，联合家庭等。

[知识拓展]家庭是有婚姻关系、血缘关系或收养关系结合成的亲属生活组织。家里有亲人，家中有亲情。家庭关系的确立也有多种情形，依照法定条件和程序结婚组成的新家庭;因生育导致的血缘关系结合的家庭;依照法定条件和程序收养而组成的家庭;随父母再婚组成的新家庭。不同的家庭关系，促成了不同的家庭结构。

——父母赚钱不容易：为了撑起一个幸福、温馨的家庭，爸爸妈妈努力工作。你知道爸爸妈妈具体从事的工作吗?他们工作中有什么困难和委屈吗?他们回家后还要干什么?

——父母养育我们不容易：爸爸妈妈为了我们，一方面努力工作，一方面对我们的成长无时不刻倾注着他们对儿女的爱。你能说说爸爸妈妈在你成长道路上付出的爱吗?

四、实话实说：喜欢“选择什么样的父母”?

A、小冰早就想买一个新款MP3了，妈妈说家庭经济不宽余，一定要买的话就看期末考试有没有进步。

B、小亮是一个很调皮的男生，这次在学校不小心打破一块玻璃，要赔偿人民币15元。可是小他的父母刚听了一个开头，便不高兴了，拿起皮鞭打了他一顿。

C、小宁生活在一个十分优越的家庭。怕起早，每天爸爸开车送她去学校;嫌菜差，每天保姆送饭来学校;穿的是名牌，用的是精品;妈妈还告诉她学校的值周劳动最好不要参加。

D、……

五、小结：父母给予我们生命，这种天然生成的最自然的亲情，是无法选择、无法改变的。

六、作业：介绍我家的好品质、好家风。

第二框：我爱我家(一课时)

知识目标：体会家庭中亲情的温暖，明白抚养和教育子女是父母的道德和法律义务，而父母也理应受到子女的孝敬。

能力目标：辨证看待家庭中父母与子女权利义务关系的能力;收集父母为家庭作贡献的具体事例的能力，感受家庭亲情的能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：感受父母对自己的爱心和抚育，尊重父母的劳动和情感，培养学生权利与义务的意识，承担起自己的对家庭的责任。

教学重点：感受家庭的温暖。

教学难点：担负起自己的责任，与家人一起营造温馨的家。

教学过程：

【新课导入】

在一个小生命还酝酿在母体的时候，已经倾注了家人对他的关爱，那就是他的名字。请学生说说他们的名字的用意。以此来体会家人的期待和关爱。

一.爱的回忆

活动内容：先让学生回忆小时候受父母呵护的甜蜜时光，并把自己的童趣讲给同学听。再设问：在你的家庭中，有没有发生过令你感动的事?

设计意图：这一活动的目的在于让学生通过回忆，感受家庭的温馨，感受父母对自己的呵护。

教师行为：开展这一活动，一要注意正面引导，防止学生讨论亲子矛盾，而要着重引导学生感受父母的爱;二要注意辨证地看待这些事，因为许多家长对子女爱护有余，严格要求不足，所以要对学生反映出来的问题作具体分析。

二.无悔的爱

活动内容：让学生填写表格，即“在你家，下列事情通常由谁来做?”另外，讨论两个问题：“说说自己家中贡献最大的人是谁，要说出具体理由”和“夸夸自己的父母，并讲给同学听”。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，一要让学生根据家庭情况如实填写，通过填写体会父母的贡献;二要引导学生在家做力所能及的事，渗透在家尽责的教育;三是说说家人的贡献，包括物质方面的，也包括良好道德、优秀思想方面的精神贡献;四是找父母的优点，夸夸自己的父母。

教学建议：开展这一活动，可以不限于教材表格中所列的项目，由学生根据实际情况填写。家中的事，凡学生能做的，要鼓励学生做，这既能培养学生能力，又能陶冶学生情操，而且有助于增进学生与父母的亲情，与父母更好地沟通。在学生的讨论中，可以讲“大”的事情，也可以讲感人的具体事例，有些小事反而更能体现父母的一片苦心，容易感动人。在活动中，要注意家庭有缺陷的学生的反应，防止伤害这些学生。

三.爱的低诉：

活动内容：给学生足够的时间写一段他对母爱或父爱的认识，交流自己对这种爱曾经的误会或曾经的感动。

教师行为：呈现两个关于母亲的故事(见附录)，并引导学生用心感悟他对母爱或父爱的认识，并将优秀作品展示给全班同学。

设计意图：这一活动意在让学生体会原来未曾注意的东西，也是丰富学生情感、促进其良知发展的重要环节。有的老师说，现在的学生不知感恩，不被感动，认为父母对自己所做的一切都是理所当然的。原因之一是我们的教育忽略了学生的体验，缺乏正确有效的引导。有的学生对家长不满甚至看不起父母，也与他们缺乏对父母的理解，不会感受或感受不到亲情呵护有关。因此，要通过这一活动，让同龄人自己教育自己，在轻松的氛围中深切感悟在家庭中获得的爱。

教学建议：开展这一活动，老师要善于引导，可以用具体事例来启发;要注意以情感人，烘托出良好氛围;不必面面俱到，只要发动学生积极地说、积极地体验就行了;要有意识地从父母的良苦用心、子女的责任两个方面来启发，突出正面教育的效果。如果有学生从反面冲突来讲，要注意剖析分析的本意和期望，剖析其中所蕴涵的爱，把学生引导到爱父母、爱家庭上来。

四.爱的告白：

活动内容：让学生给父母写寄言，即在感激父母抚育、理解父母心情的基础上，写几句话并交给父母，表达自己对父母的心情。

设计意图：设计这一活动，在于让学生与父母心灵碰撞，表达自己对父母的感激之情，表达自己对父母的责任和决心。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，第一步，可以让学生写父母的优点长处，也可以让学生写父母对自己的呵护和期望，还可以让学生写自己的感受和决心。第二步，在同学中互相交流，互相感染启发。第三步，把自己所写的交给父母，与父母沟通互动。

教学建议：在这一活动中，要注意展示学生的才气，如让他们写诗歌、散文等形式来写。要强调写出自己的情感体验，避免说空话，避免应付。要注意引导学生把情感和意志结合起来，即要把自己的决心和打算反映出来。这件事是一个学生与家长的互动过程，要注意发挥家长的作用，如将学生的感受反馈给家长，有条件的可以让家长也给学生写寄言，在互动中加强对学生的教育。

五.爱的成长：

活动内容：讨论：当你们的父母发生了矛盾，你是怎样做的?若父母一方或双方下岗怎么办?为了使你的家庭更美满，你还应做些什么?

设计意图：引导学生体验温馨的家庭需要全家人的齐心协力。

第三框：难报三春晖(一课时)

知识目标：孝敬父母长辈是中华民族的传统美德;不孝敬父母长辈要受道德的谴责，要承担法律责任;孝敬父母长辈体现在日常生活的方方面面。

能力目标：辨证分析孝敬父母好处与不孝之坏处的能力，辨别具体行为是否属于孝的能力;孝亲敬长的具体行为实践能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：厌恶不孝行径的情感;体验尽孝后的快乐;树立家庭中的正确的是非观念，增强履行家庭义务的责任观念。

教学重点：如何孝敬父母。

教学难点：孝敬父母的道德和法律基础，防止愚孝。

教学过程：

一.爱洒心间

活动内容：出示材料：一封别样的信(见附录)，引导思考：你能读懂母亲这样做的良苦用心吗?

设计意图：一是设置悬念，激发兴趣;二是与教材中的故事有异曲同工之效。

教师行为：引导相互交流并分享自己感受到的父母的爱。

二.爱的回报

活动内容：小组竞赛，孝亲故事知多少?

设计意图：引导学生从“孝亲”的典例中感受榜样的力量，为自己“孝亲”行为提供借鉴。

活动内容：讨论：“你平时是怎样孝敬父母的?你认为孝敬父母应该表现在哪些方面?”“把自己尽孝后的感受谈出来与大家分享。”

设计意图：让学生交流自己孝敬父母的做法和收获，达到同龄人互相教育、启发、感染的效果。

活动内容：讨论，遇到下列情形该怎么办：

⑴父母只要我读好书，我该怎么办?

⑵父母不让我做家务，该怎么办?

⑶外出时应对父母说什么?

⑷父母生病了，该怎么办?

⑸当父母劳累一天下班回家，我该做些什么?

⑹当父母烦恼时，我该怎么做?

⑺作业未完成被老师留下来而迟归，我该怎么面对父母?

⑻成绩没考时，该如何面对父母?

⑼我想买电脑，父母认为我控制能力不强而不赞成，我该怎么办?

⑽朋友来访，但父母不喜欢，该怎么做?

设计意图：设计这一活动，主要目的在于让学生把孝敬父母落实到自己的实际行动上。孝敬父母表现于日常生活的各个方面，甚至在与父母交往的任何活动中，都有孝与不孝的问题。通过这一活动，可以把学生孝敬父母的心意、表现与行为选择结合起来，提高教育的实效性。

教学建议：指导学生开展这一活动，可以就教材所给材料进行讨论，通过分析、选择来判断是与非，进而明确应该如何对待父母。需要说明的是，这些题目都是开放性的，有许多可以辨析之处，关键是帮助学生树立为父母着想的观念，找出孝与不孝的出发点的不同。比如，成绩要不要告诉父母，本身很复杂。就学生的权利而言，不告诉并不一定错。但如果从爱父母、孝敬父母出发，可以用不同的方式与父母沟通，这对学生自己也有利。如果从怕批评、防父母出发，与父母有情感上的隔阂，就处理不好这件事。中国有句古话“百事孝为先，论心不论事，论事无孝子”。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，首先要表扬孝敬父母的好人好事。如果老师知道一些，也可以先表扬，再引导学生自己谈。其次，让学生谈自己孝敬父母的具体做法，并注意将孝的各个方面的表现予以归类。再次，让学生谈尽孝后的感受。尽孝需要付出，但得到的是甜蜜。让学生在比较中选择孝行，是把教育落到实处的最好策略。也就是说，这种道德规范不是由外界强加的，而是学生自己的主动选择。

三.爱的反思：

活动内容：仔细阅读漫画，回答下列问题：图中“孝子”的言行反映了什么现象?你对此持什么态度?为什么?日常生活中你是否也有过类似的行为?如果有，你将如何改进?

教师行为：引导学生思考：自己曾有过不善待父母的事吗?你当时是怎么想的?发生了怎样的后果?现在你对这件事又是怎样想的?如果你当时按你现在的想法去做，设想一下结果又会是怎样?这一活动先在小组内交流，然后再进行全班交流。

设计意图：这个活动主要通过学生的回忆和反省，来体会父母对子女深沉、无私的爱，同时，意识到自己对父母付出太少，从而增强同学的责任意识，和为父母、为家庭付出的主动意识。

四.爱的传递

教师行为：引导学生回忆2004年春节联欢晚会小品“粮票的故事”。

设计意图：体验孝敬父母不仅是物质上的扶助，更应是精神上的关爱;不仅要孝敬我们的父母，还应孝敬爷爷奶奶、外公外婆等长辈，及至“老吾老，以及人之老”。

第二课 我与父母交朋友

第一框 严也是一种爱(两课时)

知识目标：通过案例的分析讨论及活动的体验探究，帮助学生认识什么是代沟，代沟的表现和形成原因，引导学生认识到逆反心理的危害，同时让学生明白通过亲子双方的努力，代沟是可以填平的。

能力目标：培养学生正确认识自己的自知能力和正确理解家长心情的知人能力;对代沟产生的原因的分析能力;对逆反心理的辨证分析能力，增强促进自我成长的责任意识。

情感态度和价值观目标：对父母亲人的爱;对自己正确行为的赞赏，对错误行为的后悔和耻辱;体会父母对自己的心情和期待，正确对待父母教育的情感;坚持正确的看法和行为，丢掉不良思想行为的态度。

教学重点：正确看待父母对自己的关爱和教育。

教学难点：代沟的产生及逆反心理的危害。

第一课时 成长也会有烦恼

课前准备：课前先通过班主任了解班级学生基本的家庭关系，记录特殊家庭的学生、与父母关系紧张的学生等，以便在活动中给予更多的关注。同时还可以记录家庭关系良好的学生，以便于有意识地让他们在活动中充分发挥作用，给其他同学提供好的建议。

教学过程

一、成长的烦恼

1.同龄人的心声(见附录)

活动内容：引导思考，同学们有过类似的烦恼吗?请举几例。为什么原来和谐亲密的亲子关系，现在变得格格不入?

设计意图：设置学生身边发生的事件场景，勾勒出“生活画面”，以增强学生的认同感。同时对同伴的了解有助于学生纠正认知偏差，缓解心理压力。如一些学生可能本来对自己的亲子关系很不满意，但他可能抱怨自己父亲不好。通过这一了解发现很多人也跟他差不多，知道这种现象是青春期孩子的共性，他对父母的不满情绪就会降低。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，可以先让学生认可教材上的材料，即学生身边的事，是经常发生的事，是每个学生都可能遇到的事。然后可以让学生补充相近的材料，意在让学生参与，介入到现实生活情景之中。再让学生讨论分析原因，从中体会父母的期望、立场、态度、心思，通过这些分析体会父母的爱。最后，让学生思考解决这些问题的办法，这样可以让学生自己教育自己。

教学建议：开展这一活动，重在发挥其导向的功能，并不是要通过这一活动解决全部问题，因而要注意达成有限目标，要在努力方向上引导。要注意让学生站在不同立场上思考问题，即会与父母换位思考，尤其要注意引导学生体会父母严要求中蕴涵的爱心和期待。

2.苦恼的不只是我们(见附录：一份杂志上的两封信)

活动内容：分析成长中为什么会产生这些烦恼?通过比较两代人的不同，分析造成隔阂的原因。

设计意图：设计这一活动，首先在于让学生站在父母的角度看问题，这样对父母的正确做法更容易接受，不当之处也更容易理解和宽容。其次，通过比较，让学生对自己有个再认识。青春期的初中学生容易走极端，看问题容易片面。通过这一活动，可以帮助学生审视自己，从自己方面找原因，促进心理的成熟和处事方法的掌握。还有，比较方法是学生认识事物的重要方法，这一活动可以让学生在探究中获得终身受益的方法，以增强其能力。

教师行为：第一步，让学生分析，找出与父母的差别;第二步，探讨这些差别会造成哪些交往中的障碍;第三步，让学生评价矛盾的性质(爱与期待中的矛盾)，不能夸大这些矛盾;第四步，体会矛盾之中包含的父母的爱心和期待。鉴于比较两代人涉及许多内容，先为学生提供可比较的角度：

教学建议：开展这一活动，老师需要把握好度，即不能搞得太宽太多，因为这只是思想品德课教学的铺垫，而不是教学的重点。二是要渗透辨证观点的教育，即比较中分析并全面地看问题，分别看到两代人的利与弊。三是注意引导学生理解父母对子女的心情。这是体谅父母苦心的关键，也是我们对学生进行思想品德教育的重点。

二、成长不烦恼：

1.阅读感悟：其实你只有8%的烦恼

出示材料：有人做了这样一个心理学实验：要求实验者把未来7天所预料的烦恼事情写下来，投入“烦恼箱”。在过后第三周，打开“烦恼箱”，每个人核对“烦恼箱”的每项烦恼，结果发现其中九成的烦恼没有发生。他们把剩下的一成烦恼仍然留在“烦恼箱”里，过了三周，再拿出来核对，结果发现，那些烦恼已经不成为烦恼了。结论：一般人的忧虑40%属于过去，50%属于未来，只有10%属于现在。92%的忧虑没有发生，剩下8%是你可以轻易应付的。

设计意图：引导学生认识不必因亲子关系出现裂痕而过于忧虑。

2.质疑交流：订立一份《家庭和约》

出示材料：最近，华华在自己的卧室门上挂上了“请勿打扰”的牌子，让妈妈百思不得其解：“是自己做错了什么?还是孩子已经独立到非要挂牌子的地步?”爸爸也难过地说：“自从挂了那块牌子，我觉得好好的家就像旅馆似的。”但华华却不以为然。

教师行为：引导学生讨论：父母为什么为难过?你对此怎么看待?如果是你遇到这种情况，你会怎么办?如果与父母共同制定一个家庭规则并遵照家庭规则去做，结果可能会怎么样?并引导学生自拟提纲，与父母订立一份《家庭合约》。

3.身体力行：预防父母“唠叨”的招数

参照下面“预防父母‘唠叨’的招数”，指导学生将其运用于实践。

学习方面：赶前不赶后，完成了作业，父母唠叨自然少了。

仪表方面：如果你对奇装异服感兴趣，那肯定在父母干涉之列，此类的尽量避免。

社交方面：社交本来是你的自由，但别忘了父母还是你的法定监护人。所以，重要的是让他们知道，你在哪里，干什么，和谁在一起?出门前说得越详细越好，最好把联系电话留下，大多数父母即使知道孩子的派对地址，也不会到现场来“捉拿”你的。

卫生方面：起床叠被子，保持房间整洁，也是许多父母希望孩子养成的好习惯，如果你不讲究这一套，就不让他们看见，更不要让他们插手打扫啦(否则更有话唠叨你了)。适当的时候，来起早起，把自己的房间好好打扫一番，也捎带打扫一下家里的其他房间，这会让你的父母欣喜不已。

课前准备：

本课内容浅显，不涉及更多伦理，主要是情感和实践问题。要提高本课的教育实效，首先要在课前调查了解自己的学生，以加强教育的针对性和主动性。具体包括以下几个方面：①学生的现实生活中，哪些事容易引起与家长的冲突。②学生在化解与家长的冲突，有哪些成功的经验。③学生在与家长的关系中，还存在哪些主要问题。④学生逆反心理在家庭关系中的反映。⑤能够感染学生的例子，特别是在时间和空间上与学生接近的例子。

教学过程：

一.阅读感悟——爱的冲突(见附录)

活动内容：引导思考：你是否也经历过“爱的冲突”?试举一例。仔细体会材料，是爸爸妈妈不爱我们吗?还是他们不知道怎样表达爱?会不会是他们已经表达了而我们却未察觉?代沟，究竟谁不理解谁?是爸爸妈妈不理解我们，还是我们不理解爸爸妈妈?

设计意图：通过阅读和回忆自身心灵深处的感动和故事，让学生读懂父母的真诚与无私，为后面引导学生从自身角度分析逆反心理的危害作铺垫。

二.理性分析——冲突的代价

活动内容：连续性提问：你当时是怎样想的?最终结果怎样?这个结果对你日后的学习和生活与影响吗?如果有，请具体说明。现在你对这件事是怎样想的?如果你当时按你现在的想法去做，设想一下结果又会是怎样?你认为代沟产生的责任主要在于谁，为什么?

设计意图：意在让学生体会家庭冲突的不快，体会逆反心理造成的影响亲子关系、伤害父母和自己等危害，认识到逆反心理所存在的不利的一面。这样能让学生理智地对待与家长的矛盾，不任性，会控制自己的不良情绪。

教师行为：指导学生开展这一活动，主要让学生结合自己的经历谈感受，通过体验明辨是非，以便在今后的生活中作出正确的行为选择。因为冲突的解决有正面和反面两种体验。所以要引导学生从两个方面来谈，既可以讲正面的经验，也可以讲反面的教训。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意以下几点：引导学生讨论;注意保护学生的隐私;事件本身的介绍不必过细，核心在于让学生体验;要注意学生思想的升华，即理性地看待处理问题的不同结果;可以在学生讨论的基础上对危害进行梳理，如情感伤害、经济损失、阻碍家庭和个人发展等。

三.认真聆听——来自父母的心声

活动内容：出示材料：《孩子，我为什么会打你》(见附录)。引导思考：你也有过挨打的经历吗?当时心里是怎么想的?现在如何看待这种经历?采访自己的父母，问问他们当时是怎么想的?看了这篇文章你有什么感想?

教师行为：引导学生感受逆反心理导致的对父母的反抗，其结果都是惩罚了自己：不是拿自己的错误惩罚自己，就是拿父母的错误惩罚自己。这种结果也是对父母的一种伤害：不是拿自己的错误伤害父母，就是拿家长的错误伤害父母。同时帮助学生认识到父母对孩子的爱是出自本能的，是最无私的，只不过在现实生活中，有些父母表达爱的方式令孩子们不太喜欢罢了。但这也不足以导致某些孩子过激的方式来“回报”亲人。

四.出谋划策——面对生活中的烦恼

活动内容：就下列问题进行讨论交流：

①爸爸说写完作业就让我出去玩。我写完作业，妈妈又让我再做两道奥赛题……②妈妈说只要我期末考到班级前三名，就带我去旅游。我真的考了第二名，妈妈却说她没有时间……引导讨论：如果父母“说话不算数”，我们应该怎么办?

①妈妈非要我学钢琴，我一点都不喜欢，我的志向是当一个科学家。②妈妈很支持我，同意我学画画，可是现在我对它的前景不看好。③爸爸就知道让我学习，当尖子生，可我总是考不到第一，失望极了。引导讨论：如果父母的期望与你的愿望不一致，你是坚持己见还是服从父母的意志?你会如何说服父母来支持你的愿望?

①父母偷看了我的日记;②父母将我的朋友拒之门外。引导讨论：当父母的做法“不合理”时，你会怎么做?父母这样做的用意何在?建议：可结合教材中的阅读材料。

①一个同学说：我妈就是烦，每天我吃早饭的时候，她就说：“吃完早饭去喝牛奶，别忘了。”其实，牛奶和书包都放在我的写字台上，我上学拿书包，不就看见牛奶了吗?真是的!②女儿晚上去看电影，九点多回家。妈妈说：“才回来，我到路上都看了好几次了。”女儿说：“妈妈真是的，难道看看就能把我看回来?”③我骑自行车上学，爸妈每次都要叮咛一句：“路上小心，注意安全。”引导讨论：父母讲这些话的真正用意是什么?面对父母的唠叨，怎样做才会双赢?这里重在引导学生领悟同样一句话可以有多种意思的理解，即锣鼓听音，说话听声。

设计意图：选取这些两难问题，当然这些都是青少年学生所关心的、跟他们的成长密切相关的话题，让不同的价值观念相互碰撞，激起个体的内心价值冲突。让学生自主探究增进与父母的了解与沟通、化解冲突的办法，并让学生设想不同的方法可能带来的后果，让学生体会不同的态度、不同的沟通方式和处理方法所带来的结果是不同的。

第二框 两代人的对话(一课时)

知识目标：与父母沟通的过程;与父母沟通的基本要领;与父母交往的主要策略;以宽大胸怀和积极的态度与父母交往，不必非争高下不可。

能力目标：会与父母沟通商量的能力;对多种可能解决问题的方式进行选择的能力;把握与父母交往的诸多策略的应用能力;家庭交往中得失利弊的权衡能力。

情感态度和价值观目标：对父母的尊重，对自己人格的维护;崇尚与父母的平等，与父母共同遵守道德和法律准则;提高与父母沟通、解决问题的主动性;增强学生的责任意识和为家庭付出的主动意识。

教学重难点：

引导学生学会与父母进行沟通，彼此袒露内心世界，进而达到相互理解进行沟通的正确方法，并学习双赢的沟通策略。这既是本课的重点，也是本课的难点。

课前准备

对模拟表演先作出布置。这个模拟扮演活动，意在帮助学生正确地与父母沟通，要考虑多种因素和可能，正确解决与父母的矛盾。要把剧情让学生看仔细，让学生设计可能遇到的种种情形，最后找出双方可以接受的办法。应该给学生提出要求，在准备扮演活动中整理自己的经验和方法。

教学过程

一、借我一双慧眼——正确看待与父母的冲突

活动内容：根据书上的两个观点“家不是说理的地方。俗话说得好，清官难断家务事”和“家是爱的港湾，因为家里的矛盾易产生、也易解决，关键看我们怎么对待”进行讨论。

设计意图：引导学生正确认识家庭矛盾，因为夸大与父母的矛盾，会在处理家庭关系时有抵触情绪，妨碍沟通;看不到矛盾，会不在意解决与父母的矛盾，也不利于矛盾的解决和学生的进步。

教师活动：先让学生发表自己的看法，然后由老师举个具体的例子设计教学情境，分析处理方法，接着让学生讲自己如何处理家庭矛盾，最终得出有必要、有办法解决家庭矛盾的结论。当学生的争辩僵持不下的时候，老师要注意引导学生异中见同;当学生争辩趋同的时候，老师要引导学生同中见异。这样有助于提高学生认识问题和解决问题的能力。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意渗透辨证的观点，要注意引导学生更深入地思考。比如清官难断家务事，可以引导学生分析：家务事通常属于什么性质?是不是每件事只有一个答案?不同的观点和行为分别有什么合理的地方?如果站在对方的立场上来理解和思考，你会不会一定坚持自己的主见?在各有利弊的情况下，尊重别人的选择会带来什么好处?在自己有理的情况下，应不应得理不让人?可以不同意别人的做法，要不要尊重别人的选择?又如说明家中矛盾容易解决，要引导学生分析其中的原因，从父母爱子女、体谅子女的困难、期待子女更好等角度，论证自己的观点。讨论和争辩的过程，是道德学习的过程，也是学生体验的过程，对于掌握与家人交往的方法和艺术、提高教育实效有重大作用。

二、敢问路在何方——掌握与父母交往的方法

1.理解父母

阅读感悟：出示寓言故事：一把坚实的大锁挂在大门上，一根铁杆费了九牛二虎之力，还是无法将它撬开。钥匙来了，他瘦小的身子钻进锁孔，只轻轻一转，大锁就“啪”地一声打开了。

铁杆奇怪地问：“为什麽我费了那麽大力气也打不开，而你却轻而易举就把它打开了?”钥匙说：“因为我最了解他的心。” 设问：寓言给了我们什么启示?

设计意图：引导学生感悟到每个人的心，都像上了锁的大门，任你再粗的铁棒也撬不开。唯有理解，才是打开别人心锁的钥匙，与父母的交往亦如此。

案例分析：结合教材中小冰的例子，小冰冒火的理由是什么?爸爸的理由是什么?你的协调办法是什么?让学生选择A、干脆不去同学家了;B、按照家长的意思办，8点前到家;C、先斩后奏，写完作业、看完录像再回来。你还有什么好办法吗?

教师活动：指导学生开展这一活动，第一步可以引导学生思考处理这一问题的各种可能，并分析其利弊。比如：不到同学家做作业、看录象了，会导致对同学失信，自己也不满意，由此还会迁怒于家长;按家长的要求做，这保证了安全和休息，可未必有时间看录象，自己和同学都不能尽兴;不理家长的要求，写完作业、看完录象再回来，这会让家长担心、着急，说不定到现场亲自捉拿;与家长协商，双方都作些让步，可能双方都满意。第二步在分析各种可能、权衡各种利弊后，不同的学生会有不同的方法，这时可以对这些具体方法进行再剖析，在比较中选择最优方案。第三步，让学生把思考和解决这一问题的过程梳理一下，上升到一般方法论的高度，即引导学生善于与家长沟通，向本框教育目标靠拢。

教学建议：在活动中，要注意尊重学生的分析和选择，不应该预定某种解决问题的模式;鼓励学生大胆设想方案，分析利弊，正确选择;老师要有足够的准备，应对学生讨论中的难以预料的情况。当老师遇到没有把握回答或者难以驾驭的问题时，可以在鼓励学生的同时，将问题留待课下探究。

2.尊重父母

案例分析：母亲要到另一个城市去，临行前母亲问女儿：“回来我想给你买件衣服，可不知你喜欢什么样的?”女儿回答：“您只要把服装店里您瞧着最不顺眼的衣服买回来就行了。”引导讨论：为什么亲子间的价值观会有如此大的差异?这种差异还可能表现在生活中的哪些方面?会对家庭关系产生什么影响?对待这种差异是任之发展还是设法解决?如果你与父母的价值观不一致，你会怎么做?

阅读感悟：《珍珠与谷物》(见附录)

设计意图：重在引导学生领悟：珍珠和公鸡的价值观不同，是因为它们的需要不同。价值不是固有的，事物的价值在于使用者的需要。了解价值观取向是影响相互关系的一个重要原因，常言“话不投机半句多”。进而引导学生认识“多元价值观”存在是一个客观事实，父母和孩子的价值取向不同是正常的。

教学建议：可引导学生思考，自己哪些方面和父母价值观存在冲突?增进学生了解自己和父辈的价值取向差别的主要内容，如对服装的要求，父母在意便宜，宁可式样老一些;少年在意时尚，宁可质量差一些等。引导领悟亲子冲突不是父母变了，也不是自己变坏了，而是自己长大了。这一认识很重要，是积极沟通的前提。因为很多事情无所谓对错，如头发的长短等，仅仅是一种文化。亲子间的矛盾和冲突不一定干戈相见，它是可以通过良好的沟通和接纳多元价值观而缓解的。

3.认真聆听

活动内容：寻找父母与我们的共同点：问问父母，他们像你这么大的时候，他们最崇拜的人是谁?为什么?他们有些什么想法和愿望?他们的父母容许他们做什么，不容许他们做什么?他们是如何争取更多的自由和空间的……

设计意图：家长在回忆自己少年往事的时候，一般会很自豪地，不知不觉中放下家长的架子和孩子敞开心扉。这时，他们更容易理解孩子目前的经历和感受，认真考虑孩子独立的要求，甚至向孩子做出妥协和让步。从而引导学生发现原来爸爸妈妈有这么多与自己相似的行为特征，并把这种新感觉描述下来。

4.讲究艺术

出示材料：母亲在数落儿子，儿子一边看书一边聆听教诲。忽然儿子问母亲：“妈妈，一本内容枯燥冗长的书和说话罗嗦有什么区别?”母亲不假思索地回答：“你可以把书丢一边，可是却无法叫罗嗦的人闭嘴。”说完，母亲突然恍然大悟。“啊!你是在嫌我罗嗦呀!”母子俩都笑了。儿子用幽默的方法不仅提醒了习惯唠叨的母亲，而且自然地避免了母子之间的冲突。请出几个类似的金点子。

教师行为：在引导的时候，重点应提示学生“策略”内容并不重要，而且因人而异;重要的是当我们面对问题的时候，要学习思考什么是双赢的策略?要尽量避免“不满——冲突——冷战”这样的应对模式。

教学建议：要提示学生，没有标准答案，每个人的处境不一样，价值观取向不一样，对一个人是好的选择，对另一个人未必是好的。当没有“最好”即没有双赢时，要选择“更好”。

5.模拟沟通

活动内容：根据教材中小莉的例子模拟与家长沟通的过程。

设计意图：第二个活动侧重于探究处理冲突的步骤，这个活动侧重于让学生掌握与父母沟通的要领，不光有个步骤问题，更是情感交流的过程。沟通涉及的经验很多，核心是以爱的方式尊重父母，理解父母。

八年级英语上册课件(篇11)

一、 Analysis of the text教材分析

1、 Teaching教学内容：Talk about personal traits and how to compare people谈论人物的个性特征及如何对比人物

2、Statue of the Text教材的地位和作用

从教材的整合来说，本部分既有形容词用法的延续，又为后面形容词级的学习打下基础，具有承上启下的作用；从本单元来说，它既是本单元的基本语言知识，又为本单元知识的扩展和综合语言的运用奠定坚实的基础。因此，上好这一课，既可以让知识学习具有一定的延续性，又为后面的教学做好铺垫。

3、Teaching goals教学目标：

1）Language goal知识目标让学生掌握本课的词汇运用。

2）Ability goal能力目标让学生学会用英语与他人谈论人的个性特征和使用形容词进行比较的话题，以及进一步提高学生的英语语言表达能力；

3）Emotional goal情感目标激发学生的学习兴趣，体验英语语言的美，体验知识间的相互联系。让学生充满自信，体验成就感和合作精神。而且通过学习比较级使学生懂得在学习和生活中应相互理解、相互帮助、相互学习。

4、 Important points重点：掌握形容词比较级的变化规则及句型

5、Difficult points难点：使用比较级自如表达

二、Teaching Methods教学方法：

根据英语“课标”的要求，课程要从学生的学习兴趣、生活经验和认知水平出发，发展学生的综合语言运用能力，提高跨文化意识和形成自主学习能力。因此，我将在教学中采用多媒体辅助教学、任务型教学模式，结合听说法、竞赛法以循序渐进的方式来进行教学。

采用听说法和多媒体辅助教学来导入和呈现本节的基本词汇和句型，目的在于用师生互动的方式，共同观察图片，激活学生对所学知识的兴趣，使学生对新知识的识记经过一个由形象思维到抽象思维的转化过程，因此记忆效果更好。

采用任务型教学模式，在活动中以竞赛法来突出重点，培养学生综合语言运用能力，这样不仅激活学生的主体意识，而且激活了英语语言，使学生的自信感逐步增强，从而体验到成功的喜悦。

三、Learning Methods学法：

教法的选择固然重要，但学法也是必不可少的，我们都知道，学生的学习过程并不是孤立于课堂教学之中，应遵循学生的身心发展规律和学习规律，教师在教学的过程中要倡导学生体验、实践、参与、合作与交流的学习方式。瑞士心理学家让？皮亚杰的“建构主义理论”指出：学习是获取知识的过程，但知识不是通过教师传授得到的，而是学习者在一定的情景下，借助他人（包括教师和学习伙伴）的帮助，利用必要的学习资料，通过建构的方式而获得的。结合我校的学情，在本节教学中我主要采用归纳法和小组合作学习的方法。使用归纳法让学生归纳总结形容词比较级的变化规则；使用小组合作学习的方法，让学生参与竞赛和故事表演，使学生用心去体验集体的力量，去感悟合作的魅力，在活动中体验合作成功的快乐。

四、Teaching Steps教学程序：

Activity I活动一：Leading in激趣导入

在本活动中通过听说法配合多媒体辅助教学导入新课，用多媒体显示图画，让学生认识并掌握本课所要学的基本词汇。利用两个人物之间的不同，引出比较级的句子。让学生认识比较级的基本句型。本环节以学生原有的知识为切入点，对比两者之间的不同，不知不觉地将学生引入新课，达到润物无声之效果。

Activity II活动二：Warming up单词热身练习

要想让学生正确地使用比较级，首先应掌握形容词比较级的变化规则。因此，我给出一系列形容词及其比较级形式，让学生通过仔细观察并得出形容词比较级的变化规则，然后朗读记忆。在这一环节，我使用了教学的归纳法，意在培养学生的自主探究能力、观察能力和归纳能力。

Activity III活动三：Comparing句子热身练习

在学生掌握了比较级的变化规则后，便可以开始进行句子的热身练习。要求学生俩人一组用比较级来表达自己与同伴之间的差异，正确地认识自我。此项活动从贴近学生的`学习、生活入手，记忆深刻，使学生很容易掌握重点和难点，准确描述人物的个性特征。

Activity IV活动四：A guessing game“猜谜”游戏

——Who is he/she？他/她是谁？

我认为要充分挖掘教材的内涵，利用游戏来培养学生的听力能力和积极参与教学的主动性，要求一位学生描述班里的另一位学生，并和自己作比较，其他学生猜所描述的人是谁，这样可以给学生更多的发言机会来表达自己的思想。不仅反馈于上一环节的活动，也突出了本节的重点。学生在游戏中逐渐学会了用比较级自如表达，这也是突破难点的一个过程。

Activity V活动五：Competition小组竞赛

本活动采用任务型教学模式及小组自由合作学习的方式，这个环节的步骤是：把全班分为四个小组，每组抽取一个号码，在规定的时间内使用比较级对所抽取的图画进行描述，说出句子最多的小组获胜。此项活动可以培养学生的合作精神和竞争意识，同时可以训练学生快速思维的能力。

Activity VI活动六：Acting知识的拓展

此环节是通过任务型教学途径，分小组用所给的图画续编并表演故事。然后评出小组。这项活动要求学生积极与他人合作，共同完成学习任务，进一步培养了学生运用所学的知识锻炼口语表达能力、和逻辑思维能力。

此项活动后的小结也是本课的总结：“From this story we know，when we are better than others.Don’t laugh at others.When someone is better than you，don’t be frustrated.No one is perfect。 We should learn from each other and help each other.”这个故事告诉我们一个道理：当你比别人强的时候，不要嘲笑别人；当你在某些方面不如别人时，不要自卑。没有人是完美的。在生活和学习中，我们应该相互帮助、相互学习。

Activity VII活动七：Exercises巩固训练

用本节课学过的内容进行当堂训练、当堂巩固，做到“堂堂清”。

五、Homework作业：

《英语课程标准》建议教师把“任务型”教学活动延伸到课堂之外的学习和生活之中。因此，我在家庭作业布置中，分常规性作业和探究性作业两类：

常规性作业：背记本单元的生词。

探究性作业：写作文一篇，标题是“My Friend and I”。

（要求：写出你和你的朋友之间的相同点和不同点。）

六、Blackboard Design板书设计：

They are twins.

They are both lovely.

Xiaoya is calmer than Li Wen.

Li Wen is more outgoing than Xiaoya

A is形容词比较级than B

补充：学生在使用比较级时容易出现的问题：

1、比较的对象不一致。如：My hair is longer than you.

2、双音节形容词的比较级形式使用混乱。

八年级英语上册课件(篇12)

Teaching aims and demands:

1)      To train the students’ ability of reading

2)      To talk about some famous actors, actresses and directors

3)      To learn something about Steven Spielberg

Teaching focuses and difficulties:

1)      To understand the passage

2)      To learn something from Steven Spielberg

Teaching procedures:

Free talk with the students and enjoy some pictures.(films/ actors/actresses/directors)

Listen to the tape and tick the things that are mentioned in the passage.

Oscar (   )   birth year (   )   Sophie’s Choice (   )   Schindler’s List (   )

Speed (   )    Schooling (   )     The Matrix (   )    Film Academy (   )

marriage and family (   )    ET (   )

multiple choice :

1)      How many of Steven Spielberg’s moives are mentioned in the passage_______?

2)      When he was young, Steven Spielberg took English as his major______.

A. because it was his dream           B. because he didn’t do very well at school

C. in order to get a job in a film studio   D.because English is his mother tongue

3)      The phrase “take off”( in Para2 ) has the same meaning as the one in “_______.”

A.      The plane was crashed soon after it took off

B.      He took off his hat and said hello to me

C.      After Meryl Streep won her first Oscar as Best Actress, her career really took off

D.     When his wife was sick in hospital, he took off from work

4)      What can be inferred (推断) from the passage______?

A.      All of Spielberg’s films are real blockbusters

B.      If you learn English well, you will succeed

C.     Behind every successful man there must be a great woman

D.     Hard work and perseverance (坚持不懈) is the way to success

5)      What do you think of Steven Spielberg______?

A. He’s brave            B. He doesn’t work hard

C. His grades were low    D. He has a gift (天赋) for directing films

1. Discussion: “When asked about the secret of his success, Steven Spielberg said that he owes

much of his success and happiness to his wife and children.” What does he mean? Make a choice and then explain why.

(  ) He wants to thank his family because he has little time to be with them.

(  ) His family’s support helped his career take off.

(  ) His wife gave up her own career just for him.

(  ) Others:_________________________________________________.

2. Summary: What can we learn from Steven Spielberg?

Assignment:

Write a passage about one of your favorite film stars.

人教版英语课件

老师的工作之一是编写教案和课件，但是这并不意味着任意编写就可以。教案是实现有效教育的重要工具，那么有哪些值得参考的教案和课件呢？现在教师范文大全的编辑为您带来的是“人教版英语课件”，请务必将此页收藏起来，以免错过有用的信息！

人教版英语课件 篇1

1. In the cave the two brothers discovered______.

A. a secret art museum B. strange-looking animals

C. nothing but paintings D. lots of paintings and carving

2. After they decided to say the night in the cave, they_____.

A. talked about the discovery B. danced excitedly

C. didn’t feel sad at all D. collected enough food

3. The two brothers thought that it looked as if they had stepped into a secret art museum because______.

A. there was a wall of painted animals in the cave

B. there were so many paintings and carvings on the rock

C. they were examining the pictures like visitors to a museum

D. the cave was like an art museum which only the two boys knew

4. Which of the following statements is NOT correct about the writer’s feelings?

A. He was excited because he wanted to tell about the discovery.

B. He felt sad because he couldn’t tell his family they were safe.

C. He was proud they discovered something of great value.

D. He felt disappointed because the cave would become very noisy the next day.

5. Why did the writer think that they were in a better position than their grandparents?

A. Because they were safe and had made a great discovery.

B. Because their grandparents did not know what was happening to them.

C. Their grandparents were very worried, but in fact they were safe.

D. Because they had discovered such extraordinary paintings in the cave.

1. How did the boys feel when they saw the shapes on the rock?

2. What did the writer do then?

3. What astonished them?

4. Why did they stay the night in the cave?

5. Why did the writer feel excited? And why did he feel sad at the same time?

6. Why did the writer want that moment to continue for ever?

7. What did the two boys imagine would happen?

8. What did they wonder about?

9. How old were those carvings and paintings?

10. What was the headline in the newspaper?

1. I got the radio____ again by twiddling（缠绕）with some wires.

A. to work B. working B. worked C. work

2. Many American women are choosing single life or_____ later in life. They are more independent than women______.

A. get married; used to B. Getting married; used to be

C. marrying; used to D. getting marry; used to be

3. I made a great ______in a second-hand bookshop yesterday and got many old books I had wanted for long.

A. discovery B. find C. looking for D. research

4.When the novel Harry Potter ______, it topped best-seller lists for many months.

A. came across B. printed C. came out D. published

5. Many plant species________ by humans and becoming extinct(灭绝).

C. is destroyed D. are being destroyed

6. The Guinness Book of Records is a reference book that______ all types of records about the world and its inhabitants(居住者).

A. covers B. writes C. obtains D. holds

7. Thin oxygen, strong winds, and awfully cold temperatures make_____

impossible for any animal or plant life to exist on the mountain.

8. Centuries ago, women in Europe ______wear wooden or metal corsets (紧身内衣) to give them thin waists.

A. use to B. used to C. are used to D. were used to

9. Red, often used in fast food restaurants, makes us feel active, _____after we have eaten, we want to get up quickly and leave, thus ____space for more customers.

A. so that; making B. so that; to make

C. however; making D. in case; make

10.In Germany, for instance, ____ there are now very few wolves, a campaign has started to protect wolves.

A. which B. where C. that D. when

11. The successfully man talked about the difficulty ____he managed to collect enough money to start his first company.

A. which B. with which C. with it D. in which

12. _____weather it is, we shall start tomorrow; and I cannot wait any longer.

A. No matter B. What C. Whatever D. Even though

13. ----Have you repaired my watch yet?

----Not yet, but I _____it by 11 am.

A. am repairing B. have repaired

C. will have repaired D. have been repaired

14. It looks as if the rain will continue for some time, but it may____ before dark.

A. turn out B. turn up C. come out D. clear up

15. From 1920 to 1950 many attempts to climb Mount Everest failed _____ the cold and dry air, fierce winds, _____ difficult terrain, and high altitude.

A. as a result B. because of C. so that D. that’s why

eg.Tom was very quiet this morning.

It’s bad manners tokeep silent when the teacher asks you a question.

He stood there still.

The sea is calm now,but it can also be rough sometimes.

He tried tobe calm,but couldn’t.

2)with+n.+doing/done/to do/adj./adv./prep phrase

eg.With the house burnt,he had nowhere to stay.

He can’t fall asleep with the light on.

With the man leading the way,I found the way easily.

With a report tofinish,he had tostay up until midnight.

He can’t be engaged in the work with such a loud noise outside.

eg.The weather has cleared up.

Her face cleared up as she read the letter.

When you finish your meal,please clear up=fix up the kitchen.

The book has cleared up=solved many problems for me.

They have cleared up the misunderstanding between them.

on one’s way;in the way;by the way;by way of

eg.I’m writing a report;don’t be in the way.

He went to Beijing by way of Shanghai.

feel/fight/make/wind/find one’s way

eg.It’s so dark in the cinema that we had to feel our way.

After school,the students made their way=headed for home.

eg.He dog has a keen ~ of smell.

This word has many ~s.

a ~of pleasure/humor/duty/beauty/safety/justice

There is no ~ in doing that.

in a sense/make sense/make sense of

eg.What you say is true in a ~=in some/a way=to some extent.

What you said at the meeting made no ~.

Can youmake ~ of this poem?

in a word=as a rule=on the whole/in words/with these words/by word of mouth/leave word/break one’s word/eat one’s words/waste one’s words/have a word with/have words with=quarrel with

人教版英语课件 篇2

一、教法建议

1. 目的与要求

这是一篇说明文。通过教学的每个环节实现以下三个目的：

（1）了解有关the USA , New York的一般情况，如：人口，历史，政府以及the bison等

（2）帮助学生学习掌握本单元的重点词汇和短语；

（3）在帮助学生提高阅读能力的同时，帮助指导学生如何运用英语介绍某一地区（城市或国家）的能力并能缩写课文（100-150 words ）.

本单元的能力目标：

a.理解课文大意，能回答有关问题；

b.能复述课文；

c.将课文改写成100-150 words短文；

（以上能力目标，a. 三会， b. 二会，c.一会。）

2. 本单元重点知识：

(1)单词和词组：tear v. turn v. rot vi. shoot n.

tear down ,turn away ,have an effect on

take the possession of ,a handful of ,give in ,

make an agreement with ,have trouble with ,

now that ,

(2)呈现与训练：

① tear : to break by pulling apart 撕开，撕裂

tear down :to destroy a building 拆毁（建筑）

Paper tears easily . 纸容易撕破。

She tore the table cloth in half . 她把那块桌布撕成两块。

The boy tore the letter open . 把…撕开

He tore the picture into pieces . 把…撕成碎片

John torn up his test paper so that his mother wouldn’t see his low grade . 撕碎

They tore the old building down in order to build a new one . 拆毁

② turn v. or link v.

turn是一个常用词，可以构成许多词组。如：

turn on / off / up /down (用于电流水的)

开 / 关 / 开大 / 开小

turn up : appear

The pop star didn’t turn up at the party . 出场

turn away (本单元为”to refuse to admit “)

从……赶走；拒绝（某人进入）（本义为“把……转开”）

The hotel porter turned away anybody who wasn’t wearing a collar and tie . 拒绝……进入

He turned up his coat collar to keep out the wind . 翻起

She turned away in horror at the sight of so much blood. 转身不看

I turned in bed all night ,I couldn’t sleep because of the heat . 辗转反侧

She turned the car into a narrow street (onto the highroad ). ……开进一条狭小街道（开上高速公路）

I found that the milk had turned sour . 变酸（link v. ）

The young soldier didn’t turn against his country ,instead he gave his life to his country . 背叛

Mary picked up a wallet on her way home and she turned it in to the teacher the next morning . 上交

The thief was turned over to the police. 移交

He is a good man you can turn to for help . 求助

这类词和词组很多，要学会读懂上下文的内容，准确理解，找到一个词组的本义，转义和喻义，这对扩大词汇量和提高阅读能力很有好处。

③ rot vi. : go bad corrupt 烂，腐败；Vt. 使……烂

Some apples rotted on the tree .

The wood of the stairs has rotted away in pieces .

④ shoot n. 幼芽，幼枝；

shoot vi. vt. 开枪，射中；

（shot作名词是“开枪，枪声”的意思）

There are a lot of new shoots on the tree .

The old man heard two shots walking through the woods.

The soldier fired a shot . ……开了一枪

The man shot at the bird ,but he didn’t shoot it .

那个人向着鸟开枪，但是没有射中

⑤ have an effect on 对……产生影响

Punishment will have a bad , but not a good effect on a child who does something wrong .

⑥ take the possession of 占有；夺取

⑦ a handful of 少量的

⑧ give in 屈服，让步

⑨ make an agreement with 与……达成协议

⑩ have trouble with 因苦恼；同……有矛盾

now that 既然

3. 本单元应掌握的难点知识：

（1）常见的主语形式：

一般说来，英语句子中的主语形式常见的有以下八种：

A bison is a large animal found on the American plains .（名词）

This is the room Mr Lu Sun once lived in .（代词）

She is a quick girl .（人称代词）

The old are taken good care for in their own family . （形容词）

Two times five is ten .（数词）

Fishing is interesting . （动名词）

To save money now is impossible to us students .（不定式短语）

What surprised me most was that it seemed to be a few days before a new house was set up . （主语从句）

以上有关主语八种形式需要在阅读和练习中熟记并掌握。

（2）主语和谓语的一致性问题

主语和谓语的一致性问题是大多数学生学习英语时遇到的最大的困难之一。一个句子中的谓语动词必须与这个句子中的主语人称，数的形式保持一致关系。例如，句子中的主语是单数形式，其谓语动词用单数形式。这种主谓一致的划分归纳起来有以下八种。

① 由and连接的名词作主语时

a. 如果由and连接的两个名词（不同概念）作主语时，谓语动词要用复数形式。如：

Tom and Jack live in Room 305.

Both you and I are to be sent to Tibet.

What he said and what he did agreed with each other.

b. 当and连接的两个名词指同一个人、同一件事或一概念，这时and后面的名词前没有冠词，其谓语动词用单数形式（这里and相当于as well as ）。如：

The singer and composer is coming to our school .

那位歌唱家兼作曲家将来我们学校。

Bread and butter is often served for breakfast in our dining hall .

（比较：The boy and the girl were given a book each .每个同学都分得一本书。其中 “each”是同位语，句中主语为复数。）

我们食堂早点经常供应奶油面包。

常见的由and连接的两个名词指由一个概念的形式有：the needle and thread针线，salt and water盐水，the or and knife刀叉，soap and water肥皂水，iron and steel钢铁等。

C. 由and连接的两个并列主语为单数概念。主语前面分别由each , every ,no等词来修饰时，其谓语动词为单数形式。

Each doctor and each nurse was sent for .

把所有的医生和护士都清来了。

Every boy and every girl is able to go to school in that village .

在那个村子里所有的孩子们都能上学。

注意：more than one和many a 修饰的单数名词后面的谓语用单数形式，但其意义是复数。

如：

More than one student is fond of folk- music .

许多学生喜欢民间音乐。

Many a boy enjoys playing foot-ball .

许多男同学喜欢踢足球。

② 当主语后面接说明主语的修饰词或插入语时，谓语动词的数不受修饰成份的影响，仍同主语的关系一致。

这些修饰成分常见的有：with, along with , togeth whit (和…一起)；as well as (还) ；like (像)；no less than (不亚于)；rather than (而不是)；more than（多于)；as much as (如…一般多)；but ,except（除了……）；besides (除了……还……)；including包括；in addition to（另外）等引导的一个修饰结构，放在主语后面。如：

The old man , along with his two grandsons, often have a walk in the evening .

Jenny , as well as her friends , is going abroad .

The house ,including the garden and the garage ,was sold out .

③ 当集合名词作主语时

根据句子内容，谓语动词可以是单数也可以是复数形式。在这一用法中，要注意正确判断主语是“整体”概念，还是“个体”概念。

如：# The whole nation regard Premier Zhou Enlai as one of the greatest leaders .

(句中 “nation” 表示“全国人民”谓语用复数)。

注: 集合名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数还是复数，取决于它强调的内容，如果一个名词作为一个整体看待，谓语动词用单数形式，表示“全体一致的行动”或者“群体关系”；当谓语动词表示“身份”、“情感”或强调“每个成员”时，用复数形式。如：

The audience was in good order .

观众保持良好的秩序。（指整体状态）

The audience were greatly encouraged .

观众们深受鼓舞。（指具体的人）

常用的集合名词有：group ,class ,team ,family ,nation ,army ,crowd ,audience ,public, government , majority（大多数）等。

有些集合名词如people、cattle（牛群）等在任何情况下都与谓语动词的复数形式搭配。

④ 就近原则

以连词or either…or neither…nor not only…but also…连接的名词或代词作主语时，谓语动词与其相邻的那个名词的数一致。

如： # Among the boys ,one or two are able to jump 1.6 metres .

在这些同学中，一二个人能跳过1.6米。

⑤ 以 “某些不定代词或表示数量的词 + of + 名词”的结构，谓语形式要与of 后的名词保持一致。

常见的这类词有：all , some , a lot , plenty , any , part ,the rest ,one-third percent + of

如： 70 percent of the surface is covered with water .

70 percent of the farmers have impoved their living conditions .

⑥ 有些不定代词或表示数字的名词修饰的名词或词组作主语时，句中谓语动词用复数。这类词组常用的有：few (of ) , a few , both , both of ,a number of + 复数名词+谓语动词（复数）

如： # Few of the students were in the classroom yesterday , for it was Sunday .

昨天教室里没有几个人，因为是星期日。

[注]：在 “ a number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中，“复数名词”是中心词，“a number of ”作定语，谓语用复数形式；而在 “ the number of + 名词（复数）” 结构中， “the number “是“中心词”，谓语动词用单数形式。如：

A number of questions were always asked when the manager got to his office .

The number of the students in this school is 1,560.

[注] 当 “the number”.表示“…数量或号码”时，谓语动词用单数。如：

The number of the key is 207.

⑦ “the + 形容词（分词或数词）” 结构起名词作用时

如果这个结构表示的是一类人，谓语动词用复数形式；如果这个结构表示抽象概念（或具体的某一个人），谓语用单数形式。如：

The young are able to create their own future.

There was an old lady and a young girl in the park . The young was the daughter of the old .

The wounded were taken to hospital without delay .

⑧ 表示重量、距离、金钱，一段时间及由one and a half修饰的复数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。如：

Twenty dollars isn’t enough to buy the book .

Ten miles isn’t far .

Five times six is thirty.

One and a half apples was left on the plate .

二、学海导航

如何培养和提高作答单项填空题的能力。

单项填空题主要考查中学阶段所学词法和句法中常见的语言内容，试题具有信息量大，综合性强，突出语言的交际能力等特点。回答单项填空题，不能单纯从语法规则入手，而是要求考生必须从题干提供的语言环境出发，综合所学的语言语法知识正确判断。建议参考以下三个步骤：

1.认真阅读提纲，了解大意；

2.根据句中所缺部分和四个选项的概念和形式，判断考查什么；

3.从提纲的内容和选项的形式两个方面进行匹配，达到内容和形式的统一。如：

________want to work in Xinjiang after graduation.

A. Not only Ann but also her friends B. Neither Ann nor Tom

C. Either Ann or her friend D. Nobody but Ann

答案：A

解析：此题句子大意是“……想毕业后去新疆工作”根据句中所缺部分和四个选项不难看出此题考查的是主谓一致问题。句中“want”是一般现在时复数形式，那么，此句的主语应是复数形式；四个选项是D是单数，故与本题要求不符；A，B，C三项都是由连词连接的两个名词作主语。根据“就近原则”（见主谓一致问题4）答案为A。

另外，进行自我训练时，要注意按高考要求的时间（12分钟）完成25个单选题。并查出造成失误的原因。如：知识不准确；偏重语法而忽视内容；或受母语的干扰等原因造成的失误。发现问题，抓住重点，集中一段时间重点突破。

三、智能显示

1. 检查方式

（1） 按课文有关人口，历史，政府等分项复述课文，然后，再复述全文；

（2） 群体复述课文 ( Retell in group )

（3）改写课文

2. 同步训练

① 课文要点训练

I. 单词拼写（计分10）

1. Many Europeans e______ the continent of Africa in the 19th century. 1___________

2. The moment old Jonh put a h________ of sweets on the chair by the bed , little Tom ran towards to it . 2___________

3. India gained i_______ from Britain in 1947. 3___________

4. Marx once said that labour c________ man itself . 4____________

5. After reading the letter from her boss , Jane t______ it up and threw

it into the dustbin. 5____________

6. I wouldn’t think it w______ to ask him join the club─he’ll only refuse. 6____________

7. Bob was a shy boy ,and he always sat a _____ from the other children. 7____________

8. This medicine has an u_____ taste , but it is of great help. 8____________

9. Ann asked Jim to give up smoking not only because she o___ to the smell. 9___________

10. About 70 percent of the p_______ in China are peasants . 10___________

Ⅱ. 单项选择（计分15）

11. Will you please ______ the radio ? The baby is sleeping.

A. turn off B. turn down C. turn up D. turn on

12. The husband coughed day and night .It’s the wife’s fault for giving______ to him so that he didn’t stop smoking .

A. up B. off C. in D. out

13. -Why ______ they ______ the building?

-Because another new one is to be built there .

A. have been destroyed B. did pull down

C. do remove D. are turning down

14. -It is the people who ______ history.

-And labour ____ man itself .

A. create created B. created invented

C. discover made D. invent creates

15. ─I have much difficulty _______ maths.

─Well , I have some trouble________ the English pronunciation.

A. in with B. in learning with C. with in D. in in

16. -You shouldn’t ______ from the girls in your class.

-But I don’t like ______ .

A. keep away being laughed at B. keep to laugh at

C. turn away to be laughed at D. return laughing

17. Last year some over _____ buildings ______ in the city.

A. 20-story were set up B. 20-storey set up

C. 20-storied had set up D. 20-floor had been set up

18. The old mother was _______ to hear that her daughter had a ____ journey.

A. pleasant pleasant B. pleased pleased

C. pleased pleasing D. pleased pleasant

19. -The young mother ______ her baby Jimmy.

-Really ? My brother ______ Jimmy , too .

A. calls names B. named is named

C. named was named D. called calls

20. Old Jack made a living _____ waste paper ,while his brother _______on slaves .

A. by selling made money B. to sell was rich

C. with lives D. on earns his living

21. _____ about three hundred people _____ the local illnesses ____ in that area.

A. As is known to us die from one year

B. It is said that die of a year

C. As we know are killed per year

D. It is reported that kill every year

22. _____ you are unwell , I’ll go to the meeting instead .

A. Because B. For C. Now that D. Though

23. We come to realize that we have to try our best to create a new life _____ our own and ______our own .

A. with , by B. on with C. of by D. for on

24. Don’t you think what to learn in class ____ the same effect ____ the character of the students ______ what to learn through practice ?

A. has on as B. have for as C. is in that D. are to from

25. Which of the following is NOT correct ?

A. Japan faces the Pacific on the east .

B. Taiwan lies in the east of Fujian belonging to China.

C. North of the United States lies Canada .

D. Britain stands to the northwest of France.

（2）语法训练（主谓一致）：

Ⅲ.单项选择

26. All of the work _____ finished and neither the teacher nor the students _____ enough time now .

A. is , has B. is , have C. are , has D. are ,have

27. What I saw ______ two boys running after the thief .

A. is B.are C. are D. were

28. This exercise on agreement of subjects and verbs ______ easy for you .

A. is B. was C. was D. were

29. Here _______ the papers you ask for .

A. is B. was C. were D. are

30. There ______ to be many arguments on both side.

A. seems B. is C. seem D. are

31. Half of the money ________ to you and half of the books _______ to you , too .

A. belong, belong B. belongs , belongs

C. belong, belongs D. belongs, belong

32. Taking pictures _______ not only young men but also many of the old people .

A. are interested in B. are interesting

C. interests D. is interested in

33. Ten minutes _______ more than enough time to complete this exercise.

A. are B. is C. were D. was

34. One hundred and fifty pounds _______ what you should weigh.

A. are B. maybe C. should be D. is

35. You are the one who ______ wrong that Susan is one of those people who ______ out of their way to be helpful .

A. are , goes B. are , go C. is , go D. is , goes

36. Where and when to go ______ Jack since his graduation from college .

A. has been troubling B. has been troubled

C. have troubled D. have been troubling

37. Six eights _____ forty- eight , while six times nine _____ fifty - four .

A. is , are B. are , is C. is , is D. are ,are

38. Nobody but you _______ going to London on business next month.

A. are B. were C. is D. was

39. It ________ Tom and John who ______ here yesterday preparing for today’s experiment.

A. were, were B. are , were C. was , were D. is , were

40. None of the four boys ______ a good swimmer two years ago , but now all of them ______ able to swim across the river .

A. was , are B. is , are C. are , are D. was ,is

Ⅳ. 完型填空（计分20）

Chicago --- lying in the east of the USA--- is a rather young American city . It was 41 completely rebuilt 42 the Creat Fire of 1871. One’s first impression of the city may 43 streams of cars running to and 44 on the highways , skyscrapers and the wide green water of Lake Michigan , 45 lies to the northeast of the city . The 46 of the city is over 228 square miles 47 a population of about 3 million .

The 48 of Chicago on the whole is almost the same as 49 of Beijing with 50 hot days in summer , 51 and fresh days in 52 and icy but often 53 days in winter . The spring in Chicago is 54 changeable in temperature. For instance, I saw a snowfall in early 55 this year 56 some of the flowers were already in 57 bloom . Chicago is also famous 58 its frequent strong winds , and 59 it has got the name of “ the 60 City .”

41. A. most B. almost C. mostly D. merely

42. A. before B. since C. after D. when

43. A. have B. mean C. be D. include

44. A. from B. above C. down D. along

45. A. when B. that C. which D. where

46. A. land B. measure C. area D. size

47. A. having B. with C. for D. and

48. A. climate B. weather C. temperature D. season

49. A. which B. it C. the one D. that

50. A. fairly B. rather C. much D. too

51. A. colorful B. colorless C. colour D. coloured

52. A. spring B. winter C. fall D. summer

53. A. clean B. clear C. cleaning D. clearly

54. A. little B. bit C. a lot D. a little

55. A. April B. May C. January D. June

56. A. and B. but C. when D. while

57. A. full B. filled C. filling D. full of

58. A. as B. for C. of D. with

59. A. in fact B. in a word C. as a result D. above all

60. A. Snowy B. Windy C. Rainy D. Sunny

V. 阅读理解（计分25）

（ A ）

Christopher Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October , 1492. He had spent eighteen years in planning for that wonderful voyage which he made a cross the Atlantic Ocean .The Spanish king and queen ,who were interested in finding a sea route to India ,offered him ships and men so that he could carry out his plan . He crossed the Ocean and discovered strange islands ,inhabited ( vt. 居住于) by people unknown to Europeans .He believed these islands to be part of India.

Early in 1493, Columbus returned to Spain. There was great rejoicing（欢庆）in the country , and he was hailed（欢呼）as the hero who had made an epoch-making discovery .Crowds of people lined the streets to do him honour , and the king and queen welcomed him to their palace. Never had such respect been shown to any common man.

61. Christopher Columbus discovered America ________.

A. on the 12th of November

B. more than 800 years

C. at the beginning of the fifteenth century

D. by the end of the fifteenth century

62. He had spent ______ in planning for the wonderful voyage .

A. eighteen days B. eighteen months

C. eighteen years D. much time

63. Finally the Spanish king and queen offered him ships and men so that _____.

A. he would have faith in himself

B. he could work out his new plan

C. he could display his courage

D. he could put his plan into practice.

64. He crossed the ocean and discovered strange islands , inhabited ______.

A. by a people unknown to Europeans

B. by a people already known to Europeans

C. by Europeans

D. by his fellow-countrymen

65. After returning to Spain he was hailed as the hero ______.

A. who had conquered（征服）nature

B. who had made an epoch-making discovery

C. who had discovered a new planet

D. who had made a great invention

（ B ）

The United States became a rich industrial nation toward the end of the 1800s . There were more goods ,more services , more jobs ,and a high standard of living . There was more of everything, including problems .One problem was monopoly（垄断）. In some cases ,several companies that made the same product would agree not to compete with one another .They would all agree to charge the same price .These agreements made it impossible for buyers to shop around for lower prices for certain products .

Some people decided that huge companies had too much power and controlled too many markets . Because of their wealth and power , they could see to it that governments passed laws favorable to them . Many people believed that monopoly and price fixing were bad for buyers and bad for the country so that they should be broken up .

Such laws and government action didn’t entirely do away with monopoly. Nor did they stop the growth of huge companies . But they did show the American people had decided that some of the changes that taken place were harmful .

66. From paragraph 1, we can know that big companies ______.

A. produced certain kinds of goods

B. sold the same goods at the different prices

C. formed only one big company

D. reached and agreement on prices

67. Because of the agreements between big companies ,______.

A. people had to buy things at certain shops

B. the prices of their goods were much lower

C. people had no choice but to buy goods at fixed prices

D. there were fewer markets in some states

68. According to the laws passed by the national government , companies _______.

A. were not allowed to control the markets

B. could not force people to buy their products

C. should have fixed prices for their products

D. must produce the same kind of goods for the same markets .

69. Some American people thought that ________.

A. the government should make some of the huge companies much smaller

B. the country’s industry was growing too rapidly

C. shops should have the same price for the same kind of goods

D. their country’s getting rich was both good and bad to the people.

70. Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage ?

A. Big companies could not have any effort on the governments .

B. A certain number of markets were still controlled by big companies .

C. Many Americans were worried about the changes in their country.

D. Some of the laws were in favor of buyers .

短文改错（计分15）：

One afternoon in April , 1912, a new ship set off 71_______________

from England to America on it first trip . It was one of 72_______________

the largest and first ship at that time . 73_______________

It was cold , but the trip was pleasant and people are 74_______________

enjoying themselves . The next day was even cold . People 75_______________

could see icebergs here or there . It was night , suddenly 76_______________

the man on watch shouting “Look out ! Iceberg !” 77_______________

It was too late ,a ship hit the iceberg and came to 78_______________

a stop . There that was a very big hole in the ship and 79_______________

water began to come .Slowly the ship stated to go down . 80_______________

参考答案：

1. explored 2. handful 3. independence 4. created 5. tore 6. worthwhile 7.apart 8. unpleasant 9. objected 10. population

11-15. B C D A B 16-20. C A D B A 21-25. B C D A B 26-30. B B A D C 31-35. D C B D A 36-40. A B C C A

41-45. B C D A C 46-50. C B A D B 51-55. A C B D A 56-60. D A B C B

61-65. D C D A B 66-70. D C A D A

71. √ 72. on it --- on its 73. ship ---ships 74. Are --- were 75. Cold---colder 76. or --- and 77. shouting ---shouted 78. a ship --- the ship 79. that 80. come --- come in

Unit 13 The USA

一、同步题库

(一)单项填空

1.Their wedding yesterday. Many friends came to congratulate them on their marriage.

A.was taken place B.was to happen C.took place D.would hold

2.Since he is ready to help you, you should say“thank you”.

A.at last B.at first C.at most D.at least

3.Mr Smith with his wife goes to the cinema .

A.day by day B.now and again C.here and there D.day and night

4.Drivers,of course,want to travel miles with petrol and

hours.

A.many,a little,few B.more,fewer,less

C.more,less,fewer D.many,less,fewer

5.The rain has my new dress.

A.damaged B.hurt C.destroyed D.failure

6.He was sorry to fail again in the driving test. His only was that he was too nervous.

A.reason B.cause C.regret D.failure

7.Good advice is price.

A.over B.cause C.destroyed D.ruined

8.The basin of water won't freeze, the temperature is well above zero.

A.unless B.because C.even if D.as though

9. put the medicine the little boy can't reach it.

A.Do,where B.Don't that C.Just,which D.Do,there

10.Rather than on a crowded bus,he always prefers a bicycle.

A.to ride,riding B.ride,to ride C.ride,ride D.riding ride

11.You can fly to London this evening you don't mind changing planes in

Paris.

A.except B.if C.until D.unless

12.It's rule that comes home first cooks the dinner for the whole family.

A.who B.somebody who C.whoever D.anybody

13.Beautifully ,the little girl tried to make herself .

A.dressed,noticed B.what will man look like

C.dressed,noticing D.dressed,notice

14.The weather turned out to be very good, was morethan we could expect.

A.what B.which C.that D.if

15.No one can be sure in a million years.

A.what man will look like B.what will man look like

C.man will look like what D.what look will man like

(二)用合适的介词或副词填空

1. my horror,I noticed two men trying to break my office.

2.- the same,I expect you'll come to visit my hometown.

-I'm looking forward that.

3.Farmland is becoming smaller day day several reasons.

4.Don't drive into the bush plenty of water and never throw your cigarette

of the window .

5.We must try all means to get rid flies.

6.Generally speaking,a newly-built house is likely to fall ,

the case of an earthquake.

7. 1920,people from Italy have come to Australia great numbers.

8.The village used to be rather poor.One every three children could

not go to school and most families were debt.

9.-How do farmers round their sheep or cattle?

-It depends the size of their farms.

10.No one has far been brave to enter the forest alone.

(三)改正下面句子的错误(无错的句子不要改；有错的句子中每句只有一处错误)

1.The long fence is used to keeping out a kind of wild dog.

2.Cattles are kept in some countries mainly for beef.

3.They pay peasants very a little money to work in the fields for them.

4.He had to have a job, or go hunger.

5.Their mother can't afford to feed them to meat and fish every day.

6.New types of plants have been developed in Egypt to grow in desert land.

by hunting, they are very experienced at killing wild animals.

8.In area, Australia is about the same size of the USA, which has more than thirteen times as many people.

9.In Australia fruit and vegetables are grown in areas where is enough water.

10.What surprised me was that he spoke English so well.

11.Mr White slowed down his car, for he saw a blind man cross the road.

12.Why did she keep on wipe her eyes with a damp towel?

(四)完形填空

Agatha Christie seldom went out at night. She never(1)the night when she met a(2)many years ago.

That evening she was (3)to a birthday party which (4)until 2 o'clock in the

morning.Agatha(5)in the quiet street alone.Suddenly from the shadow(阴影)of a (6)building a tall man with a sharp knife in his right hand (7)out at her.“Good morning,lady,” the man said in a (8)voice,“I don't think you wish to (9)here!”

“What do you(10)?”Agatha asked.

“Your earrings(耳环).Take them off!”

Agatha suddenly had a (11)idea.She tried to cover her necklace (12)the collar(衣领)of her overcoat while she used(13)hand to take off her earrings and then she quickly(14)them on the groud.“Take them(15)let me go.”The robber(16)that the girl didn't care for the earrings at all,only trying to (17)the necklace.He thought the necklace (18)cost more,so he said,“Give me your necklace.”

“Oh,sir,It's(19)worth much.Please let me(20)it.”“Stop rubbish(废话).Quick!”

With (21)hands,Agatha took off her necklace.As soon as the robber (22),she picked up her earrings and ran as (23)as she could to one of her friends.The earrings (24)480pounds and the necklace the robber had taken(25)was worth six pounds.

1.A.minded B.forgot C.remember D.regretted

2.A.friend B.murderer C.robber D.stranger

3.A.invited B.asked C.going D.walking

4.A.delayed B.ended C.began D.lasted

5.A.walked B.drove C.waited D.watched

6.A.small B.dark C.old D.low

7.A.looked B.shouted C.stepped D.ran

8.A.loud B.low C.die D.cry

9.A.suffer B.quarrel C.die D.cry

10.A.like B.mean C.want D.say

11.A.bright B.foolish ny D.safe

12.A.under B.by C.with D.below

13.A.her right B.her left C.the other D.another

14.A.dropped B.put C.laid D.threw

15.A.and B.but C.so D.then

16.A.knew B.saw C.observed D.thought

17.A.wave B.hid C.defend tect

18.A.would B.must C.should uld

19.A.really B.actually C.even D.not

20.A.wear B.keep C.have D.take

21.A.nervous B.little C.shaky D.beautiful

22.A.signed B.permitted C.disappeared D.nodded

23.A.calmly B.quietly C.quick D.fast

24.A.worth B.valued of C.sold st

25.A.away B.out C.off D.down

答案：(一)1-5 C D B C D 6-10A C B A B 11-15B C A B A

(二)1.To,into 2.All,to 3.by,for 4.with,out either 5.by,of 6.less,down,in 7.Since,in 8.in,in 9.up,on 10.so,enough

(三)1.keeping鰇eep 2.Cattles鯟attle 3.去掉a 4.hunger鰄ungry 5.to鰋n 6.对 鯨iving 8.of鯽s 9.is前加there 10.对 11.cross鯿rossing 12.wipe鰓iping

(四)1.B 2.C 3.A 4.C 5.A 6.B 7.D 8.B 9.C 10.C 11.A 12.C 13.C 14.D 15.A 16.B 17.D 18.A 19.D 20.B 21.C 22.C 23.D 24.D 25.A

人教版英语课件 篇3

1、句型和语言点（见教学重点）。

2、用所学的知识与伙伴进行交流、沟通，学会改错、写作。

利用多媒体手段营造积极和谐教学氛围，使学生不自觉地进入情景之中，充分调动学生的思维活动和情感体验，引起学生的共鸣。

在运用语言的过程中培养学生的观察力、分析力、想象力和自学能力，帮 助学生加强记忆力，提高思维能力和运用英语的综合能力，激发创造能力。

三、教材分析：

这是高三复习阶段的一节写作课。这节书面表达课就从审题谋篇等方面入手来完成教学目的，侧重于引导学生在把握书面表达的写作前准备即谋篇审题能力，使学生在动手写作前迅速构思按照规范的模式来完成谋篇审题：在教学中不仅仅强调写，对于与写作紧密联系的听、说、读、改错都有兼顾。采用任务型教学法和小组合作探究学习法，从而激发学生的学习兴趣，同时也能扩大课堂的语料输入量及学生的语言输出量。

五、教学难点：

1、如何帮助学生运用写作策略，促进学生自主写作。

2、使学生了解谋篇的重要性，培养谋篇的能力和习惯。

2、任务型教学法：

Come up with some proverbs for the students to put them into Chinese。

Recitation is of the first importance in any language learning！

Practice makes perfect！ …

What do you learn from the above proverbs？

Make it clear to the students the importance of writing in English subject of the college entrance exams and then the goals of this lesson。

Show on the whiteboard a writing。

人教版英语课件 篇4

一、教学目标：

1． 能力目标：通过本次作文练习提高口语表达能力。

2． 知识目标：通过本次的写作提高学生的词汇量。

3． 情感目标：增强学生之间的了解，提升生生之间的友谊。

二、教学重难点：引导学生使用一些基本的简单的句型来介绍自己。

教学用具: 黑板、纸

三、教学过程：

1. 导入：今天班里来了一位新同学，你和他会展开怎样的对话呢

2. 课题呈现：

⑴今天我们就以introduce yourself为题来讨论一下这个话题。

(2)现在请你们讨论一下我们在对话过程中可能涉及到哪些话题呢？请同学来回答，师生共同总结可能遇到的话题

a. Where are you from？

b. Do you like the weather?

c. What’s your parents?

d. What fruit do you like?

（3）老师提示有可能遇到的词汇：China、America、

England、Singapore、sunny 、cloudy、snowy、rainy、doctor、nurse postman、teacher、watermelon、kiwifruit、apple banana、orange、friends等等

（4）请同学们和同桌就我们已经讨论并总结过的内容编一个小对话，要求把所有的内容都能够设计进去。

（5）请同学们表演自己的对话，在表演的过程中其他同学注意他们是否出现错误，是否有漏掉的信息点并且记下你不知道的词汇和句型。

3.评价最佳对话：在这里我们评出对话做的内容最丰富的，词汇量最佳的一组，你觉得你从这一组中能学到更多的词汇和句型对你的帮助最大。

4.习作练习。现在请你就你和你的同伴所编的小对话换一种形式写出来也就是Introduce yourself.将对话中所涉及的各种个人信息总结起来就是你自己的个人信息我们来试着写一下。

5.挑选个别同学的作文进行讲解，指出优点和缺点并且再次强调写作的方法和要求。

6.Homework:具体实践：

请你就今天你所学的到的相关信息写一篇作文Thisis me.80词左右。

提示：

①你的基本信息，姓名、年龄、等等

②你来自哪里

③你的父母是干什么的

④你喜欢吃什么水果等等。

四、课后小结

1. 有部分学生词汇量不够，造成了一定的写作困难。

2. 一些学生的中式思维句式，逻辑思维也比较乱。

3. 口语表达能力不够，无法用英语来较好的表达。

五、今后措施

1. 抓住作文的主题，要做到基本的句式正确，语句通顺。

2. 增加词汇量，基本句型的背诵。

六、教学反思：本课从学生的实际设计，要求学生能够用英语做简单的自我介绍，有一部分学生因为词汇量的干扰并不能很好的完成本节课的任务，但是大部分学生还是可以的，以后要注意培养学生的口语表达能力，注意词汇的记忆以及基本句型的掌握，从而提高学生能够的写作能力。

七、板书设计

人教版英语课件 篇5

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

如果说美国作家爱伦坡开了侦探小说之先河，那么英国作家威尔基柯林斯对侦探小说的贡献，主要表现在以下两个方面：（一）是他把侦探小说从短篇引向长篇。（二）是他首先在侦探小说中塑造了一个职业侦探，并有意识地为现实生活中的侦探树碑立传。

威尔基柯林斯（1824-1889），英国小说家。他生于伦敦，父亲是个风景画家，他早年就读于海堡私立学校，12岁随父母移居意大利，15岁回到英国学习法律，学成后当了律师。1847年，其父逝世，23岁的他尝试写作，第一部作品是记叙其父生平的《威廉柯林斯的一生》。1850年，他创作了第一部小说《罗马的陷落》。接着又写了《贝锡尔》、《捉迷藏》，并认识了当时著名的大作家狄更斯。在文学的熏陶下，他成为一个流行小说作家，他的不少作品在维多利亚时代最风行的杂志《家常话》上发表，如《日落以后》、《死亡的秘密》、《我的杂志》等等，他的代表作是《月亮宝石》、《白衣女人》和《新济良所》。另外，《可怜的芬区小姐》、《一个流浪汉的一生》、《黑袍》均有一定的影响。

《月亮宝石》是威尔基柯林斯创作巅峰时期的代表作，也是世界侦探小说史上的一部杰作。我们不妨从这部作品来认识威尔基柯林斯侦探小说的特点与艺术风格。

《月亮宝石》以英国侵略印度圣城西林加巴坦为背景，英国军官汗卡什在王宫中抢得了举世闻名的月亮宝石，印度人不甘心国宝落入异邦，暗中跟踪他至英国，并伺机袭击他。汗卡什为了嫁祸于他人，临终前把月亮宝石送给了他的外甥女雷茜儿，从此，雷茜儿一家闹得乌烟瘴气，无一宁日。未几，月亮宝石竟不翼而飞了，各种人怀着不同的目的在寻找它，月亮宝石给占有它的人制造了命运的悲剧。最终，在百折不挠的印度人的努力下，终于物归原主，月亮宝石回到了印度圣城。

这部作品的叙述方法是很别致的，作者采用了各个不同的人物分头叙述各个不同的故事，然后连贯起来，使故事的发展充满了悬念与疑云。整个作品的情节错综复杂、曲折离奇，让读者疑虑丛生。作者又借助于书中侦探克夫探长之手不断拨开疑云，让神秘莫测的案子逐步显露真相。作者的叙述与交代层次分明，揭示罪犯的作案手段犹若抽茧剥蕉，丝丝入扣。读完全书，我们不得不佩服作者的聪明与他笔下那位克夫探长的机智与老练。

《月亮宝石》不仅故事生动，情节跌宕起伏，而且还塑造了一大批栩栩如生的人物典型。雷茜儿的闺秀气派、弗兰克林的大少爷作风、高孚利的虚情假意、贝特里奇的固执、罗珊娜的痴迷、克莱克的伪善、西格雷夫的愚昧昏庸，都衬托出书中主角克夫探长的料事如神，据威尔基柯林斯自述，克夫探长这一形象并非他的虚构，他是根据英国警察厅刑事部的一位警探作模特的。他首先为现实生活中的警探树碑立传，并根据他的事迹塑造了一个正面的英雄人物，这说明当时社会对警察这一形象已经有了观念上的转变，在19世纪初，读者并不会接受克夫探长这一形象，而到了19世纪末，克夫探长在文学作品中的出现引起了读者广泛的喜爱，这表明了英国法律在社会现实中有所进步。

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

威尔基柯林斯被誉为英国的通俗文学大师，也有人称他是英国侦探小说之父。这除了赞扬他在侦探小说史上的两大突破，还对其作品的思想性与艺术性作了肯定的评价。他的作品笔调辛辣还带有幽默感，在叙述中时而夹入风趣的语言。他大胆揭露了英国侵略军队在印度圣城犯下的滔天罪行，对侵略者烧杀掠抢、破坏古迹、盗窃神器的行径作了有力的抨击，并刻划了英国上流社会的世态炎凉与某些宗教的虚伪。无疑，这部侦探小说在思想内涵与艺术特色上，都是非常成功的。

由此可见，英国作家威尔基柯林斯在创作侦探小说方面，比美国作家爱伦坡又迈出了更大的一步。如果杜宾是一个业余侦探，那么克夫探长则是一个职业侦探；杜宾解开谜底只凭想象与推理，而克夫探长则亲自调查，跟踪罪犯，历经种种艰险，就更为令人亲切可爱了。克夫探长所遇到的疑案也比杜宾碰到的案子复杂得多、惊险得多。整个故事的情节一波三折，更具可读性。威尔基柯林斯的创作更接近于通俗文学范畴。

但是，威尔基柯林斯创作的侦探小说仍然有一些不足，就以《月亮宝石》而言，全书有40万字（中译本仅20多万字），书中的枝节大多，有不少冗长乏味的叙述以及与破案无关的情节。小说中侦探的成分是加强了，但推理的方法还欠精确，再以威尔基柯林斯一生的创作来说，侦探小说只占了他整个创作的三分之一，他还不是一个专门从事侦探小说写作的小说家，尽管如此，他创作的《月亮宝石》对柯南道尔等侦探小说家的出现是有重大启发的，尤其对推动英国文坛侦探小说的创作起了先导作用。

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

Language points :

1. the novel the Moonstone is set in England in 1848, but the story really began 50 years later.

The book is set in France in the eighteenth century. 这部书是以18世纪的法国为背景的。

This novel is set in the gold rush. 这部小说是以淘金热为背景的。

Set 其他意思：

He set his hand on my shoulder. 他把手放在我的手上。

Please set the table for dinner. 请摆好餐桌准备就餐。

Have you set the time for the meeting?你们把开会时间定下来了吗？

The sun rises in the east and sets in the west. 太阳从东方升起在西方落下。

He set a diamond in a ring. 他把一块宝石镶嵌在戒指上。

2. curse n. 诅咒, 咒语, 祸根, 祸因 vt. 诅咒, 咒骂, 降祸, 使受罪

Our tribe is under a curse. 我们的部族正遭天谴。

Foxes can be a curse to farmers. 狐狸可给农民带来祸害。

a terrible bolt of lightning; a terrible curse. 可怕的闪电；可怖的诅咒

It is essential for us to try to decide whether television is a blessing or a curse. 我们有必要来评断电视到底是福还是祸。

Selfishness is the greatest curse of the human race. {William Ewart Gladstone) 自私是人类最大的祸根(威廉尤尔特格拉德斯通)

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

Act 做动词的用法：

Think before acting. 三思而后行。

The medicine was taken for a long time, but it failed to act. 药已经服了很长时间，但还未见效。

Act 与action 区别：

Action做可数名词时，常与act 同义。 如：

但act 多指具体的，短时间的行为或行动； action 多指复杂的持续的行为或行动。

2）在一些固定用法中。 如：an act of cruelty (残忍的行为)， an act of war（战争行为） , an act of mercy（仁慈的行为） 等中，不能用action 又如take action (采取行动)也是固定搭配。

4. But from the moment Rachel fastens it to her dress, things start going wrong.

Fasten to 把。。。系在。。。

The bookshelf is fastened to the wall. 这个书架是固定在墙壁上的。

When we went to visit her, she was not in. we wrote a note and fastened it to the door. 我们去看她时她不在，我们只好写了张便条钉到门上。

Go wrong 出毛病，不对头 如：

Something has gone wrong with my bike. 我的自行车出了点问题。

The party was going well until Mary arrived, then everything went wrong. Mary 来之前晚会开的很成功， 可后来一切都不对了。

5. as the story develops …

As 意思是“随着”。 如：

As time went by, he began to realize that he should have studied hard. 随着时间的推移， 她开始意识到他本该好好学习的。

He doesn’t like skating as much as he used to. 他不象以前那么喜欢滑冰了。

I have told the story just as it happened. 我已如实讲了这件事。

As you object, I’ll reconsider the plan. 既然你反对，我就重新考虑一下这个计划。

虽然，

Much as I like the book, I can’t afford to buy it. 尽管我很喜欢这本书，可我买不起。

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

He was interested in his work to such a degree that he thought about nothing else. 他对工作如此感兴趣，以致于他从来不想别的事情。

To a certain degree he likes his job. 在某种程度上他喜欢他的工作。

7. guilty 惭愧（about），有过失的，有罪责的(of)

I felt guilty about not visiting my parents more often. 我因没有常去看望父母而感到内疚。

John had a guilty look on his face. John 脸上显出惭愧的表情。

The jury found the defendant not guilty of the offence. 陪审团裁决被告无罪。

We’ve all been guilty of selfishness at some time in our lives. 我们每个人都有过自私自利的过失。

The bank strongly resisted cutting interest rates. 银行强烈反对降低利率。

He couldn’t resist showing off his new car. 他忍不住炫耀起了他的新车。

9. stain vt. 沾污，染污， 染色，玷污，败坏。 n. 污点，污渍

The juice from the berries stained their fingers red. 浆果汁把他们的手指染成了红色。

Stain the specimen before looking at it under the microscope. 先把标本染成红色，再放到显微镜下观察。

a blood / a coffee / an ink, etc. stain

You’ll need to convince them of your enthusiasm for the job. 你要使他们相信你殷切希望得到工作。

[vn (that)] I’d convinced myself (that) I was right.

I’ve been trying to convince him to see a doctor. 我一直劝他去看病。

a convincing argument / explanation / case 有说服力的论点／解释／事例

She sounded very convincing to me. 我觉得她的话很有说服力。

Convinced 坚信，确信（~ (of sth / that ... )

I am convinced of her innocence. 我坚信她清白无辜。

I am convinced that she is innocent.

Sam nodded but he didn’t look convinced. Sam点了点头，但是看起来并没有信服。

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

Let us assume for a moment that the plan succeeds. 咱们假设计划成功。

She would, he assumed, be home at the usual time. 他认为，她会在通常时间回家的。

It is generally assumed that stress is caused by too much work. 普遍认为，紧张系工作过重所致。

I had assumed him to be a Belgian. 我本以为他是比利时人。

3. meanwhile adv./n. 同时， 其间，（两方面）对比之下

The doctor will see you again next week. Meanwhile, you must rest as much as possible.

Stress can be extremely damaging to your health. Exercise, meanwhile, can reduce its effects. 压力对你的健康非常有害，而锻炼会减少这种害处。

I hope to go to medical school eventually. In the meanwhile, I am going to study chemistry. 我希望最终能上医学院，这其间我打算学化学。

4. in all my years as a detective, I have never heard of a thief having such a loss of memory.

这里a thief having …是动名词的复合结构。作宾语时，名词多用通格。至于代词多用宾格。 如：

What about us going out for a walk?

I wonder if you’d mind us asking a few questions.

高考题：

Victor apologized for ___ to inform me of the change in the plan.

A his being not able B him not to be able C his not being able D him to be not able

答案是C.

to accuse sb of murder / theft She accused him of lying.

The government was accused of incompetence

6. desperate 冒险的，绝望的，

The prisoners grew increasingly desperate.

非常需要，渴望 ~ (for sth)| ~ (to do sth)

He was so desperate for a job he would have done anything.

I was absolutely desperate to see her.

相关高考题：

Sandy could do nothing but ___ to his teacher that he was wrong.

A admit B admitted C admitting D to admit

Teaching main-points: Vocabulary and grammar revision in the process of the integration between the teacher and the ss

Teaching Crux: 1) SS’ explanation about the vocabulary and grammar

2) Teacher’s further explanation and supplement

Teaching materials & focuses:

while 表示让步，通常位于句首，意思是“尽管；虽然”。又如：

While I agree with your reasons, I can’t allow it. 尽管我同意你的理由，但我不允许你这样做。

While he loves his stuents, he is very strict with them. 虽然他爱他的学生，可是他对学生们很严格。

While 其他用法归纳如下：

1）引导时间状语从句，意思是“当。。。的时候，和。。。同时”。从句中谓语通常是延续性动词。

如：Mary watched TV while she ate her supper. 玛丽边吃饭边看电视。

While she was listening to the radio, she fell asleep. 她听着收音机睡着了。

2）表示对比或转折，意思是“而，然而”。此时，while 一般谓语句中。 如：

Some people waste food while others haven’t enough. 有人浪费粮食，而有人却吃不饱。

高考相关：

I do every single bit of housework ____ my husband Bob just does the dishes now and then.

答案是B.

人教版英语课件 篇6

我们全体七年级英语教师，在上一学期经过共同努力取得较好成绩的基础上，继续坚持面向全体学生，趁势而上，进一步深入搞好教学工作。

积极全面开展教学、教育和科研工作，通过整个备课组的努力，力争英语成绩在去年的水平上有一定程度的提高。

1、加强理论学习，更新教学观念，统一教育思想。

全组教师重点学习《基础教育课程改革纲要》、《英语课程标准》等有关课程改革的材料。认真体会和理解新课程标准中的理念，并用这些理念来指导平时的课堂教学，以提高课堂教学效率。

2、加强备课组建设，抓好业务学习。

首先把备课组工作具体化，目标化，制度化。加强备课组自身建设：①准时参加每周三的备课组活动，不迟到，不早退，不无故请假。②中心发言人，提前做好充分准备，积极发言，写好有关备课材料。③各组员积极发言，各抒己见，百花齐放，做到一人有高招，大家都受益，提倡团队合作，严禁单打独斗。④组织业务学习，组内互学互提高。⑤准时上缴教案、听课笔记等。

发挥集体备课的群体优势，通过提高备课质量，落实教学常规，提高课堂教学效率。强调每一位教师要在备课中，严格按照学校的要求，做到清晰、规范，备过程、备方法、备教

材、备学生，。充分利用本校的电脑和网络的优势，运用现代教学理论设计多媒体教学辅助课件，推动学科教学与信息技术的有效整合。课后认真反思，及时总结得失，以利于以后的教学。要求教师布置适量练习，教师细心批改，了解学生掌握知识情况，组内及时交流各班存在的共性问题，便于及时弥补。诚心听课，真心评课，认真写好听课笔记，便于评课时集体评议，多指缺点，少唱赞歌，做到共同学习，共同提高。

人教版英语课件 篇7

Aims and demands:

通过本单元教学，学生能熟练地运用“打电话”的常用语；复习第13~17单元的语法项目；了解办公设备现代化和有关放火安全的知识。

Importance and difficulty:

1. words and expressions:

rush sb. off his feet, change, action, repair, work on, fix up

2. important sentences:

A. It is better to ask for help at the beginning rather than to wait until a busy period when everyone is rushed off their feet.

B. What is more, this “information line” operates 24 hours a day.

C. It did not take the firefighters long to pot out the fire, and they at once started to look for causes of the fire.

D. They had to work inside the ship, cutting away old metal, fixing new metal plate, drilling holes, laying electrical and phone wires and fixing new pipes for water and steam.

3. Grammar: review –ing form, to do form and predicative

4. Useful expressions:

A. May I speak to …?

B. Hello. Who’s that speaking?

C. I called to tell you…..

D. Hold on, please.

E. Wait a moment.

F. Can I take ( leave ) a message?

Aims and demands:

Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.

Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides

Teaching procedure:

I can store and recall as much information as possible, and I can work at a very high speed. In modern times, you can’t work without me. What am I? ( computer )

T: Where can you find computer?

S: They are mostly found in offices……

T: What else may you expect find in a large modern office?

( write these words on the blackboard and read after the teacher)

choose the right title for each section

T: What is the fax machine? How does it work?

S: When you place a sheet of paper in a fax machine, the machine “reads” the writing on the page and changes the shapes of letters into electronic signals. It then sends these signals down an ordinary telephone line to another fax machine, which changes the signals back into the shapes of letters.

T: What are the advantages of sending a fax?

Ss: Speed. You can send texts, pictures, diagrams, designs maps and so on .

T: What are the disadvantages of sending a fax?

Ss: It is expensive and not private. ( it can be read by anyone)

T: What is the photocopier? How does it work?

Ss: It can copy a long report and sort the copies and pin them together.

T: What can modern photocopying machines do?

Ss: Modern machines can make the copy bigger or smaller , lighter or darker and copy onto both sides of the paper.

T: What is the word processor? How many parts is the word processor made up of?

Ss: It is made up of three parts . ( a typewriter keyboard, a printer and a computer )

T: What are the advantages of a word processor?

Ss: You can make changes easily and can print a report very quickly.

T: What is the answering machine?

Ss: It is a telephone with a tape recorder.

T: What are the advantage of an answering machine?

Ss: It can receive messages when no one is in the office and can give information.

Step 4. Listening for general understanding

Listen to the tape and write down the headings above the right sections of the text.

Comprehension exercise for Unit 18 Lesson 69 (3B)

Read fast to get a general idea of the passage and fill in the following blanks with one of the four choices below.

1. ____ is a type of machine used to make copies from newspapers, books or reports.

2. ____ is used to send messages including words , pictures, designs and maps.

3. ____ is a kind of machine used to type materials, save them for future use and make changes if necessary.

4. ____ is used to record telephone messages when the receiver is absent.

II. Further comprehension CCADC DBBD

1. Which is WRRONG about learning to use office equipment?

A. It can make the work in offices go smoothly .

B. It is necessary for beginners in offices.

C. It should be learnt during a busy period.

D. It may help you to get a promotion (普升机会).

2. Which is correct about sending a fax?

A. It can be done only during working hours.

B. Sometimes it might take a week or so.

C. It isn’t a good choice to send top-secret information by fax machine.

D. Reports in English cannot be faxed.

3. A word processor ____.

A. can type a long report and make changes

B. can produce colour copies when necessary

C. can send information both at home and abroad

D. includes a keyboard, a photocopier and a computer

4. ____ can be used to answer a phone call automatically (自动地) when you are out.

A. The photocopier B. The fax machine

C. The word processor D. The answering machine

5. What is one disadvantage of sending a fax?

A. We can send a fax only in the office hours.

B. Message sent by a fax are hard to read.

C. We cannot send secret information through a fax machine.

D. Foreigners cannot understand Chinese letters sent by a fax.

6. What can’t a word processor do?

A. Typing a letter.

B. Printing documents.

C. Coping a on report.

D. Sending picture.

7. What does “be rushed off one’s feet” mean in paragraph 1?

A. be on business B. be busy and tired

C. be tired out D. run out of the office

8. The writer says “The fax has greatly changed office work, especially in China.” Because ____.

A. it can send information quickly

B. it is much easier to change Chinese characters into electronic signals

C. it can do a lot of work for the Chinese people such as making copies, posting letters

D. it makes office work easy to do

9.“The fax has greatly changed office work,especially in China.” The underlined word means ____.

Aims and demands:

Aims and demands:

Importance and difficulty: Have a deeper understanding of the text.

Teaching aid: tape recorder and some slides

Teaching procedure:

T: What may cause a fire?

---- smoking, playing with fire ……

T: What is often used to put out the fire?

---- Water, CO……

T: What kind of gas do we breathe?

( Name some of the gases in the air we breathe. )

---- Oxygen, hydrogen……

People may be in danger if there is not enough oxygen. But too much oxygen may cause danger to people , too.

Step 2. Reading for general understanding

Read the text and find out :

1. Where did the fire happen?

----- In a ship which was in a port in Scotland for repairs.

2. What started the fire?

----- A worker fixed the air-line to a supply of oxygen instead of compressed air.

See which pair of Ss can find out the correct answer before the others.

---- The man actually connected the air-line to the oxygen supply line.

1. put these events in the correct order

9-12-6-13-1-4-11-8-3-10-14-7-5-2

Comprehension for Unit 18 Lesson 70 (3B) BDBCD ACAB

1. An extra team of men were sent to repair the ship because ___.

B. this ship needed to be repaired quickly

D. there was a lot of work to do

2. The man took a long time to connect the rubber pipe to the air supply pipe because ___.

A. he smoked a cigarette during the working hours

B. he had to drill holes and lay electrical wires first

C. he found something strange in the air and stopped to have a check

3. There was a strange smell when one man lit a cigarette because ___.

A. the cigarette had the smell itself

B. the smell was caused by the oxygen

C. there was something wrong with the man’s nose

D. the ship was beginning to burn

4. Which of the following is true?

A. The fire caused great damage to the ship.

B. There was an explosion happened inside the ship.

C. No damage was done to the deck at the end of the ship.

D. The fuel on ship caused the fire.

5. What measures were taken to prevent a fire accident?

A. Talks on safety were given to new workers.

B. Smoking was not allowed in the workplace.

C. All the supply lines and taps were marked with signs and warnings.

D. Both A and C.

6. In the ship the “air-line” provides ____.

A. compressed air B. water and steam

7. When the fire broke out, ____.

A. some men sounded the fire alarm

B. all the men jumped into the sea

C. most of the men managed to escape

8. The men’s cigarettes burned strangely and tasted bad because ____ .

A. there was too much oxygen inside

B. something was wrong with the cigarettes

D. lots of compressed air was inside

9. What was the real cause of the fire?

A. The third person struck a match for a cigarette.

B. The air-line was fixed to a supply line of oxygen instead of compressed air.

C. Too many workers smoked in the ship.

D. The fittings the workers had used to repair the ship didn’t match.

Rearrange the following events ( Lesson 70 )

a. It took him some time to connect the long rubber pipe to the air supply pipe that ran round the port, but at last it was done and as a result work was able to progress much faster.

b. Half an hour later, another man struck a match for a cigarette and this time the whole of the inside of the ship caught fire.

c. They had to work inside the ship.

d. A navy ship was in a port in Scotland for repairs.

e. It was important to carry out the work quickly, so an extra team of men were asked to work on the repairs one evening.

f. Another man lit a cigarette but it burnt strangely and so he too put it out.

g. One man was told to fix up an “air-line” to provide compressed air for the machines they were using.

h. After three hours, the men stopped for a meal break. When work continued, one man lit a cigarette as he was working, but, finding it had a strange taste, he put it out.

Translate the following sentences (Lesson 69~70)

1． 一旦他作出决定就不会改变。

Once she made the decision, she wouldn’t change her mind.

2． 我到过那儿一次。

I have been there once.

3． 这是她父亲曾经工作过的地方。

This is the place where her father once worked.

4． 该去的是約翰而不是杰克。

John should go rather than Jack.

5． 这些鞋子穿起来很舒服，但并不漂亮。

These shoes are comfortable rather than pretty.

I love swimming rather than skating.

I decided to write rather than ( to ) telephone.

We ought to check up, rather than just accept what he says / accepting what he says.

6． 与其让这些蔬菜烂掉，他宁愿以一半的价格把他们卖掉。

Rather than allow the vegetables to go bad, he sold them at half price.

Would / had rather do sth than do…

Would / had rather sb. did…

I would rather you knew that now than afterwards.

7． 他们播种忙得个不可开交。( rush sb. off one’s feet )

They are rushed off their feet with the sowing.

8． 没有必要对这个计划作出修改。

It is not necessary to make any changes in the plan.

9． 我觉得是我该采取行动的时候了。

I felt it ( was ) time for me to take ( an ) action.

10． 我没有去看望王先生，因为那天下大雨. 再说，我身边也没有他的地址。

I didn’t go to see Mr. Smith , because it was raining hard. What’s more, I didn’t have his address.

11． 中国有许多人正在从事一项“希望工程”，帮助穷苦孩子们上学。

Many people in China are working on a “Project Hope” , helping poor children to go to school.

12． 他在致力于发明一种办公用的新式机器。

He is working on inventing a new type of machine for office work.

13． 他不得不工作到六十多岁。

He has to work on until he was sixty.

14． 政府给无家可归的人提供食宿。

The government provided food and shelter for those who were homeless / the homeless.

The government supplied (provide ) the homeless with food and shelter.

15． 他们在忙着安装电灯。

They are busy fixing up the lights.

Translate:

A. He fixed up the broken chair. 修理

B. I can easily fix you up for the night. 给…... 安排住处

C. We have fixed up a date for the picnic. 确定

D. I’ve fixed up a visit to the theater for next Friday. 安排

E. Do I have to fix up to go to the party. 打扮

16． 花了我一整天的时间修理这台彩电。

It took me a whole day to fix up the colour TV set.

17． 你应该争取尽快赶到那儿。

You should try to get there as soon as you can.

You should try to get there as soon as possible.

18． 许多人逃出大火着火了。

Many people escaped from the big fire, with their clothes on fire.

19． 老师走进教室，手里拿着一本书。

The teacher came into the classroom, with a book in his hand.

20． 她似乎（已经）听到了这件事。

She appeared / seemed to have heard about it already.

It seemed / appeared that she had already heard about it.

21． 房子烧了，准是有什么原因。

The house was burned down. There must have been some cause.

22． 这婴孩昨夜哭个不停，他准是得了病。

The baby kept crying last night . He must have been ill.

人教版英语课件 篇8

PEP小学英语三年级下册Unit 4 Where is my car

概述：

小学人教版三年级下册Unit4Where is my car?本单元共需六个课时，本课是第一课时，本课主要教学内容是学习单词desk, in, under, Where is ...It’s in\\\\ under ...并在具体的语境中使用句型,在课堂教学中，教师要使教学内容生活化，结合学生的实际情境，使学生口语练习生活化，交际化，从而达到学以致用的目的。

设计理念:

在跨越式为指导下，以语言运交际为中心，借助现代信息技术，努力为学生创设理想的英语学习环境，提供丰富的网络资源，倡导体验、实践、参与、交流与合作的学习方式。倡导任务型教学，把语言综合运用能力的培养落实在教学过程中。面向全体学生，突出“以人为本”的素质教育理想，使语言教学的过程同时成为提高人文素养、增强实践能力、培养创新精神的过程。

教学目标: 1.知识目标.能听、说、认读单词 desk, in, under,句型：Where is ...It’s in\\\\ under ...2.能力目标

能在具体的语境中使用句型, Where is ...It’s in\\\\ under ...并且用已经学过的学习用具来练习Let’s play的内容。

结合实际生活，创设真实情境，激发学生学习兴趣和热情，提高学习的积极性和主动性，增长课外知识，激发学习热情。

学情分析: 由于学生是三年级学生参加跨越式教学已经有一学期了，他们已经适应了跨越式课堂模式，听说能力都比较强。乐于感知，模仿习得英语。所以本节课采用多种方式来教学，让学生从不同的教学活动中获取知识。

教学重难点:

教学重点：能听、说、认读单词 desk, in, under,句型：Where is ...It’s in\\\\ under ...教学难点：where 的读音，能理解方位介词in, under 的含义。 教学策略:

由于三年级学生已学习英语一学期了，读与说的能力相对较好，因此在教学过程中采用语言交际的教学策略，通过角色扮演、情景创设、教室内真实的辅助性教学资源提供等,多种方式，激发学生学习积极性，帮助学生领会教具准备: 1.相关人物单词的图片和卡片。 2.教师自制的PPT。

教学过程:

一.Warm-up /Revision (5minutes) sing a song.(2minutes) 教师播放歌曲《Where is the toy car?》

【设计意图：让学生唱熟悉的歌曲，既能激发学生的兴趣，又能营造英语氛围帮助学生进入学习英语的环境中。】

1教师指着教室里的一张桌子说：This is a desk.It’s a yellow desk.从而让学生知道desk就是桌子的意思。然后教师把一支铅笔放在桌子里面说：Where is my pencil? It’s in the desk.教师又把一本书放到桌子上说：Where is my book? It’s on the desk.教师又把铅笔盒放在桌子底下说：Where is my pencil box? It’s under the desk.【设计意图：采用教室里的具体的实物和学习用具来展示单词，可以降低学生学习的难度，学生会很好奇，也可以激发学生学习的兴趣。】

2.教师在PPT上进一步展示图片来练习单词和句子。 【设计意图：进一步巩固和练习所学新句子。】

3.教师播放 Let’s play 部分的录音，然后让学生把自己的文具和自己制作的单词卡片拿出来做练习。

【设计意图：让学生在玩中学，在学中玩，也可以巩固和练习所学新句子。】 对话内容，提高学生的语言交际能力。

4.对话练习(Model\\\\Pair work\\\\Feedback) A: What can you see? B: I can see a bag/book … A: Where is the ruler/pencil…? B: It’s in /on/under… 两人一组练习展示。

【设计意图：利用真实的情景把学到的知识活用到言语交际中，从而实现跨越式的要求。】

总共四篇阅读材料。第一篇是课本上的听力材料，听后让学生回答问题：Where is the book? 第二篇是dialogue2-2 听后让学生获取新单词：behind，next.第三篇是让学生获取新句型: There are some …in/under.第四篇是reading1听后让学生回答问题：Where is my market? 【设计意图：让学生听读与课本内容相关的短文，大信息量输入，丰富学生的语言，在语境中体会、理解新知。培养学生自主听读的能力及语感。通过听 后反馈信息，在交流中进一步学习拓展句型。】

四. Cooperation and making dialogues 8分 支架如下：

A: What can you see? B: I can see a … A: Where is the … B: It’s in/under the … A: What colour is it? B: It’s … 两人一组练习展示。

【设计意图:此环节是对学生听读情境对话的反馈和运用，同时也是在语言输入的基础上为学生提供语言输出的机会，在老师的示范和引导下进行对话，培养学生灵活运用语言的能力。既能落实课标的要求，又能实现语言的迁移运用。】

五. Summary What did you learn? 【设计意图:总结本课学习的内容，使学生产生成就感，激发学习英语的兴趣。】

和同学们用自己的学习用具练习今天所学的句型。 【设计意图:复习巩固本课所学内容。】 板书设计：

Unit 4 Where is my car?

desk in Where is …? under It’s in\\\\under …

人教版英语课件 篇9

1. Get students to learn some useful new words and expressions in this part.

2. Get students to read the letter.

3. Let students learn the prohibition, warning and permission.

1. Develop students’ reading skills and enable them to learn how to use different reading strategies to read different reading materials.

2. Enable student s to understand how to give advice.

1. Stimulate students’ interests of learning English by reading and acting this play.

2. Develop students’ sense of group cooperation and teamwork.

1.state the main idea of each paragraph in own words

2.ways to become addicted to cigarettes

3.the harmful effects of smoking

1. sorting out major idea and minor idea

2. master key words in key sentence

1.An apple a day keeps the doctor away.

2.Early to bed and early to rise, makes a man healthy, wealthy and wise.

1How many parts does the reading text consist of?

2. Who wrote the letter to whom?

3. How many ways can a man become addicted to smoking?

1. The first sentence of the letter shows James granddad______ .

A. lives a healthy life B. is addicted to sitting in the garden

C. has nothing to do at home D. is tired when cycling 20 kilometers

2. From the second paragraph, we can know granddad ______________.

A . never smoked B. likes smoking

C. used to smoke heavily D. still smokes now

Ask students to discuss the following questions in pairs.(让学生分组讨论，形成书面形式)

1.Different ways people can become addicted to cigarettes.

Write some advice to persuade smokers to quit smoking

How to live a healthy life?

1. write down the suggestions given by granddad

2. try to persuade one to give up smoking

人教版英语课件 篇10

●教学目标

1．熟练运用现在进行时进行语言交流

2．通过看图对话，学会描述进行中的`动作。

●教学用具

录音机、投影仪、图片等。

●教学步骤

Step 1 Revision

复习Whats he/she doing? He/She’s making a cake．叫三名学生到讲台上。A表演动作，B问Is he reading/playing. ..？ C答Yes, he is./No, he isnt．让学生三人一组做类似的练习。

Step 2 Presentation

教师通过具体的动作教一些单词，如 talk, talk with, open, close, take photos等。然后用这些单词或词组造句子，反复练习。也可以让几个学生到讲台上表演，然后问同学Whats he/she doing? Is he/she opening the door? What’s he/she doing? He/She is closing the window. What are they doing? They are taking photos．

Step 3 Practice

＊ 打开书23页第一部分， 让学生边听录音边找正确的图片。

＊ 第二部分，让学生看彩图三，两人一组进行对话练习

Step 4 Consolidation

句型转换：

1. We clean our classroom in the afternoon. But we don’t do it now. It’s still early in the morning. (画线部分改为现在进行时)

We______ ______our classroom now. It’s dirty. It needs cleaning.

2. They are playing football at school. (画线部分改为否定句)

They ______ ______football at school. They’re playing football somewhere else.

3. Im doing my homework now. (画线部分改为一般疑问句并作否定回答)

______ ______doing ______homework now? ______, ____________.

4. Speak in English. (画线部分改为否定句)

______ ______in English now. These old men don’t understand English.

5. The twins are singing in the room. (对画线部分提问)

______are the twins ______in the room?

Answers: 1. are cleaning 2.aren’t playing 3. Are you, your. No, I’m not 4. Don’t speak 5. What, doing

Blackboard Handwriting

Blackboard Handwriting

Lesson 83

You arent talking.

He/She isn’t writing.

Is he/she opening the door?

Yes, he/she is.

No, he/she isn’t.

人教版英语课件 篇11

教学目的：

1．使学生了解什么是想象和联想；

2．认识想象与联想在写作中的作用及其重要性；

3．能够在写作中正确运用想象与联想。

教学重点与难点：

使学生明确想象与联想的含义，能够在写作中进行恰当的想象与联想。

课前导入:

行想象与联想，会使我们的思路开阔，文章含蓄隽永。今天我们就来学习在写作过程中如何进行想象和联想。

一．下面我们就来做一个小练习：

1.根据屏幕上杜甫的诗句描绘心中的画面请同学们来展示自己的图画并简述自己的构思设计（大约五个学生：孟群霍梦珍乔爽郭建郭倩颖）

师：以上几个同学的画面，以及屏幕上的画面都是根据同一首诗作的，但画面内容互不相同，为什么呢？

生：因为每个人对这首诗的理解是不同的，画面带上了自己的主观色彩，所以作出来的

《二十岁的坦白》我的将来到底是什么样的，本人没有经历过，只能是自己纯粹的想象。作者用过这样的设想给自己的生命画上美丽的结局。

临其境之感。

师：以上我们根据诗句构思画面，设想自己的未来，这样的思维过程就叫做想象。

想象还可以分为创造想象和再造想象。

如：李白没有见过神仙集会，那么他所描绘的彩虹的服饰，老虎鼓瑟，鸾鸟驾车的情节都是他独创的，那么这样的想象相对于李白来说就属于创造想象。当我们读了他的这首诗后，也做了一个梦，梦到诗中描绘的神仙形象，对我们而言，这种想象就属于再现想象了。因为我们想象的依据是诗人的描摹，我们接受了这样的语言信息。

联想集团有这样的广告语：联想是人类迈出的一小步，但也是历史迈出的一大步。由此我们可以体会到“联想”二字的分量。在文章中进行丰富的联想可以深化文章的主题。联想这种思维过程在写作中往往体现在象征手法的运用。

问：请同学们思考茅盾先生的《白杨礼赞》和高尔基的《海燕》，在文章中作者如何运用联想的？

答：作者由黄土高原上倔强生长，挺拔向上的高大的白杨联想到北方的抗日军民。

答：他们之间存在着相似的地方：不畏惧恶劣的环境，高大挺拔，所有的枝干都一律向上，力争上游，这些精神与北方抗日军民的精神是一致的，所以引发了作者的联想。

答：由狂风暴雨来临时在海面上高傲的飞翔的海燕想到了在革命激流中进行无畏斗争的无产阶级革命者。由躲在崖下的海鸭和企鹅，就想到了革命中的那些软弱者和投降者。引发作者进行这样联想的原因就是它们之间有相似之处。

师：还比如鲁迅先生的《拿来主义》，有什么都是“送去”想到了“拿来”，这也是一种联想；还比如鲁迅先生在《故乡》里描写：看到眼前面容枯瘦，精神麻木的闰土不禁想到了带着银项圈，拿着钢叉在月夜下捕獾时聪明伶俐，面色红润的少年闰土等等。类似的还有(请学生补充：豆腐西施杨二嫂，祥林嫂前后形象的对比)

联想：就是由当前的'某一事物想到另一事物，或右加观念想到一观念的心理过程。⑦

由于事物间存在着不同的联系，所以联想已有不同的方式。

师：综上所述：我们可以体会到想象与联想之间的区别就在于：一个是创造了新形象，一个没有创造新形象，而且由此及彼。但我们在思考的过程中，二者往往是紧密相连，不可分割的。爱因斯坦曾说：

“想象力比知识更重要，因为知识是有限的，而想象力概括着世界上的一切，推动着进步，并且是知识进化的源泉.”⑨

我国古代文学家刘勰在谈及想象和联想时也说:

问：仔细体会这幅画面，你认为它描绘了一种什么意境？此种意境会让你联想起那一首诗？

观察这幅画面它引发你那些想象和联想？哪国的建筑风格？这么高级的住宅和私家车，主人是干什么的？

八年级物理课件

栏目小编为您梳理了“八年级物理课件”的一些关键点和信息。老师会根据课本中的主要教学内容整理成教案课件，因此老师最好能认真写好每个教案课件。与此同时老师写好教案课件，对自己教学情况也能有所提升。请注意这些信息仅供参考并非完全准确或权威！

八年级物理课件 篇1

教学过程设计

（一）温度的概念

点拨温度：物体的冷热程度。

引导请同学们体验把左、右手分别放在冷水、热水中片刻后，一起放入温水中的不同感觉。

归纳要准确测量物理温度必须使用温度计。

实验体验温度。

结论靠感觉无法区水的冷热度。

3分

（二）温度计

点拨1.常见的温度计2.作用

引导3.观察常用温度计并归纳：①构造②工作原理

播放课件摄氏温度的定标

点拨4.摄氏温度的定标与读法

练习温度计的读数